Iccter Proceedings

PROCEEDINGS
ICCTER - 2014
2ND INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT
TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH
Sponsored By
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING &
TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT
Technical Program
22 September, 2014
Hotel NRS SAKITHYAN, Chennai
Organized By
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL
DEVELOPMENT
www.iaetsd.in
Copyright 2014 by IAETSD

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written
consent of the publisher.
ISBN: 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
http://www.iaetsd.in
Proceedings preparation, editing and printing are sponsored by

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY
FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT COMPANY
About IAETSD:
The International Association of Engineering and Technology for Skill
Development (IAETSD) is a Professional and non-profit conference organizing
company devoted to promoting social, economic, and technical advancements
around the world by conducting international academic conferences in various
Engineering fields around the world. IAETSD organizes multidisciplinary
conferences for academics and professionals in the fields of Engineering. In order
to strengthen the skill development of the students IAETSD has established.
IAETSD is a meeting place where Engineering students can share their views,
ideas, can improve their technical knowledge, can develop their skills and for
presenting and discussing recent trends in advanced technologies, new educational
environments and innovative technology learning ideas. The intention of IAETSD
is to expand the knowledge beyond the boundaries by joining the hands with
students, researchers, academics and industrialists etc, to explore the technical
knowledge all over the
world, to publish proceedings. IAETSD offers
opportunities to learning professionals for the exploration of problems from many
disciplines of various Engineering fields to discover innovative solutions to
implement innovative ideas. IAETSD aimed to promote upcoming trends in
Engineering.
About ICCTER:
The aim objective of ICCTER is to present the latest research and results of
scientists related to all engineering departments topics. This conference provides
opportunities for the different areas delegates to exchange new ideas and
application experiences face to face, to establish business or research relations and
to find global partners for future collaboration. We hope that the conference results
constituted significant contribution to the knowledge in these up to date scientific
field. The organizing committee of conference is pleased to invite prospective
authors to submit their original manuscripts to ICCTER 2014.
All full paper submissions will be peer reviewed and evaluated based on
originality, technical and/or research content/depth, correctness, relevance to
conference, contributions, and readability. The conference will be held every year
to make it an ideal platform for people to share views and experiences in current
trending technologies in the related areas.
Conference Advisory Committee:
Dr. P Paramasivam, NUS, Singapore

Dr. Ganapathy Kumar, Nanometrics, USA
Mr. Vikram Subramanian, Oracle Public cloud
Dr. Michal Wozniak, Wroclaw University of Technology,
Dr. Saqib Saeed, Bahria University,
Mr. Elamurugan Vaiyapuri, tarkaSys, California
Mr. N M Bhaskar, Micron Asia, Singapore
Dr. Mohammed Yeasin, University of Memphis
Dr. Ahmed Zohaa, Brunel university
Kenneth Sundarraj, University of Malaysia
Dr. Heba Ahmed Hassan, Dhofar University,
Dr. Mohammed Atiquzzaman, University of Oklahoma,
Dr. Sattar Aboud, Middle East University,
Dr. S Lakshmi, Oman University
Conference Chairs and Review committee:
Dr. Shanti Swaroop, Professor IIT Madras

Dr. G Bhuvaneshwari, Professor, IIT, Delhi
Dr. Krishna Vasudevan, Professor, IIT Madras
Dr.G.V.Uma, Professor, Anna University
Dr. S Muttan, Professor, Anna University
Dr. R P Kumudini Devi, Professor, Anna University
Dr. M Ramalingam, Director (IRS)
Dr. N K Ambujam, Director (CWR), Anna University
Dr. Bhaskaran, Professor, NIT, Trichy
Dr. Pabitra Mohan Khilar, Associate Prof, NIT, Rourkela
Dr. V Ramalingam, Professor,
Dr.P.Mallikka, Professor, NITTTR, Taramani
Dr. E S M Suresh, Professor, NITTTR, Chennai
Dr. Gomathi Nayagam, Director CWET, Chennai
Prof. S Karthikeyan, VIT, Vellore
Dr. H C Nagaraj, Principal, NIMET, Bengaluru
Dr. K Sivakumar, Associate Director, CTS.
Dr. Tarun Chandroyadulu, Research Associate, NAS
2nd ICCTER - 2014 CONTENTS

1
DEBLURRING OF NOISY OR BLURRED IMAGE BY USING KERNEL

ESTIMATION ALGORITHM
E-Passport
3
4
INVESTIGATION OF THERMAL BARRIER COATING ON I.C ENGINE

PISTON
INNOVATIVE BRICK MATERIAL
11
16
VLSI BASED FAULT DETECTION & CORRECTION SCHEME FOR THE

ADVANCED ENCRYPTION STANDARD USING COMPOSITE FIELD
34
NANO MATERIALS FILLED POLYMERS FOR REDUCING THE

THERMAL
PEAK TEMPERATURE IN A VEHICLE
41
RTOS BASED ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIAL TEMPERATURE AND

HUMIDITY MONITORING USING ARM PROCESSOR
45
UNDER-WATER WELDING USING ROBOTIC TECHNOLOGY
49
MODELING OF MAGNETICALLY COUPLED EMBEDDED Z SOURCE

INVERTER
55
10
11
RSVP PROTOCOL USED IN REAL TIME APPLICATION NETWORKS

VERSATILE BICYCLE
60
66
12
DATABASE INTRUSION DETECTION USING ROLE BASED ACCESS

CONTROL SYSTEM
73
13
14
15
16
17
18
DETECTION OF ADDICTION OF AN INDIVIDUAL AND AVOIDING

ADDICTION USING EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
SURFACE ROUGHNESS ANALYSIS OF DRILLING ON GFRP
COMPOSITES BY EXPERIMENTAL INVESTIGATION AND
PREDICTIVE MODELING
N-CHANCE BASED COORDINATED COOPERATIVE CACHE
REPLACEMENT ALGORITHM FOR SOCIAL WIRELESS NETWORKS
CELLULAR MOBILE BROADBAND USING MILLIMETER-WAVE FOR
5G SYSTEMS
ELECTRIC ROAD CLEANER
ANALYSIS OF OUTPUT DC CURRENT INJECTION IN 100KW GRID
CONNECTED VACON 8000 SOLAR INVERTER
79
86
92
99
106
114
19
ACTIVE RESOURCE PROVISION IN CLOUD COMPUTING THROUGH

VIRTUALIZATION
118
20
CPLM: CLOUD FACILITATED PRIVACY SHIELDING LEAKAGE

RESILIENT MOBILE HEALTH MONITORING
123
21
DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCERS

USING HV CLASS-F POWER AMPLIFIER
129
22
STUDY AND IMPLEMENTATION OF 3 STAGE QUANTUM

CRYPYOGRAPHY IN OPTICAL NETWORKS
133
23
DETECTION, RECOGNITION AND LOCALIZATION OF PARTIAL

DISCHARGE SOURCES USING ACOUSTIC EMISSION METHOD
140
24
25
26
27
28
29
EVASIVE SECURITY USING ACLS ON THREADS

BONE QUALITY ASSESSMENT USING MEMS ACCELEROMETER
ALTERNATE ENERGY IN THE TRACTIONS
ADS-B TECHNOLOGY WITH GPS AIDED GEO AUGMENTED
NAVIGATION
NETWORK SECURITY BASED ON TRACEBACK APPROACH BY
USING TRACER
EVALUATION: OFDMA & SC-OFDMA PERFORMANCE ON
WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
146
149
155
159
167
177
INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
DEBLURRING OF NOISY OR BLURRED

IMAGE BY USING KERNEL ESTIMATION
ALGORITHM
Joseph Anandraj1, R.Deepa2 and Margaret3
2
PG Student- M.Tech. VLSI Design & Embedded System Engineering

1,3
Assistant Professor
Dept. Electronics and Communication Engineering
Dr.MGR Educational and Research Institute, University
Chennai, Tamil Nadu, India.
rtdeepa2009@gmail.com
KEYWORDS: Matlab, deconvolution, kernel estimation

algorithm, deblurring and denoising process, iterative
method.
ABSTRACT:
This paper presents, that taking the photos
under dim lighting conditions using a hand-held camera
is challenging. If the camera is set to a long exposure
time, the image is blurred due to camera shake. On the
other hand, the image will be dark and noisy if it is
taken with a short exposure time with a high camera
gain. By combining information extracted from both
blurred and noisy images, however, this paper shows
how to produce a high quality image that cannot be
obtained by simply denoising the noisy image or
deblurring the blurred image alone. The aim of the
paper is image deblurring with the help of the noisy
image. First, both images are used to estimate an
accurate blur kernel, which otherwise is difficult to
obtain from a single blurred image. Second and again
using both images, a residual deconvolution is proposed
to reduce ringing artifacts inherent to image
convolution. Third, the remaining ringing artifacts in
smooth image regions are further suppressed by a gaincontrolled deconvolution process. We demonstrate the
effectiveness of our approach using a number of indoor
and outdoor images taken by off-the-shelf hand-held
cameras in poor lighting environments. We extensively
validate our method and show comparison with other
approaches with respect to blurred image noisy image
and our deblurred result.
I. INTRODUCTION
Capturing satisfactory photos under low
light conditions using a hand-held camera can be a
frustrating experience. Often the photos taken are
blurred or noisy. The brightness of the image can be
increased in three ways. First, to reduce the shutter
speed. But with a shutter speed below a safe shutter
speed (the reciprocal of the focal length of the lens, in
the unit of seconds), camera shake will result in a
blurred image. Second, to use a large aperture. A
large aperture will however reduce the depth of field.
Moreover, the range of apertures in a consumer-level
camera is very limited. Third, to set a high ISO.
However, the high ISO image is very noisy because
the noise is amplified as the cameras gain increases.
To take a sharp image in a dim lighting environment,
the best settings are: safe shutter speed, the largest
aperture, and the highest ISO.
Even with this combination, the captured image may
still be dark and very noisy. Another solution is using
a flash; this unfortunately often introduces artifacts
such as secularities and shadows. Moreover, flash
may not be effective for distant objects.
2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH

1
www.iaetsd.in
In this paper, a novel approach to produce a

high quality image by combining two degraded
images. One is a blurred image which is taken with a
slow shutter speed and low ISO settings. With
enough light, it has the correct color, intensity and a
high Signal-Noise Ratio (SNR).But it is blurry due to
camera shake. The other is an under exposed and
noisy image with a fast shutter speed and a high ISO
settings. It is sharp but very noisy due to insufficient
exposure and high camera gain. The colors of this
image are also partially lost due to low contrast.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Image deblurring can be categorized into

two types: blind deconvolution and non-blind
deconvolution. The former is more difficult since the
blur kernel is unknown. A comprehensive literature
view on image deblurring can be as demonstrated in
the real kernel caused by camera shake is complex,
beyond a simple parametric form (e.g., single one
direction motion or a Gaussian) assumed in previous
approaches natural image statistics together with a
sophisticated variation Bayes inference algorithm are
used to estimate the kernel. The image is then
reconstructed
using
a
standard
non-blind
deconvolution algorithm. Very nice results are
obtains when the kernel is small (e.g. 3030 pixels of
fewer). Kernel estimation for a large blur is, however,
inaccurate and unreliable using a single image. Even
with a known kernel, non-blind deconvolution is still
under-constrained. Reconstruction artifacts, e.g.,
ringing effects or color speckles, are inevitable
because of high frequency loss in the blurred image.
The errors due to sensor noise and quantization of the
image/kernel are also amplified in the deconvolution
process. For example, more iteration in the
Richardson-Lucy (RL) algorithm [H. Richardson
1972] will result in more ringing artifacts. In our
approach, we significantly reduce the artifacts in a
non-blind deconvolution by taking advantage of the
noisy image.
Recovering a high quality image from a very

noisy image is no easy task as fine image details and
textures are concealed in noise. Denoising cannot
completely separate signals from noise. On the other
hand, deblurring from a single blurred image is a
challenging blind deconvolution problem - both blur
kernel (or Point Spread Function) estimation and
image deconvolution is highly under-constrained.
Moreover, unpleasant artifacts (e.g., Ringing) from
image deconvolution, even when using a perfect
kernel, also appear in the reconstructed image.
This difficult image reconstruction problem
as an image deblurring problem, using a pair of
blurred and noisy images. Like most previous image
deblurring approaches, we assume that the image blur
can be well described by a single blur kernel caused
by camera shake and the scene is static. The two nonblind deconvolution problems are non-blind kernel
estimation and non-blind image deconvolution. In
kernel estimation, a very accurate initial kernel can
be recovered from the blurred image by exploiting
the large scale, sharp image structures in the noisy
image. The proposed kernel estimation algorithm is
able to handle larger kernels than those recovered by
using a single blurred image. Greatly to reduce the
ringing artifacts those commonly result from the
image deconvolution, by residual deconvolution
approach.
Also propose
a
gain-controlled
deconvolution to further suppress the ringing artifacts
in smooth image regions. All three steps - kernel
estimation, residual deconvolution, and gain
controlled deconvolution - take advantage of both
images. The final reconstructed image is sharper than
the blurred image and clearer than the noisy image.
Recently, spatially variant kernel estimation

has also been proposed in [Bardsley et al. 2006]. In
[Levin 2006], the image is segmented into several
layers with different kernels. The kernel in each layer
is uni-directional and the layer motion velocity is
constant. Hardware based solutions to reduce image
blur include lens stabilization and sensor
stabilization. Both techniques physically move an
element of the lens, or the sensor, to counter balance
the camera shake. Typically, the captured image can
be as sharp as if it were taken with a shutter speed 23 stops faster.
2.2 Single image denoising:
Image denoising is a classic problem
extensively studied. The challenge of image
denoising is how to compromise between removing
noise and preserving edge or texture. Commercial
software - e.g., Neat Image (www.neatimage.com)
and Imagenomic (www.imagenomic.com), use
wavelet-based approaches has also been a simple and
effective method widely used in computer graphics.
II. PREVIOUS WORKS

2.1 Single image deblurring:

2
www.iaetsd.in
Using two images for image deblurring or

enhancement has been exploited. This paper shows
the superiorities of our approach in image quality
compared with previous two-image approaches.
These approaches are also practical despite that
requires two images. We have found that the motion
between two a blurred/noisy image, when taken in a
quick succession, is mainly a translation. This is
significant because the kernel estimation is
independent of the translation, which only results in
an offset of the kernel in computer graphics. Other
approaches include anisotropic diffusion [Perona and
Malik 1990], PDE-based methods [Rudin et al.1992;
Tschumperle and Deriche 2005], fields of experts
[Roth and Black 2005], and nonlocal methods
[Buades et al. 2005].
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
proposed technique can obtain much accurate kernel

and produce almost artifact-free image by a deringing approach in deconvolution.
III. PROBLEM FORMULATION
We take a pair of images: a blurred image B
with a slow shutter speed and low ISO, and a noisy
image N with high shutter speed and high ISO. The
noisy image is usually underexposed and has a very
low SNR since camera noise is dependent on the
image intensity level [Liu et al. 2006]. Moreover, the
noise in the high ISO image is also larger than that in
the low ISO image since the noise is amplified by
camera gain. But the noisy image is sharp because we
use a fast shutter speed that is above the safe shutter
speed. We pre-multiply the noisy image by a ratio to
compensate for the exposure difference between the
blurred and noisy images
2.3 Multiple images deblurring and denoising:

Deblurring and denoising can benefit from
multiple images. Images with different blurring
directions [Bascle et al. 1996; Rav-Acha and Peleg
2000; Rav-Acha and Peleg 2005] can be used for
kernel estimation. In [Liu and Gamal 2001], a CMOS
sensor can capture multiple high-speed frames within
a normal exposure time. The pixel with motion
replaced with the pixel in one of the high-speed
frames. Raskar et al. [2006] proposed a fluttered
shutter camera which opens and closes the shutter
during a normal exposure time with a pseudo-random
sequence. This approach preserves high frequency
spatial details in the blurred image and produces
impressive results, assuming the blur kernel is
known. Denoising can be performed by a joint/cross
bilateral filter using flash/no-flash images or by an
adaptive spatio-temporal accumulation filter for
video sequences. Hybrid imaging system consists of
a primary sensor (high spatial resolution) and a
secondary sensor (high temporal resolution). The
secondary sensor captures a number of low
resolutions, sharp images for kernel estimation. This
approach estimates the kernel only from two images,
without the need for special hardware. Another
related work [Jia et al. 2004] also uses a pair of
images, where the colors of the blurred image are
transferred into the noisy image without kernel
estimation. However, this approach is limited to the
case that the noisy image has a high SNR and fine
details. This paper estimates the kernel and
deconvolution the blurred image with the help of a
very noisy image. The work most related to this
approach is [Lim and Silverstein 2006] which also
makes use of a short exposure image to help estimate
the kernel and deconvolution. However, this
ISO.B.tB
ISO.N.tN
where t is the exposure time. We perform
the multiplication in irradiance space then go back to
image space if the camera response curve [Debevec
and Malik 1997] is known. Otherwise, a gamma (=
2.0) curve is used as an approximation.
3.1 PROCESS:
The block diagram of the process of kernel
estimation is shown in fig.1:
Fig. 1 Block diagram of kernel estimation

algorithm

3
www.iaetsd.in
The goal is to reconstruct a high quality image I

using the input images B and N
B = IK,
(1)
where K is the blur kernel and is the convolution
operator .For the noisy image N, we compute a
denoised image ND [Portilla et al.2003] . ND loses
some fine details in the denoising process, but
preserves the large scale, sharp structures. We
represent the lost detail layer as a residual image I:
I = ND +I
(2)
Our first important observation is that the denoised
image ND is very good initial approximation to I for
the purpose of kernel estimation from Equation (1).
The residual image I is relatively small with respect
to ND. The power spectrum of the image I mainly
lies in the denoised image ND. Moreover, the large
scale, sharp image structures in ND make important
contributions for the kernel estimation. As will be
shown in our experiments on synthetic and real
images, accurate kernels can be obtained using B and
ND in non-blind convolution. Once K is estimated,
we can again use Equation (1) to non-blindly
deconvolute I, which unfortunately will have
significant artifacts,
e.g, ringing effects. Instead of recovering I directly,
we propose to first recover the residual image I
from the blurred image B. By combining Equations
(1) and (2), the residual image can be reconstructed
from a residual deconvolution:
B = IK,
(3)
where B = BND K is a residual blurred image.
Our second observation is that the ringing artifacts
from residual deconvolution of I (Equation (3)) are
smaller than those from deconvolution of I (Equation
(1)) because B has a much smaller magnitude than
B after being offset by
ND K,
(4)
The denoised image ND also provides a
crucial gain signal to control the deconvolution
process so that we can suppress ringing artifacts,
especially in smooth image regions. We propose a
deconvolution algorithm to further reduce ringing
artifacts. The above three steps - kernel estimation,
residual de-ringing approach using a gain-controlled
deconvolution, and de-ringing - are iterated to refine
the estimated blur kernel K and the deconvolute
image I.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
4.1 Iterative kernel estimation:

The goal of kernel estimation is to find the
blur kernel K from with the initialization
B =IK
I =ND
In vector-matrix form, it is b = Ak, where b and k
are the vector forms of B and K, and A is the matrix
form of I. The kernel k can be computed in the linear
least-squares sense. To stabilize the solution, we use
Tikhonov regularization method with a positive
scalar by solving
mink ||Akb||2+2||k||2.
But a real blur kernel has to be non-negative and
preserve energy, so the optimal kernel is obtained
from the following optimization system flowchart as
shown in fig.2:
Initialize (0)=0
Measurement z(k)
Calculate X
Calculate Z (K)
Given {z(j); j=1,.,m}
Calculate *l+1
|m(l*)| < ?
Y
N
*
(k)=
IV. KERNEL ESTIMATION ALGORITHM

In this section, we show that a simple
constrained least-squares optimization is able to
produce a very good initial kernel.
conv
Fig.2 Flowchart of an kernel estimation algorithm

4
www.iaetsd.in
min k ||Akb||2+2||k||2 ; ki 0 and

iki = 1.
We adopt the Landweber method [Engl et al. 2000]
to iteratively update as follows.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
between two images. It has two options to capture

such image pairs very quickly. Initially, choosing a
noisy an deblurred image fig.3(a); First, two
successive shots with different camera settings are
triggered by a laptop computer connected to the
camera. This frees the user from changing camera
settings between two shots. Second, using exposure
bracketing built in many DSLR cameras. In this
mode, two successive shots can be taken with
different shutter speeds by pressing the shutter only
once.
Using these two options, the time interval
between two shots can be very small, typically only
1/5second which is a small fraction of typical shutter
speed (> 1 second)of the blurred image. The motion
between two such shots is mainly a small translation
if we assume that the blurred image can be modeled
by a single blur kernel, i.e., the dominant motion is
translation. Because the translation only results in an
offset of the kernel, it is unnecessary to align two
images. It can also manually change the camera
settings between two shots. In this case, we have
found that the dominant motions between two shots
are translation and in-plane rotation. To correct inplane rotation, we simply draw two corresponding
lines in the blurred/noisy images. In the blurred
image, the line can be specified along a straight
object boundary or by connecting two corner
features. The noisy image is rotated around its image
center such that two lines are virtually parallel. If an
advanced exposure bracketing allowing more
controls is built to future cameras, this manual
alignment will become unnecessary.
1. Initialize k0 =, the delta function.

2. Update kn+1 = kn +(AT b(ATA+2I)kn).
3. Set kin+1 =0 if kin+1 <0 and
Kin+1=kin+1/i kin+1
is a scalar that controls the convergence. The

iteration stops when the change between two steps
are sufficiently small. We typically runabout 20 to 30
iterations by setting = 1.0. The algorithm is fast
using FFT, taking about 8 to 12 seconds for a 6464
kernel and a 800600 image.
4.2 Hysteresis thresholding in scale space:
The above iterative algorithm can be
implemented in scale space to make the solution to
overcome the local minimal. A straightforward
method is to use the kernel estimated at the current
level to initialize the next finer level. However, we
have found that such initialization is insufficient to
control noise in the kernel estimation. The noise or
errors at coarse levels may be propagated and
amplified to fine levels. To suppress noise in the
estimate of the kernel, the global shape of the kernel
at a fine level to be similar to the shape at its coarser
level. To achieve this, we propose a hysteresis
thresholding [Canny 1986] in scale space. At each
level, a kernel mask M is defined by thresholding the
kernel values, Mi = 1 if ki > tkmax, where t is a
threshold and kmax is the maximum of all kernel
values. We compute two masks Mlow and Mhigh by
setting two thresholds tlow and thigh. Mlow is larger
and contains Mhigh. After kernel estimation, we set
all elements of Kl outside the mask Mhigh to zero to
reduce the noise at level l. Then, at the next finer
level l +1, we set all elements of Kl+1 outside the upsampled mask of Mlow to zero to further reduce
noise. This hysteresis thresholding is performed from
coarse to fine. The pyramids are constructed using a
down sampling factor of 1/2 until the kernel size at
the coarsest level reaches 99. We typically choose
tlow = 0.03, and thigh = 0.05.
5.2 Image denoising:

For the noisy image N, we apply a waveletbased denoising algorithm [Portillaetal. 2003] with
Matlab
code
from
http://decsai.ugr.es/javier/denoise/. The algorithm is
one of the state-of-art techniques and comparable to
several commercial denoising software. It also
experimented with bilateral filtering but found that it
is hard to achieve a good balance between removing
noise and preserving details, even with careful
parameter tuning is clearly shown in fig.3(b).
VI. SIMULATED RESULTS
V. IMPLEMENTATION DETAILS
This approach to a variety of blurred/noisy

image pairs in low lighting environments using a
compact camera (Canon S60,5M pixels) and a DSLR
camera (Canon 20D, 8M pixels).
5.1 Image acquisition:

In practice, it requires one image be taken
soon after another, to minimize misalignment

5
www.iaetsd.in
6.1 Comparison:
Comparing this approach with denoising
[Portillaetal. 2003], and a standard RL algorithm.
Figure 8, from left to right, shows a blurred image,
noisy image (enhanced), denoised image, standard
RL result (using our estimated kernel), and this
result. The kernel sizes are 3131, 3333, and 4040
for the three examples. It manually tunes the noise
parameter (standard deviation) in the denoising
algorithm to achieve a best visual balance between
noise removal and detail preservation. Compared
with denoised results. The results contain much more
fine details, such as tiny textures on the fabric in the
first example, thin grid structures on the crown in the
second example, and clear text on the camera in the
last example. Because the noise image is scaled up
from a very dark, low contrast image, partial color
information is also lost. This approach recovers
correct colors through image deblurring and standard
RL deconvolution results which exhibit
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Fig.3(c) blurred image for the process of deblurring
Fig. 3(d) deblurred and denoised image

unpleasant ringing artifacts. Finally, getting the
denoised image as shown in fig.3(c).
6. 2 Large noise:
A blurred/noisy pair containing a detailed
structure. The images are captured by the compact
camera and the noisy image has very strong noises.
The estimated initial kernel and the refined kernel by
the iterative optimization. The iteration number is
typically 2 or 3 in our experiments. There fined
kernel has a sharper and sparser shape than the initial
one.
Fig.3(a) original image as noised and blurred
6.3 Large kernel:

The kernel size is 8787 at the original
resolution12001600. The image shown here is
cropped to 9751146.Compared with the state-of-art
single image kernel estimation approach [Fergus et
al. 2006] in which the largest kernel is 30 pixels, this
approach using an image pair significantly extends
the degree of blur that can be handled.
Fig.3(b) image denoised by a filter

6
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
approach to other image deblurring applications, such

as deblurring video sequences, or out-of-focus
deblurring. Our techniques can also be applied in a
hybrid image system [Ben-Ezra and Nayar 2003] or
combined with coded exposure photography [Raskar
et al. 2006].
REFERENCE
Fig. 4
[1] Li Xu, Shicheng Zheng Jiaya Jia,The

Chinese University of Hong Kong;
Unnatural L0 Sparse Representation for
Natural Image Deblurring.
graph for the estimated output
[2] Lin Zhong, Sunghyun Cho, Dimitris

Metaxas, Sylvain Paris, Jue Wang,Rutgers
University; Handling Noise in Single Image
Deblurring using Directional Filters.
6.4 Small noise and kernel

In a moderately dim lighting environment, it
can capture input images with small noise and blur.
This is a typical case assumed in Jias approach
[2004] which is a color transfer based algorithm. The
third and fourth columns in Figure 11 are color
transferred result [Jiaet al. 2004] and histogram
equalization result from the blurred image to the
denoised image. The colors cannot be accurately
transferred, because both approaches use global
mappings. This result not only recovers more details
but also has similar colors to the blurred image for all
details. The shutter speeds and ISO settings are able
to reduce exposure time (shutter speed ISO) by
about 10 stops. Therefore, the final deblurred and
denoised image is estimated as shown in fig.3(d).
[3] Esmaeil Faramarzi, Member, IEEE, Dinesh

Rajan, Senior Member, IEEE,and Marc P.
Christensen, Senior Member, IEEE; Unified
Blind Method for Multi-Image SuperResolution and Single/Multi-Image Blur
Deconvolution.
[4] Jiaya Jia, Department of Computer Science
and Engineering, The Chinese University of
Hong Kong; Single Image Motion
Deblurring Using Transparency.
[5] James G.Nagy, Katrina palmer, Lissa
perrone; Iterative methods for image
deblurring.
VII. CONCLUSION
This paper proposed an image deblurring
approach using a pair of blurred/noisy images. This
approach takes advantage of both images to produce
a high quality reconstructed image. By formulating
the image deblurring problem using two images, it
has developed an iterative deconvolution algorithm
which can estimate a very good initial kernel and
significantly reduce deconvolution artifacts. No
special hardware is required. This proposed approach
uses off-the-shelf, hand-held cameras. Limitations
remain in approach, however, shares the common
limitation of most image deblurring techniques:
assuming a single, spatial-invariant blur kernel. For
spatial-variant kernel, it is possible to locally estimate
kernels for different parts of the image and blend
deconvolution results. Most significantly, this
approach requires two images; the ability to capture
such pairs will eventually move into the camera
firmware, thereby making two-shot capture easier
and faster. In the future, planning to extend our
[6] J. Telleen , A. Sullivan , J. Yee , O. Wang ,

P. Gunawardane , I. Collins , J. Davis,
University of California, Santa Cruz;
Synthetic Shutter Speed Imaging.

7
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
E-Passport
1. K.Ranjani Department of Information technology,(2nd year)
2. T.Sandhiya Department of electronics and communication engineering,(2nd year)
1.janaranjani27@gmail.com 2.sandhiya2166@gmail.com
M.Kumarasamy College of engineering, Karur.
ABSTRACT:
organization (ICAO). The threat of

terrorism increases the need for
positive identification and anticounterfeiting. The challenge facing
immigration officials today is simple:
How do they know that the person
carrying the passport is actually the
rightful owner of the passport? A 2 X
2photograph of the owner only
provides so many clues as to the
answer to this question
and
photographic means have security
limitations. Considering that all of the
9/11hijackers immigrated or traveled
to the U.S. from other countries, it is
of the utmost importance to the
security of this country that
homeland security and immigration
officials be confident that they know
who is entering and Exiting the
country.
The RFID is a new technology

and take major role in the embedded
system. In this project the RFID card
and reader are used. The card
consists of information about the
passenger, which will not change.
Each
passenger
has
unique
information. The RFID card reader
reads the information from the card
and compares with the information
stored in the passenger database.
Introduction:
Travel among countries and
security concerns are driving efforts
to improve the identification and
passport
documents.
The
international community is Debating
policy and technologies regarding
electronic approaches such as
radiofrequency identification (RFID)
devices. To facilitate travel, the
twenty-seven
member
nations
participating in the Visa Waiver
Program (VWP)require standardized
passport documents based on
standards determined by the
International
Civil
Aviation
Area of Paper
Embedded System.
RFID
Biometric Identification
Literature survey:

8
www.iaetsd.in
IEEE papers about RFID based

Passport system (base paper)
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Methodology:
IEEE paper about the RFID

voting system,
Pin Diagram:
Latest security system such as:

Thumb print.
Face recognizer.
Password setup.
Eye recognizer.
Tools Required:
MP Tool Kit.
Software
Embedded C
VB .NET
ADVANTAGES:
Target Device
PIC18F452 Microcontroller
Low cost
easy to use for rural areas
automated operation
Low Power consumption
Conclusion:
We analyzed the major current
and potential uses of RFID in identity
documents. We identified some of
the areas of promise for existing and
future
deployments,
and
we
considered the security concerns

9
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
which accompany them. Most

important among these was the
theme that future implementers of
RFID-based
identity
documents
should take note of the challenges
involved in deploying the electronic
passport, and should appreciate the
need for document security at all
steps in the development process.
Reference:
[1]
Bureau of Consular Affairs, U.S.

Department of State. Visa Waiver
Program (VWP), (2005).
[2]
International
Civil
Aviation
Organization.
Foundation
of
theInternational
Civil
Aviation
Organization. 20 June 2005.
[3]
United
States
Government
Acountability Office. Information
Security:
Radio
Frequency
Identification Technology in the
Federal Government May 2005

10
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
INVESTIGATION OF THERMAL
BARRIER COATING ON I.C ENGINE
PISTON
S. Lakshmanan1 G. Ranjith Babu2 S. Sabesh3 M. Manikandan4
1
Research scholar, Anna University, Chennai
1
Assistant Professor, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Veltech Multi tech Engineering
College, Avadi
234
Department of Mechanical Engineering, Veltech Multi tech Engineering college, Avadi
Abstract:
The selection of TBC materials is restricted by some
Thermal Barrier Coating(TBC) are used to stimulate the

reduced heat rejection in engine cylinders.It reduces the
heat transfer to the water cooling jacket and exhaust
system.Thus improves the mechanical efficiency.In this
operation Zirconia Ceramic is coated on the I.C engine
piston using Plasma arc technique.Their performance
characteristics and results are studied and tabulated.
(1) High melting point,
INTRODUCTION
(6) Good adherence to the metallic substrate and
basic requirements:
(2) No phase transformation between room temperature

and operation temperature,
(3) Low thermal conductivity,
(4) Chemical inertness,
(5) Thermal expansion match with the metallic substrate,
(7) Low sintering rate of the porous microstructure.
According to the First law of thermodynamics,themal

energy is conserved by reducing the heat flow to the
cooling and exhaust systems.its known that only one
third of energy is converted into useful work,therotically
if rejection of heat is reduced then the thermal efficiency
likely to be increased.to a considerable extend.
Among
those
properties,
thermal
expansion coefficient and thermal conductivity seem to

be the most important.
MATERIALS
The Application of TBC decreases the heat transfer to the

cooling and exhaust system which ultimately results in
the high temperature gas and high temperature
combustion chamber wall which reduces the level of
smoke and hydrocarbon(HC) emission.
Zirconia PSZ are cream colored blends

with approximately 10% MgO and are high in toughness,
retaining this property to elevated temperatures. it
retains many properties including corrosion resistance at
extremely high temperatures, zirconia does exhibit
structural changes that may limit its use to perhaps only
500 C. It also becomes electrically conductive as this
temperature is approached. Zirconia is commonly
blended with MgO, CaO, or Yttria (3&4) as a stabilizer
in order to facilitate transformation toughening. This
induces a partial cubic crystal structure instead of fully
tetragonal during initial firing, which remains metastable
during cooling. Upon impact, the tetragonal precipitates
undergo a stress induced phase transformation near an
advancing crack tip.
This action expands the structure as it absorbs a great
deal of energy, and is the cause of the high toughness of
this material. Reforming also occurs dramatically with
elevated temperature and this negatively affects strength
along with 3-7% dimensional expansion. PSZ is adopted
In particular, for the latter, durability concerns

for the materials and components in the engine cylinders,
which include piston, rings, liner, and cylinder head,
limit the allowable in-cylinder temperatures. The
application of thin TBCs to the surfaces of these
components enhances high-temperature durability by
reducing the heat transfer and lowering temperatures of
the underlying metal. In this article, the main emphasis is
placed on investigating the effect of a TBC on the engine
fuel consumption with the support of detailed sampling
of in-cylinder pressure. The optimization of the engine
cycle and the exhaust waste heat recovery due to a
possible increase in exhaust gas availability were not
investigated in this study.
II. LITERATURE REVIEW

11
www.iaetsd.in
Type
Horizontal 4 stroke single

cylinder water cooled diesel
engine
Combustion chamber
Direct injection
`Bore
95 mm
Stroke
95 mm
Displacement
673.4 cc
Compression ratio
18:1
Max. torque
4.2 kg- /1900 rpm
Max. HP
13 HP@2400 rpm
S.F.C
192 g/ Hp / hr
Cooling system
Condenser type thermo

siphon cooling system
Lighting system
12 volts / 35 watts
Std. pulley (DIA)
100 mm/optional 120mm
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
mounted on it because no fill space is available for such

installation. To fix the transducer, an adapter mounting
was fabricated.
Table1
Zirconia Ceramic is a ceramic material

consisting of at least 90% of Zirconium Dioxide (ZrO2).
Zirconium Oxide is produced from natural minerals such
as Baddeleyite (zirconium oxide) or zirconium silicate
sand. Pure zirconia changes its crystal structure
depending on the temperature: At temperatures below
2138 F (1170C) zirconia exists in monoclinic form. At
temperature of 2138F (1170C) monoclinic structure
transforms to tetragonal form which is stable up to
4300F (2370C). Tetragonal crystal structure transforms
to cubic structure at 4300F (2370 C). Structure
transformations are accompanied by volume changes
which may cause cracking if cooling/heating is rapid and
non-uniform and structural failure of any ceramic coating.
Additions of some oxides (MgO, CaO,Y2O3) to pure
zirconia depress allotropic transformations (crystal
structure changes) and allow to stabilize either cubic or
tetragonal structure of the material at any temperature.
The most popular stabilizing addition to zirconia is yttria
(Y2O3), which is added and uniformly distributed in
proportion of 5.15%.
To draw the pressurized gas out of the combustion

chamber, a 1.3-mm through-hole was drilled into the
third cylinder at the rear of the cylinder head (Fig. 2), the
only place suitable for the mounting of the adapter and
bypassing of the water jacket of the cylinder head. In
addition to pressure measurement, a. crank shaft encoder
was used to trigger the acquisition of the pressure signal
and also to provide crank positional information. The
shaft encoder possessed a resolution of 0.1 crank angle
(CA); however, the data acquisition was set at a
sampling rate of 0.2 CA. In this experiment, a nondispersive infrared (NDIR) analyser and flame ionization
detector (FID) measured concentrations of carbon
monoxide and unburned hydrocarbons (HCs),
respectively. The TBC was examined with scanning
electron microscopy (SEM) after the tests had been
conducted, and the chemical composition was analysed
with an energy dispersive x-ray (EDX) unit
Expiremental setup and operation

A fully instrumented CI engine was mounted
on a computer-controlled engine dynamometer. Table 1
tabulates the specifications of the engine, while figure
shows the schematic of the overall arrangement of the
engine test bed. To appreciate the effect of a TBC on
engine performance, in particular fuel consumption,
obtaining engine indicator diagrams is necessary. A 10mm water-cooled piezoelectric pressure transducer was
used to measure the dynamic cylinder pressure.
Unfortunately,the transducer of this size to be directly
A.Plasma spraying technique:

12
www.iaetsd.in
In the various ceramic materials, partially stabilized

zirconia (PSZ) has excellent toughness, hot strength, and
thermal shock resistance, low thermal conductivity, and a
thermal expansion coefficient close to those of steel and
cast iron. PSZ has been widely used as a thermal barrier
coating in the combustion chambers of diesel engines.(6)
Hence, in the present work, PSZ was chosen as the
material for the thermal barrier coating in the piston
crown. In the present investigation,(5) the piston crown
was coated with the PSZ ceramic material, using a
plasma spraying technique. Plasma spraying is a thermal
spray process that uses an inert plasma stream of high
velocity to melt and propel the coating material on to the
substrate.(1)
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The rejection of heat flow to the water

cool jackets and the exhaust system which ensures a
better combustion in a engine than the baseline
engine.The decrease in the fuel consumption level which
also indicates a better thermal efficiency in the coated
I.C. engine
Brake Mean Effective

Pressure vs Brake
Thermal Efficiency
30
BTE
PERFOMANCES AND CHARTERISTICS

Figures compares the results obtained from both the
baseline and TBC piston tests. In general, the TBC piston
tests showed lower exhaust gas temperatures, which,
combined with the results shown in Figure, positively
indicated that the performance of the engine would be
improved.(2)
20
BTE
(Baseline) %
10
0
0
BTE (Coated)
%
BMEP (bar)
In
the
emission
Swept volume
Speed Voltage Current Power FC
FC
FC
SFC
BMEP CV
Fuel Energy
Efficiency
measurements,
the tailpipe uHC and CO concentrations
cu.m rpm V
A
kW
s/5cc g/hr kg/s g/(kW.hr) bar
kJ/kg kW were
%
conducted. It was discovered that the CO did not
0.000673 1500
230
0
0 28.13 537.5044 0.000149 0 42500 6.345539vary 0much in either the baseline or TBC test. The
0.000673 1500
230
2 0.541176 23.38 646.7066 0.00018 1195.001 0.642937 42500 7.634731variations
7.088351
were more or less within the resolution of the
0.000673 1500
230
4 1.082353 18.57 814.2165 0.000226 752.2652 1.285873 42500 9.612278NDIR
11.26011 analyzer, which was 0.1 vol.% concentration,(21)
0.000673 1500
230
6 1.623529 17.31 873.4835 0.000243 538.0152 1.92881 42500 10.31196whereas
15.74414 the resolution of the FID used was 1 ppm.
0.000673 1500
230
8 2.164706 15.87 952.741 0.000265 440.1249 2.571747 42500 11.24764Figure
19.24587 6 compares the brake specific fuel consumption
between
0.000673 1500
230
10 2.705882 12.31 1228.27 0.000341 453.9258 3.214683 42500 14.50041 18.66073 the baseline and TBC piston tests. Results show
that, in general, the fuel consumption was lower in the
0.000673 1500
230
12 3.247059 11.86 1274.874 0.000354 392.6241 3.85762 42500 15.05059 21.5743
TBC piston tests for the same operating condition, with
BASE LINE ENGINE
an improvement of up to 6% at lower engine power. The
self-optimized cycle efficiency due to the altered ignition
characteristics in the TBC piston engine outnumbered the
VS
slightly reduced combustion efficiency with an overall
improvement in thermal efficiency as a whole. The level
COATED ENGINE
of improvement that has been predicted ranged from 2 to
12 %. They attribute this to insulation of in-cylinder
components
Swept voluSpeed
me Voltage Current Power FC FC FC SFC BMEP CV Fuel EnergyEfficiency .
A
230
230
230
230
230
230
230
kW
s/5cc g/hr kg/s g/(kW.hr) bar kJ/kg kW %

0 0 24.86 608.206 0.000169 #DIV/0!
0 42500 7.180209 0
2 0.541176 22.85 661.7068 0.000184 1222.719 0.642937 42500 7.811816 6.927665
4 1.082353 20.12 751.4911 0.000209 694.3124 1.285873 42500 8.871769 12.19997
6 1.623529 18.38 822.6333 0.000229 506.6944 1.92881 42500 9.711643 16.71735
8 2.164706 15.37 983.7345 0.000273 454.4426 2.571747 42500 11.61353 18.63951
10 2.705882 13.27 1139.412 0.000317 421.0871 3.214683 42500 13.45139 20.116
12 3.247059 13.13 1151.561 0.00032 354.6475 3.85762 42500 13.59482 23.88453
Brake Power vs Fuel

Consumption
FC
cu.m rpm V
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.000673 1500
0.0004
0.0003
0.0002
0.0001
0
FC
(Baseline)
kg/s
5
BP (kW)
A.THERMAL
EFFICIENCYON
FUEL
FC
(Coated)
kg/s
EXHAUST EMISSION:
CONSUMPTION:

13
www.iaetsd.in
shortening of the ignition delay that decreases the

proportion of the premixed combustion.
Load vs NOx
A.HYDROCARBONS:
The level of emission of unburned
hydrocarbon(UHC) is considerably decreased due to
reduction of flow of heat to the water cool jackets and
exhaust system.But due to high temperature gas and high
temperature combustion wall which contributes
combustion of lubricating oil,which ultimately leads to
emission of unburned hydrocarbon.
NOx
Load vs NOx
Load vs HC
15
10
HC (Coated)
ppm
HC
10
B.Carbon monoxide(CO):
The higher temperatures both in the gases and at the
combustion chamber walls of the LHR engine assist in
permitting the oxidation of CO.The higher temperature
causes complete combustion of carbon which results in
combustion of CO emission.
Load vs CO
0.08
CO- by
volume
%(base line)
CO
0.02
0
0
10
20
LOAD (Amps)
10
20
Nox in
ppm(Final)
Few drawbacks with TBCs

During operation TBCs are exposed to various thermal
and mechanical loads such as thermal cycling, high and
low cycle fatigue, hot corrosion and high temperature
erosion. Currently, because of reliability problems, the
thickness of TBCs is limited, in most applications, to
500m. Increasing coating thickness increases the risk of
coating failure and leads to a reduced coating lifetime.
The failure mechanisms that cause TTBC coating
spallation differ in some degree from that of the
traditional thinner coatings. A major reason for
traditional TBC failure and coating spallation in gas
turbines is typically bond coat oxidation. When the
thickness of the thermally grown oxide (TGO) exceeds a
certain limit, it induces the critical stress for coating
failure. Thicker coatings have higher temperature
gradients through the coating and thus have higher
internal stresses.
Although the coefficient of thermal
expansion (CTE) of 8Y2O3-ZrO2 is close to that of the
substrate material, the CTE difference between the
substrate and coating induces stresses at high
temperatures at the coating interface. The strain tolerance
of TTBC has to be managed by controlling the coating
microstructure.
Use of thicker coatings generally leads
to higher coating surface temperatures that can be
detrimental if certain limits are exceeded. In the long run,
the phase structure of yettria stabilized zirconia (8Y2O3ZrO2) is not stable above 1250C. Also the strain
tolerance of the coating can be lost rapidly by sintering if
too high surface temperatures are allowed.
LOAD (Amps)
0.04
Nox in
ppm(baselin
e)
LOAD (Amps)
15
0.06
800
600
400
200
0
0
HC
(Baseline)
ppm
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
CO-by
volume
%(Coated)
C.Nitrogen oxides:
NOx is formed by chain reactions involving
Nitrogen and Oxygen in the air. These reactions are
highly temperature dependent. Since diesel engines
always operate with excess air, NOx emissions are
mainly a function of gas temperature and residence time.
Most of the earlier investigations show that NOx
emission from LHR engines is generally higher than that
in water-cooled engines. They say this is due to higher
combustion temperature and longer combustion duration.
. Reference reports an increase in the LHR engine NOx
emissions and concluded that diffusion burning is the
controlling factor for the production of NOx. Almost
equal number of investigations report declining trend in
the level of emission of NOx. Reference indicates
reduction in NOx level. They reason this to the
CONCLUSIONS
The results showed that, increasing the brake thermal
efficiency and decreasing the specific fuel consumption
for Light heat Rejection engine with thermal coated
piston compared to the standard engine. There was
increasing the NOx emission and O2 for thermal barrier

14
www.iaetsd.in
coated engine. However there was decreasing the CO and

HC emissions for thermal coated piston engine compared
to the standard engine.
5.
The following conclusions can be drawn.
6.
2.
3.
4.
S.H. Chan and K.A. Khor, The Effect of

Thermal Barrier Coated Piston Crown on
Engine Characteristics. Submitted 14 July
1998, in revised form 7 June 1999.
V. Ganesan, Internal Combustion Engines.
4th Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Education
The TBC, using PSZ, applied to the

combustion chamber of the internal
combustion engine showed some
improvement in fuel economy with a
maximum of up to 4% at low engine
power.
The peak cylinder pressures were
increased by a magnitude of eight to
ten bars in the TBC piston engine, in
particular at high engine power
outputs, though the exhaust gas
temperatures were generally lower,
indicating good gas expansion in the
power stroke.
The unburned hydrocarbon
concentrations were increased most
seriously at low engine speed and/or
low engine power output with a TBC
piston engine. The authors suspected
that this could be due to the porous
quenching effect of the rough TBC
piston crowns, where oxidation of
hydrocarbons was unable to be
achieved by the combustion air.
Sampling of cylinder pressures in the
cylinders showed that the ignition
point of the TBC piston engine
advanced slightly relative to the
baseline engine, indicating the
improvement in ignitability and heat
release before the top dead center,
which caused the peak cylinder
pressure to raise.
Private Limited.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
REFERENCES
1.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Krzysztof Z. Mendera, Effects of Plasma

Sprayed Zirconia Coatings on Diesel Engine
Heat Release. Journal of KONES. Internal
Combustion Engines, Vol. 7, No.1-2, 2000.
Pankaj N. Shrirao, Anand N. Pawar.
Evaluation of Performance and Emission
characteristics of Turbocharged Diesel Engine
with Mullite as Thermal Barrier Coating. P.
N. Shrirao et al. / International Journal of
Engineering and Technology Vol.3 (3), 2011,
256-262.
Pankaj N. Shrirao, Anand N. Pawar. An
Overview on Thermal Barrier Coating (TBC)
Materials and Its Effect on Engine Performance
and Emission. International Journal of
Applied Research in Mechanical Engineering
(IJARME), Volume1, Issue2, 2011.
H. Samadi, T.W.Coyle. Alternative Thermal
S. PalDey, S.C. Deevi, Mater. Sci. Eng. A 342

(1-2) (2003) 58-79. [2] J.G. Han, J.S. Yoon,
H.J. Kim, K. Song, Surf. Coat. Technol. 8687(1996)82-87.
K.L. Lin, M.Y Hwang, C.D. Wu, Mater.
Chem. Phys. 46 (1996)77-83.
T. Bjrk, R. Westergrd, S. Hogmark, J.
Bergstrm, P. Hedenqvist, Wear 225-229
(1999) 1123-1130.
J.G. Han, K.H. Nam, I.S. Choi, Wear 214
(1998) 91-97. [6] R.D. James, D.L. Paisley,
K.A. Gruss, S. Parthasarthi, B.R. Tittmann,
Y. Horie, R.F. Davis, Mater. Res. Soc. Symp.
Proc. 410 (1996) 377382.
D.-Y Wang, C.-L. Chang, K.-W. Wong, Y -W.
Li, W.-Y Ho, Surf.
Coat. Technol. 120-121 (1999) 388-394.
A. Kimura, H. Hasegawa, K. Yamada, T.
Suzuki, J. Mater. Sci. Lett.19 (2000)601-602.
T. Suzuki, D. Huang, Y Ikuhara, Surf. Coat.
Technol. 107 (1998)41-47.
T. Ikeda, H. Satoh, Thin Solid Films 195
(1991) 99-110.
Y. Tanaka, T.M. Gr, M. Kelly, S.B.
Hagstrom, T. Ikeda, K. Wakihira,
H. Satoh, J. Vac. Sci. Technol. A 10 (4) (1992)
1749-1756.
.R. Roos, J.P. Celis, E. Vancoille, H. Veltrop,
S. Boelens, F. Jungblut, J. Ebberink, H.
Homberg, Thin Solid Films 193-194 (1990)
547-556.
20. Taymaz, I.; Cakir, K.; Mimaroglu, A.

Experimental study of effective efficiency in a
ceramic coated diesel engine. Journal of
Surface and coatings technology (2005).
Barrier Coatings for Diesel Engines.

15
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Innovative Brick Material

M.Scinduja1, S.Nathiya1, C.V.Shudesamithronn1, M. Harshavarthana Balaji1,
T.Sarathivelan1 S. Jaya pradeep2

2. Assistant Professor, Department of Civil Engineering, Knowledge Institute of Technology, Kakkapalayam, Salem 637
504, Tamil Nadu, India
1. U .G Student , Department of Civil Engineering, Knowledge Institute of Technology, Kakkapalayam, Salem 637 504,
Tamil Nadu, India
Environmental friendly
Less weight
INTRODUCTION
Inflammable
Since the large demand has been
Less water absorption
placed on building material industry especially

Easily available
in the last decade owing to the increasing

population which causes a chronic shortage of
The main objective of this project is
building materials, the civil engineers have
optimize the papercrete mix with desirable
been challenged to convert the industrial
properties,
wastes to useful building and construction
mentioned needs.
materials.
MATERIALS USED
This
experimental
study
which
which
satisfies
the
above
In this project waste materials were utilized to
investigates the potential use of waste paper
produce building
for producing a low-cost and light weight
materials were used in this investigation
composite brick as a building material. These
bricks.
The
following
CEMENT
alternative bricks were made with papercrete.
Cement is one of the binding materials

in this project. Cement is the important
OBJECTIVES
building material in todays construction
The major Objective of the project is
world
replacing the costly and scarce conventional

building
bricks
by
an
innovative
and
53 grade Ordinary Portland Cement
alternative building bricks, which satisfies the
(OPC) conforming to IS: 8112-cement used.
following characteristics,
Properties of cement
Required
Cost effective
1

16
www.iaetsd.in
Description
of test
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Test
results
Requiremen
obtained
ts
of
IS:
8112 1989
Initial
65
Min.
setting time
minutes
30minutes
Final setting 270
Max.
time
minutes
600minutes
412.92
Min.
Fig GGBS
QUARRY DUST
Getting good Quarry dust free from
Fineness
m /kg
225
organic impurities and salts is very difficult in
m /kg
now a day. While adding the Quarry dust to

the mix. And the Quarry dust should be in
uniform size i.e., all the Quarry dust particles
should be fine.
The Quarry Dust obtained from local
resource was used in concrete to cast test
bricks. The physical and chemical properties
of Quarry Dust obtained by testing the
samples as per Indian Standards are listed in
Fig . Cement
table
GROUND
GRANULATED
BLAST
Properties of Quarry dust
FURNACE SLAG (GGBS)

Ground-granulated blast-furnace slag
Property
(GGBS) is a byproduct which is obtained
Quarry
Natural
dust
sand
during the manufacturing process of pig iron
Specific gravity 2.54-2.60
in blast furnace. This process produces a
Bulk
glassy, homogeneous, non-crystalline material
density (kg/m )
that has cementitious properties. GGBS
Absorption (%)
powder was collected from Quality polytech,
Moisture
Mangalore. It is off white in colour by
content (%)
appearance. The specific gravity is 3.09. The
Fine
particles
GGBS powder is shown in fig
less
than
2.60
relative
3
1720-1810
1460
1.20-1.50
Nil
Nil
1.50
12-15
06
2
17
www.iaetsd.in
together with the power of hydrogen bond.
0.075mm (%)
Sieve analysis
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Zone II
Coating this fiber with Portland cement
Zone II
creates a cement matrix, which encases the

fibers for extra strength. Of course paper has
more in it than cellulose. Raw cellulose has
comparatively rough texture. Clay, rice husk
ash is added to make the cellulose very
smooth.
Fig Quarry Dust
PAPER
Paper is principally wood cellulose.
Cellulose is natural polymer. And Fig.3.4.1
shows the links of cellulose bonds. The
cellulose chain bristles with polar-OH groups.
These groups form hydrogen bonds with -OH
group on adjacent chains, bundling, and the
Fig. Microscopic view of cellulose
chain together. The chains also pack regularly

in places to form hard, stable crystalline
While adding more sand or glass to the
region that give the bundled chains even more
mix results in a denser, stronger, more flame
stability and strength.
retardant material, but adds weight and

reduces R- value.
Heavy mixes with added sand, glass
etc., increases strength and resistance to
abrasion,
but
also
reduces
flexibility
somewhat, adds weight and may reduce Rvalue. So the trick is finding the best mix for
Fig. Cellulose hydrogen bonds
the application.
Fig.shows the network of cellulose

fibers and smaller offshoots from the fibers
This mould was collected from ACC
called fibrils. In this, fibers and fibrils network
brick suppliers in the size of 230mm length,
forms a matrix, which becomes coated with
110mm wide and 80mm deep.
Portland cement. When these networks of

The papers, which were collected,
fibers and fibrils dry, they intertwine and cling
cannot be used directly. It should be made into

3
18
www.iaetsd.in
paper
pulp
before
mixing
with
other
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
used as an additive for cement concrete,
ingredients.
mortar & plasters. It makes concrete cohesive

and prevents segregation.
WATER
Water is an important ingredient of
Features & Benefits:
papercrete as it actively participates in the
Corrosion resistant - Makes
chemical reaction with cement. It should be
concrete more cohesive, hence
free from organic matter and the pH value
protects steel better against
should be between 6 to 7.
corrosion.
Compatibility Being a liquid,
easily dispersible & compatible
with concrete/mortar mixes.
Permeability It reduces the
permeability of
water
into
concrete.
Strength . The setting time
and compressive strength of the
Fig Materials Used
concrete remains within the

specification limits
WATER PROOFING COMPOUND FOR
Shrinkage Reduces shrinkage
CONCRETE AND PLASTER
crack development in plaster &

concrete.
Workability
Improves
workability of freshly mixed

cement concrete.
Durability
Increases
durability
by
improving
waterproofing of concrete.
Fig. Water Proofing Compound
MODIFIER
Dr. Fixit Pidiproof LW+ is specially

formulated
integral
compound
composed
liquid
of
BONDING
COMPOUND
waterproofing
surface
CUM
active
Dr. Fixit Super Latex is a highly potent
plasticizing agents, polymers & additives. It is
and versatile SBR based liquid for high

4

19
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
performance applications in waterproofing and
minor refinements. There has been hardly any
repairs.
effort in our country to improve the brick-
Features & Benefits:
making process for enhancing the quality of
Excellent Coverage - 70-80
bricks.
sq.ft per kg/ in 2 coats
A brick is generally subjected to the
Less material wastage- material
following tests to find out its suitability for the
does not fall baclV rebound
construction work.
Highly cost effective due to

better
coverage
&
ABSORPTION
lesser
A brick is taken and it is weighed dry.
wastage
It is then immersed in water for a period of 24
High Bonding Strength
hours. It is weighed again and the difference in
Prevents leakages & dampness
weight indicates the amount of water absorbed
Enhances strength & provides
by the brick. It should not, in any case, exceed
durability
20% of weight of dry brick.

CRUSHING STRENGTH
The crushing strength of a brick is
found out by placing it in a compressiontesting machine. It is compressed till it breaks,
as per BIS: 1077-1957, the minimum crushing
Fig. Modifier cum Bonding Compound
strength of brick is 3.50 N/mm2 .The brick
MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS
with crushing strength of 7-14 N/mm2 are
BRICKS
graded as A and those having above 14

N/mm2 is graded as AA.
The bricks are obtained by moulding

clay in a rectangular block of uniform size and
HARDNESS
then by drying and burning the blocks. As the
In this test, a scratch is made on the
bricks are of uniform size, they can be
brick surface with the help of finger nail. If no
properly arranged and further, as they are in
impression is left on the surface, the brick is
lightweight, no lifting appliance is required for
treated to be sufficiently hard.
them. The common brick is one of the oldest

PRESENCE OF SOLUBLE SALTS
building materials and it is extensively used at
The soluble salts, if presents in brick
present as a leading material in construction.
will cause efflorescence on the surface of
In India, process of brick making has not
bricks. For finding out the presence of soluble
changed since many centuries except some

5

20
www.iaetsd.in
salts in brick, it is immersed in water for 24
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
STRUCTURE
hours. It is then taken out and allowed to dry
A brick is broken and its structure is
sunshade. The absence of grey or white
examined. It should be homogeneous, compact
deposits on its surface indicates absence of
and free from defects such as holes, lumps etc.
soluble salts.
PAPERCRETE
If the white deposit covers about 10%
Papercrete is a tricky term. The name
surface, the efflorescence is said to be slight
seems to imply a mix of paper and concrete,
and it is considered as moderate, when the
hence papercrete. But more accurately, only
white deposit cover about 50% surface. If grey
the Portland cement part of concrete is used in
or white deposits are found on more than 50%
the mix-if used at all. Arguably, it could have
of surface, the efflorescence becomes heavy
been called paperment papercrete may be
and it is treated as serious, when such deposits
mixed in many ways. Different types of
are converted into powdery mass.
paperecrete contain 50-80% of waste paper.
SHAPE AND SIZE
Up to now, there are no hard and fast rule, but
In this test, a brick is closely inspected.
recommended standard will undoubtedly be
It should be of standard size and its shape
established in fuature.
should be truly rectangular with sharp edges.
The basic constituents are waste nearly any
For this purpose, 20 bricks of standard size
kind of paper, board, glossy magazine stock,
(190mm X 90mm X 90mm) are selected at
advertising brochure, junk mail or just about
random and they are stacked length wise,
any other types of mixed grade paper is
along the width and along the height.
acceptable. some types of paper work better
For a good quality brick, the results
than other, but all types of works, newsprint
should be within the following permissible
are the best. Water proofed paper and card
limits:Length: 3680mm to 3920mm
board, such as butcher paper, beer cartons ect.,

are hard to break down in water. Catalogs,
Width : 1740mm to 1860mm
magazines and other publication are fine in

Height: 1740mm to 1860 mm
and of themselves, but some have a stringy,
SOUNDNESS
rubbery, sticky spine, which is also water
In this test, two bricks are taken and
resistance. Breaking down this kind of
they are struck each other. The bricks should
material in the mixing process cant be done
not break and a clear ringing sound should be
very well. Small fragments and strings of
produced.
these materials are almost always in the final

mix.
6

21
www.iaetsd.in
When
using
papercrete
containing
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the
volume. Once of the most advantageous
unwanted material in a finish, such as stucco
properties of papercrete is the way paper fibers
or plastering ,the unwanted fragment some
hold the Portland cement or perhaps the way
time shown up on the surface, but this is not
Portland cement adheres to paper fibers when
the serious problem.
the water added to the Portland cement drains

from the mix, it come out almost clear.
In the optimization work the admixture like

conplast WP90, Dr.Fixt 105 water proof and
There is no messy eco-unfriendly cement
polymer like nitrobond SBR are as the water
sediment left on the ground, running in to
repellent agents
waterways ect., papercrete can be produced

using solar energy. The only power needed is
Papercretes additives can be,
for mixing and pumping water. Its R-value is

Cement
in 2.0-3.0 per inch. Since walls in a one or two
GGBS
storey house will be12-16 inch thick, the long
Quarry dust
energy saving of building with papercrete will

be a bonanza for the home owner and the
Paper
environmental.
Papercrete is having the following derivatives,
PADOBE
Fibrous concrete
Padobe has on Portland cement. it is
Padobe
admix paper, water, earth with clay. Here clay
Fidobe
is binding material instead of using the

cement, earth is used in this types of brick.
This earth should have clay content more than
30%. With regular brick, if clay content is too
FIBROUS CONCRETE
high the brick may crack while drying, but
Fibrous concrete is a mixture of paper,
adding paper fiber to the earth mix strengthens
Portland cement, water. There are on harmful
the drying block and give some flexibility
by-products or excessive energy use in the
helps to prevent cracking.
production of papercrete. While it can be
FIDOBE
argued that the Portland cement is not
Fidobe is like padobe,but it may
environmental friendly, it is not used in all
content other fibrous materials
types of papercrete, and when it represents a

fairly small percentage of cured material by
7
22
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
ECO FRIENDLY
Phenomenal growth in the construction
industry
depends
upon
the
deflectable
resources of the country. Production of

building
materials
lead
to
irreversible
environmental impacts. Using eco-friendly

materials is the best way to build an ecofriendly building. Eco-friendly, describes a
product that has been designed to do the least
possible damage to the environment.
EXPERIMENTAL PROCEDURE
MANUFACTURING OF BRICKS
Fig. Mould
There was no clear past details about
This mould was non-water absorbing
the project. And there is no hard procedure for
in the size of 230mm length, 110mm wide and
casting the bricks. So the procedure that is
80mm deep. The shorter sides of the mould
given below was followed by our own. And
are slightly projecting to serve as handle. And
the equipments which were used in this project
joints were made without any hole or gap to
are for our convenience only.
avoid leakage.
MOULD PREPARATION
After collecting all the materials, a
mould was prepared. A typical
5.3 PULP GENERATION
mould is
The papers, which were collected
shown in the below figure.
cannot be used directly. It should be made into

paper
pulp
before
mixing
with
other
ingredients. The following are the steps

involved in the generation of pulp.
First the pins, threads and other
materials in the papers were
removed.
Then the papers were teared
into small pieces of papers.
8
23
www.iaetsd.in
Then, a 200 litre water tank

was taken. And 2/3
rd
paste like form. Then the paper was taken out
of it was
from water and taken to the mixer machine to

make it as a paper pulp.
filled with water.

Then the small pieces of paper
The pulp generating process was
were immersed in the water
tedious and time consumption. For lab purpose
tank. The paper pieces were
only these procedures were followed. While
immersed individually not in a
going for mass production, the Tow mixers
bulky manner in order to make
were recommended to reduce the cost. The
the pieces completely wet.
Tow mixers have sharp blades and it can
Before immersing it into the

water,
the
papers
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
operate mechanically or electrically.
were
MIXING
weighed. The figure shows the

papers were being immersed in
After all the ingredients were ready,
the water tank.
the mixing was done. In this project, mixing

was done manually. The mixing process of
fibrous concrete bricks and padobe bricks are
different, and that processes are given below.
The exact mix proportion was not known. So,
trial proportions were used in this project.
Fig.
Immersed
Paper
Fig. Mixing
PAPERCRETE MIX RATIO
Table : PAPERCRETE MIX RATIO
Fig. Paper Pulp
Trial Mix
The papers were kept in the tank for 2 to 3

days otherwise until the papers degrade into a
Identif
Ingredients (%)
ication
Dr
9
24
www.iaetsd.in
Mark
N
Dr
Ce
Pa
Qua
men
pe
rry
dust
GGBS
Fi
% of weight of
cement
xit
10
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Fixit
was selected nearer to the
302
casting place.
First
Super
Quarry
Latex
the
ingredients
dust/
GGBS
like
were
placed.
Then cement was placed over

that ingredient.
1
.
2
.
3
.
2
P1
20%
These two were dry mixed with

50ml
shovel thoroughly still uniform
color was formed.
2
P2
P3
30%
50%
Then the paper pulp, which was

50ml
in a wet condition, was placed
separately. Paper pulp should
contain less water. So the
50ml
excess water was squeezed out.
The already mixed cement and

GGBS/Quarry dust was placed
Weigh batching was carried out
over the paper pulp and mixed
in this project .So the materials
thoroughly to get the uniform
were measured in Kilograms.
mix.
According to the particular
There was no further water was
proportion the materials were
added separately unless it was
measured
kept
essential. The water in the pulp
separately .This was done just
was utilized for mixing the
before the mixing starts.
papercrete.
Glows,
first
shoes,
and
masks
After the mix, the required
were
wearied before the mixing.
amount of papercrete was taken
Then, the nonwater absorbing
to the site and the remaining
and smooth surface was made
amount was kept free from
for mixing.
evaporation.
CASTING OF BRICKS
Water was sprinkled over that

surface. And this mixing place
10
25
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
were carried out to check the properties of the

bricks. And the results of the test were
analyzed with the existing and standard
results. The following tests were carried out to
check the strength of the brick.
WEIGHT
Table : Weight of Papercrete Bricks
S.No.
0f
Dry
Identification
Mark
GGBS
1.
P1
20
1.773
After mixing, it should be placed in the
2.
P2
30
1.842
mould within 30 minutes. So, two moulds
3.
50
1.862
Weight
(kg.)
Fig. Manufacturing of Brick
P3
were used at the time to make the process very

fast. The bricks were moulded manually by
hand and on the table. The following are the
steps involved in molding,
The mould was over a table
The lump of mix was taken and
it was placed in the mould.
The extra or surplus mix was
removed either by wooden
strike or the metal strike or
frame with wire.
The casted papercrete bricks
dried for 14 days.
RESULT & DISCUSSION

After casting the bricks, they were
analyzed for using as a brick. Various tests
11
26
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
specimen to room temperature and obtain its

weight (M1) specimen too warm to touch shall
not be used for this purpose. Immerse
completely dried specimen in clean water at a
Water Absorption result in
temperature of 27+2C for 24 hours. Remove
% (24 hours)
the specimen and swipe out any traces of
Trail
Mix
20%
30%
water with damp cloth and weigh the
50%
specimen after it has been removed from water

40.11%
33.85%
(M2)
23.74%
TABLE
WATER ABSORPTION TEST
OF PAPECRETE BRICKS
WATER ABSORPTION TEST
% OF WATER ABSORPTION
50
40.11
%
40
Fig. Weight of bricks-(P1,P2,P3)
33.85
%
30
The
ordinary
conventional
bricks
weight varies from 3 to 3.5 Kg but the fibrous

concrete and padobe bricks weight varies from
1 to 2 Kg. The maximum weight is less than
23.74
%
G-20%
20
G-30%
10
G-50%
0
P1
P224 HOURSP3
2Kg only. In this above proportion GGBS is

having 1/3 rdof the conventional brick weight
Fig. Water absorption test for Trial Mix
only. Sand based bricks are having weight 2/3

rd
COMPRESSION TEST
of conventional brick weight only. So this
bricks are light weight and it will also reduce

total cost of construction due to the reduction
in dead load.
WATER ABSORBTION TEST
Dry the specimen in ventilated oven at
a temperature of 105C to 115C till it attains
substantially
constant
mass.
Cool
the
Fig. Compression test
12

27
www.iaetsd.in
The test was carried out by a
was hold tightly without any
Compression Testing Machine. This test was
movement.
Then the load was applied
carried out on 14th day from the date of

casting papercrete brick.
While testing the
axially at a uniform rate

This load was applied till the
papercrete brick great care must be taken,

because
papercrete
catastrophically,
it
brick
never
failed
just compressed
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
half of the brick.

Three
like
bricks
from
same
squeezing rubber. So load was applied up to
proportion were tested every
half compression.
time.
And the compressive strength
When papercrete brick failed at the
was calculated by this formula,
higher load, the structure was not fully
Compression strength= (load/surface area)
collapsed. Only the outer faces cracked and

peeled out. The papercrete brick are having
elastic behavior and less brittleness.
Best Compressive Strength in

Trial
Mix
N/mm2
( 14 Days)
20%
30%
Fig. Brick after testing

TABLE COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF
50%
PAPECRETE BRICKS
5.9
7.5
8.7
The following steps were followed for

COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH TEST
COMPRESSIVE STRENTH IN
N/mm2
compression testing.
10
First the irregularities in the
surface were removed.
5.9N/
mm2
7.5N/
mm2
8.7N/
mm2
The brick was placed centrally
G2
on the bottom plate of the
universal testing machine.
Then the upper plate of the
P1
P2 14 DAYS P3
universal testing machine was

Fig. Compression test for Trial Mix
lowered down up to the brick

13

28
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
HARDNESS TEST
In this test, a scratch was made on
brick surfaces. This test was carried out for all
the three proportions of brick. While the
scratch was made with the help of finger nail
on the bricks, very light impression was left on
the fibrous concrete brick surface. So this test
results that fibrous concrete bricks are
sufficiently hard.
Fig. Inner structure of fibrous concrete

brick
PRESENCE OF SOLUBLE SALTS

The soluble salts, if presents in bricks
In this test fibrous concrete brick were
will cause efflorescence on the surface of
cut into equal parts. The fibrous concrete brick
bricks. For finding out the presence of soluble
piece structure was homogenous, compact,
salts in a brick, this test was carried out. In this
and free from defects and this brick pieces
test fibrous concrete brick were immersed in
look like a cake piece.
water for 24 hours. Then the bricks were taken
NAILING
out and allowed to dry in shade. And there

was no any grey or white deposit on the bricks
surface. It results that the bricks are free from
soluble salts.
SOUNDNESS TEST
In this test two bricks from same
proportion were taken and they were struck
with each other. The bricks were not broken
and a clear ringing sound was produced. So
the bricks are good.
Fig. Nail in the brick
STRUCTURE TEST
Fibrous concrete bricks are less hard
In this test, the bricks were broken and
when compare to conventional bricks. So this
the structures of that bricks were examined,
test was carried out to find out whether bricks
whether they were free from any defects such
hold the nail or not. A nail was hammered in
as holes, lumps, etc.
the brick and a screw is also screwed in the

14

29
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
brick. In this two (Fig.6.8), fibrous concrete
Many cut bricks are wasted in now a
brick did not hold nails any better than dry
day. But the two fibrous concrete brick
wall, but screws worked well and hold a
pieces can be hold together by putting a
considerable weight. So, the screws are the
medium amount of glue on the bottom
anchors of choice for fibrous concrete bricks.
piece. This will not come apart (Fig.6.9.2).

This
CUTTING AND GLUE
would
seem
to
indicate
that
papercrete could be used in application

calling for quick assembly by cutting the
pieces to size in advance and letting the
user simply glue them together.
Fig. Brick pieces
PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL
In site lot of bricks are wasted while

cutting only. The labors could not able to
cut the bricks exactly what they need. But,
fibrous concrete bricks can be cut into
exactly two pieces (Fig. 6.9.1) by using
conventional saw blades. So, we can get
any shape and size of fibrous concrete
brick.
Fig. Hole in the brick
Fig.6.9.2 Joined brick pieces

15
30
www.iaetsd.in
fibrous concrete bricks not for padobe brick.
Fig.Channel in the brick

Installing plumbing
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
lines
Because padobe brick was already heated in
requires
cutting holes and channels in papercrete. It
kiln at high temperature so, it wont burn. The
was very easy in fibrous concrete bricks.
following are the steps involved in this test,
Electrical runs were cut with a circular saw
First, the brick was wiped with
or chain saw. To make holes for outlets,
cloths and all the foreign
horizontals and vertical slits was cut with a
matters were removed.

Then the flammable sticks were
circular saw. Then unwanted pieces were

removed with a screwdriver.
fired. After that, the bricks

were held on the flame for five
Outlet boxes can be angle screwed
minutes.
directly into the papercrete. Home fires
After five minutes fixing was
start, where the wiring enters the outlet
stopped and the bricks were
boxes.
observed.
So, nonflammable mortar should be
put behind the outlet boxes for safety.
From the above test, it was observed
Once the electrical wiring and outlets are
that the fibrous concrete bricks did not
installed and then tested, the channels for
burn with an open flame. They smoldered
the electrical runs are for filled with
like charcoal. But these brick would be
papercrete.
reduced to ashes after burning several
FIRE
hours.
If the interior plaster and exterior
stucco is provided on the fibrous concrete
bricks, the bricks wont burn. The only
weak point is inside the block, near
electrical outlets, switches and other places
where wires gives through walls, into
boxes etc.,. Properly wired places never
Fig. Fire test

A
cause fire. If we apply the plaster without

brick
which
is
used
any hole or leakage on the bricks, it wont
for
burn or smolder inside. Because there will
construction should not flammable in open
be lack of oxygen for burning.
flame, so this test was carried out for the
CONCLUSIONS
bricks. This test was carried out only for

16

31
www.iaetsd.in
Using the papercrete brick in a
From the above experimental studies we

can conclude that,
building, total cost will be

reduced from 20% to 50%.
Papercrete bricks are suitable

REFERENCE
for non-load bearing walls

only.
1. B J Fuller, AFafitis and J L Santamaria.
The weight of this brick is

1/3
rd
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
to
2/5
th
lesser
(May 2006) The Paper Alternative,
than
ASCE Civil Engineering Vol. 75 No.5 pp.
conventional clay brick.
72-77.
These bricks are not suitable
2. J Pera and J Ambroise (2005) Properties
for water logging and external
of Calcined Paper Sludge, Construction
walls. It can be used in inner
and Building MaterialsV0l.21, No.5 pp
partition walls.
405-413.
Due to less weight of these
3. Lex
Terry,
(2006)Papercrete
bricks, the total dead load of
Construction- Building Environment and
the building will be reduced.
Thermal
Since,
these
bricks
Envelope
Council
(BETEC)
are
Symposium was held on 13th to 16th
relatively light weight and
October 2006 at the Northen New mexico
more flexible, these bricks are
Community College in EIRito.
potentially ideal material for
4. M OFarrell and S Wild. (2006) A New
earthquake prone areas.

Papercrete
brick
does
Concrete incorporating Watepaper Sludge

not
Ash
(WSA)
Cement
&
Concrete
expand or contract, so sheets
CompositesVol.17, No.3 pp 149-158. ,
of glass or glass block can be
5. ParvizSoroushian et al (February 1994)
embedded in and trimmed
Durability and Moisture Sensitivity of
with papercrete.
Recycled Wastepaper Fiber Cement
The papercrete bricks are good
Composites,
sound absorbent, hence paper
6. R.Garcia
et
these bricks can be used in
Properties
auditoriums.
Construction
Since, the waste materials are

it
will
reduce
&
Concrete
Composites Vol. 16 No.2 pp 115-128.
is used in these bricks. So,
used,
Cement
of
al
(2008)
Paper
and
Pozzolanic
Sludge
Building
Waste,
Materials,
Vol.22 No.7, July 2008, pp 1484 1490.
the
7. Tarun R Naik et al (January 2004)
landfills and pollution.
Concrete Containing Pulp and Paper Mill

17

32
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Residuals, Proceedings of International

Conference on Fibre Composites, High
Performance
Concretes
and
Smart
Materials, Chennai, pp 515-525.

8. IS: 3495-1992 (Part 1 to 4), Methods of
Tests for Burnt Clay Bricks, Bureau of
Indian Standards, Third Revision, New
Delhi.
9. IS: 383-1970, Specification for coarse
and fine aggregates from natural sources
for concrete, Bureau of Indian Standards.
New Delhi.
18
33
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
VLSI BASED FAULT DETECTION & CORRECTION

SCHEME FOR THE ADVANCED ENCRYPTION
STANDARD USING COMPOSITE FIELD
MR.G.MANIKANDAN 1 , MR. M. SURESH 2, K.ANURADHA3
1,2
Assistant Professor, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Kodaikanal

Institute of Technology,Tamilnadu, India
3
Assistant Professor, Department of Computer science and Engineering,
Kodaikanal Institute of Technology,Tamilnadu, India
transformations in the AES encryption include

SubBytes (implemented by16 S-boxes), ShiftRows,
MixColumns, and AddRoundKey. Further more, to
obtain the original plaintext from the cipher ext, the
AES decryption algorithm is utilized. The decryption
transformations are the reverse of the encryption ones
[1]. Among the transformations in the AES, only the
S-boxes in the encryption and the inverse S-boxes in
the decryption are nonlinear. It is interesting to note
that these transformations occupy much of the total
AES encryption/decryption area [1]. Therefore, the
fault detection schemes for their hardware
implementations play an important role in making the
standard robust to the internal and malicious faults.
There exist many schemes for detecting the faults in
the hardware implementation of the AES .Among
them, the schemes presented in are independent of
the ways the AES S-box and inverse S-box are
implemented in hardware. Moreover, there exist
other fault detection schemes that are suitable for a
specific implementation of the S-box and the inverse
S-box. The approach in and the one in which is
extended are based on using memories (ROMs) for
the S-box and the inverse S-box. Moreover, a fault
tolerant scheme which is resistant to fault attacks is
presented . To protect the combinational logic blocks
used in the four transformations of the AES, either
the parity-based scheme proposed in or the
duplication approach is implemented. Furthermore, to
protect the memories used for storing the expanded
key andt he state matrix, either the Hamming or
ReedSolomon error correcting code is utilized. It is
noted that our proposed fault detection approach is
only applied to the composite field S-box and inverse
S-box. Whereas, the scheme presented in uses
memories. Using ROMs may not be preferable for
high performance AES implementations. Therefore,
for applications requiring high performance, the S-
Abstractthe faults that accidently or maliciously

occur in the hardware implementations of the
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) may cause
erroneous encrypted/decrypted output. The use of
appropriate fault detection schemes for the AES
makes it robust to internal defects and fault
attacks. In this paper, we present a lightweight
concurrent fault detection scheme for the AES. In
the proposed approach, the composite field S-box
and inverse S-box are divided into blocks and the
predicted parities of these blocks are obtained.
Through exhaustive searches among all available
composite fields, we have found the optimum
solutions for the least overhead parity-based fault
detection structures. Moreover, through our error
injection simulations for one S-box(respectively
inverse S-box), we show that the total error
coverage of almost 100% for 16 S-boxes
(respectively inverse S-boxes) can be achieved.
Finally, it is shown that both the applicationspecific integrated circuit and field-programmable
gate-array implementations of the fault detection
structures using the obtained optimum composite
fields, have better hardware and time complexities
compared to their counterparts.
I. INTRODUCTION
THE Advanced Encryption Standard (AES)
has been lately accepted by NIST [1] as the
symmetric key standard for encryption and
decryption of blocks of data. In encryption, the AES
accepts a plaintext input, which is limited to 128 bits,
and a key that can be specified to be 128 (AES-128),
192 or 256bits to generate the cipher text. In the
AES-128, which is here after referred to as the AES,
the cipher text is generated after10 rounds, where
each encryption round (except for the final round)
consists of four transformations. The four

34
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
box and the inverse S-box are implemented using

logic gates in composite fields . The schemes in are
suitable for the composite field implementation of the
S-box and the inverse S-box. The approach in is
based on using the parity-based fault detection
method for a specific S-box using composite field

and polynomial basis for covering all the single
faults. In the scheme , the fault detection of the
multiplicative inversion of the S-box is considered
for two specific composite fields.
The transformation and affine matrices are excluded

in this approach. Moreover, in [14], predicted parities
have been used for the multiplicative inversion of a
specific S-box using composite field and polynomial
basis. Furthermore, the transformation matrices are
also considered. Finally, in the parity-based approach
in[15], through exhaustive search among all the fault
detection S-boxes utilizing five predicted parities
using normal basis, the most compact one is
obtained.
transformation and affine matrices). It is interesting

to note that the cost of our multi-bit parity prediction
approach is lower than its counterparts which use
single-bit parity. It a so has higher error coverage
than the approaches using single-bit parities.We have
implemented both the proposed fault detection S-box
and inverse S-box and other counter parts. Our both
ASIC and FPGA implementation results show that
compared to the approaches presented in[13] and
[14], the complexities of the proposed fault detection
scheme are lower.
Through exhaustive searches, we obtain the least
area and delay overhead fault detection structures for
the optimum composite fields using both polynomial
basis and normal basis. While in [15], only the S-box
using normal basis has been considered.
The proposed fault detection scheme is simulated
and we show that the error coverages of close to
The contributions of this paper are as follows.

We have presented a low-cost parity-based fault
detection scheme for the S-box and the inverse S-box
using composite fields. In the presented approach, for
increasing the error coverage, the predicted parities
of the five blocks of the S-box and the inverse S-box
are obtained (three predicted parities for the
multiplicative inversion and two for the

35
www.iaetsd.in
100% for 16 S-boxes (respectively inverse S-boxes)

can be obtained.
Finally, we have implemented the fault detection
hardware structures of the AES using both 0.18- m
CMOS technology and on Xilinx Virtex-II Pro
FPGA. It is shown that the fault detection scheme
using the optimum polynomial and normal bases
have lower complexities than those using other
composite fields for both with and without fault
detection capability.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
implementation complexities of different blocks of

the S-box and the inverse S-box and those for their
predicted parities are dependent on the choice of the
coefficients and in the irreducible polynomials and
used for the composite fields. Our goal in the
following is to find and for the composite fields and
for the composite fields so that the area complexity of
theentire fault detection implementations becomes
optimum. According to [21], 16 the possible
combinations for and exist. Moreover, for the
composite fields , we have exhaustively searched and
have found the possible choices for making the
polynomial irreducible. These parameters determine
the complexities of some blocks as explained next.
Blocks 1 and 5: Based on the possible values of and
in ( in ), the transformation matrices in Fig. 1 in
blocks 1 and 5 of the S-box and the inverse S-box can
be constructed using the algorithm presented in [21].
Using an exhaustive search, eight base elements in
(or ) to which eight base elements of are mapped, are
found to construct the transformation matrix. In [22],
the Hamming weights, i.e., the number of nonzero
elements, of the transformation matrices for the case
and different values of in are obtained. It is noted that
in [21], instead of considering the Hamming weights,
subexpression sharing is suggested for obtaining the
low-complexity implementations for the S-box. Here,
we have also considered these transformation
matrices for as well as the transformation matrices
for the inverse S-box for different values of and and
have derived their area and delay complexities.
Moreover, the gate count and the critical path delay
for blocks 1 and 5 and their predicted parities, i.e.,
and , of the S-box and the inverse S-box in have been
obtained.
Blocks 2 and 4: As shown in Fig. 1, block 2 of the Sbox and the inverse S-box consists of a
multiplication, an addition, a squaring and a
multiplication by constant in . We present the
following lemma for deriving the predicted parity of
the multiplication in , using which the predicted
parities of blocks 2 and 4 in Fig. 1 are obtained.
Lemma 1: Let and be the inputs of a multiplier in .
The predicted parities of the result of the
multiplication of and in for and are as follows,
respectively.
II. PRELIMINARIES
In this section, we describe the S-box and
the inverse S-box operations and their compositefield realizations. The S-box and the inverse S-box
are nonlinear operations which take 8-bit inputs and
generate 8-bit outputs. In the S-box, the irreducible
polynomial of is used to construct the binary field .
Let and be the input and the output of the S-box,
respectively, where is a root of , i.e., . Then, the Sbox consists of the multiplicative inversion, followed
by an affine transformation
[1]. Moreover, let and be the input and the output of
the inverse S-box, respectively. Then, the inverse Sbox consists of an inverse affine transformation
followed by the multiplicative inversion. The
composite fields can be represented using normal
basis or polynomial basis . The S-box and inverse Sbox for the polynomial and normal bases are shown
in Figs. 1 and 2, respectively. As shown in these
figures, for the S-box using polynomial basis
(respectively normal basis), the transformation matrix
(respectively 1) transforms a field element in the
binary field to the corresponding
representation in the composite fields . It is noted that
the result of in Fig. 1 (respectively in Fig. 2) is
obtained using the irreducible polynomial of
(respectively ).
III. FAULT DETECTION SCHEME
To obtain low-overhead parity prediction,
we have divided the S-box and the inverse S-box into
five blocks as shown in Figs. 1 and 2. In these
figures, the modulo-2 additions, consisting of 4 XOR
gates, are shown by two concentric circles with a plus
inside. Furthermore, the multiplications in are shown
by rectangles with crosses inside. Let be the output of
the block denoted by dots in Figs. 1 and 2 for the Sbox. As seen in Fig. 1 and . Similarly, from Fig. 2, ,
and . One can replace with and with for the inverse Sbox. In the following, we have exhaustively searched
for the least overhead parity predictions of these
blocks denoted by in Figs. 1 and 2. A. The S-Box and
the Inverse S-Box Using Polynomial Basis The
IV. ASIC AND FPGA IMPLEMENTATIONS AND

COMPARISONS
In this section, we compare the areas and the
delays of the presented scheme with those of the
previously reported ones in both both applicationspecific
integrated
circuit
(ASIC)
and
fieldprogrammable
gate
array
(FPGA)
implementations. We have implemented the S-boxes
using memories and the ones presented in [20] (the

36
www.iaetsd.in
hardware optimization of [17]), [18], and [22] which

use polynomial basis representation in composite
fields. We have also implemented the fault detection
schemes proposed in [2], [8] (both united and paritybased), and [10] which are based on the ROM-based
implementation of the S-box. The results of the
implementations for both original and fault detection
scheme (FDS) in terms of delay and area have been
tabulated in Tables II and III. As seen in these tables,
the original structures are not divided into blocks and
full optimization of the original entire architecture as
a single block is performed in both ASIC and FPGA.
This allows us to find the actual overhead of
the presented fault detection scheme as compared to
the original structures which are not divided into five
blocks. We have used 0.18- m CMOS technology for
the ASIC implementations. These architectures have
been coded in VHDL as the design entry to the
Synopsys Design Analyzer. The results are tabulated
in Table II. Moreover, for the FPGA implementations
in Table III, the Xilinx Virtex-II Pro FPGA (xc2vp27) [24] is utilized in the Xilinx ISE version 9.1i.
Furthermore, the synthesis is performed using the
XST. we have implemented the fault detection
scheme presented in [2] and [8] based on using
redundant units for the S-box (united S-box).
Furthermore, the fault detection scheme proposed in
[10] is implemented. This scheme uses 512 9
memory cells to generate the predicted parity bit and
the 8-bit output of the S-box [10]. One can obtain
from Tables II and III that for both of these schemes,
the area overhead is more than 100%. As mentioned
in the introduction, the approach in [11] utilizes the
scheme in [10] for protecting the combinational logic
elements, whose implementation results are also
shown in Tables II and III. Additionally, for certain
AES implementations containing storage elements,
one can use the error correcting code-based approach
presented in [11] in addition to the proposed scheme
in this paper to make a more reliable AES
implementation. Moreover, the parity-based scheme
in [8] which only realizes the multiplicative inversion
using memories is implemented. As seen in these
tables, we have also implemented the schemes in [13]
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
and [14]. It is noted that the scheme in [13] is for the

multiplicative inversion and does not present the
parity predictions for the transformation matrices.
Moreover, we have applied the presented fault
detection scheme to the S-boxes in [18] and [22]. As
seen in bold faces in Tables II and III, with the error
coverage of close to 100%, the presented lowcomplexity fault detection S-boxes (presented in
Section III) are the most compact ones among the
other S-boxes. The optimum S-box and inverse S-box
using normal basis have the least hardware
complexity with the fault detection scheme.
Moreover, as seen in the tables, the optimum
structures using composite fields and polynomial
basis ( and ) have the least post place and route
timing overhead among other schemes. It is noted
that using sub-pipelining for the presented fault
detection scheme in this paper, one can reach much
more faster hardware implementations of the
composite field fault detection structures
V. CONCLUSION
In this paper, we have presented a high
performance parity based concurrent fault detection
scheme for the AES using the S-box and the inverse
S-box in composite fields. Using exhaustive searches,
we have found the least complexity S-boxes and
inverse S-boxes as well as their fault detection
circuits. Our error simulation results show that very
high error coverages for the presented scheme are
obtained. Moreover, a number of fault detection
schemes from the literature have been implemented
on ASIC and FPGA and compared with the ones
presented here. Our implementations show that the
optimum S-boxes and the inverse S-boxes using
normal basis are more compact than the ones using
polynomial basis. However, the ones using
polynomial
basis
result
in
the
fastest
implementations. We have also implemented the
AES encryption using the proposed fault detection
scheme. The results of the ASIC and FPGA mapping
show that the costs of the presented scheme are
reasonable with acceptable post place and route
delays.

37
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
SCREEN SHOTS
Hexa Decimal Input
Hexa Decimal Input Operation

38
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Encription Output In Hexa Decimal
Encription Output In Binary

39
www.iaetsd.in
REFERENCES
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[12] M. Mozaffari-Kermani and A. ReyhaniMasoleh, Parity-based fault detection architecture of

S-box for advanced encryption standard, in Proc.
DFT, Oct. 2006, pp. 572580.
[13] S.-Y. Wu and H.-T. Yen, On the S-box
architectures with concurrent error detection for the
advanced
encryption
standard,
IEICE
Trans.Fundam. Electron., Commun. Comput. Sci.,
vol. E89-A, no. 10, pp. 25832588, Oct. 2006.
[14] A. E. Cohen, Architectures for Cryptography
Accelerators, Ph.D. dissertation, Univ. Minnesota,
Twin Cities, Sep. 2007.
[15] M. Mozaffari-Kermani and A. ReyhaniMasoleh, A lightweight concurrent fault detection
scheme for the AES S-boxes using normal basis, in
Proc. CHES, Aug. 2008, pp. 113129.
[16] D. Canright, A very compact S-box for AES,
in Proc. CHES, Aug. 2005, pp. 441455.
[17] A. Satoh, S. Morioka, K. Takano, and S.
Munetoh, A compact Rijndael hardware architecture
with S-box optimization, in Proc. ASIACRYPT, Dec.
2001, pp. 239254. [18] J.Wolkerstorfer, E. Oswald,
and M. Lamberger, An ASIC implementation of the
AES SBoxes, in Proc. CT-RSA, 2002, pp. 6778.
[19] V. Rijmen, Dept. ESAT, Katholieke Universiteit
Leuven, Leuven, Belgium, Efficient Implementation
of the Rijndael S-Box, 2000.
[20] X. Zhang and K. K. Parhi, High-speed VLSI
architectures for the AES algorithm, IEEE Trans.
Very Large Scale Integr. (VLSI) Syst., vol. VLSI-12,
no. 9, pp. 957967, Sep. 2004.
[21] X. Zhang and K. K. Parhi, On the optimum
constructions of composite field for the AES
algorithm, IEEE Trans. Circuits Syst. II, Exp. Briefs,
vol. 53, no. 10, pp. 11531157, Oct. 2006.
[22] N. Mentens, L. Batina, B. Preneel, and I.
Verbauwhede, A systematic evaluation of compact
hardware implementations for the Rijndael S-box, in
Proc. CT-RSA, Feb. 2005, pp. 323333.
[23] L. Breveglieri, I. Koren, and P. Maistri, An
operation-centered approach
to fault detection in symmetric cryptography
ciphers, IEEE
Trans. Computers, vol. C-56, no. 5, pp. 534540,
May 2007.
[24]
Xilinx
[Online].
Available:
http://www.xilinx.com/
[1] National Institute of Standards and Technologies,

Announcing the Advanced Encryption Standard
(AES) FIPS 197, Nov. 2001.
[2] R. Karri, K. Wu, P. Mishra, and K. Yongkook,
Fault-based side-channel cryptanalysis tolerant
Rijndael symmetric block cipher architecture, in
Proc. DFT, Oct. 2001, pp. 418426.
[3] R. Karri, K. Wu, P. Mishra, and Y. Kim,
Concurrent error detection schemes for fault-based
side-channel cryptanalysis of symmetric block
ciphers, IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Des. Integr.
Circuits Syst., vol. 21, no. 12, pp. 15091517, Dec.
2002.
[4] A. Satoh, T. Sugawara, N. Homma, and T. Aoki,
High-performance concurrent error detection
scheme for AES hardware, in Proc. CHES, Aug.
2008, pp. 100112.
[5] L. Breveglieri, I. Koren, and P. Maistri,
Incorporating
error
detection
and
online
reconfiguration into a regular architecture for the
advanced encryption standard, in Proc. DFT, Oct.
2005, pp. 7280.
[6] M. Karpovsky, K. J. Kulikowski, and A. Taubin,
Differential fault analysis attack resistant
architectures for the advanced encryption standard,
in Proc. CARDIS, Aug. 2004, vol. 153, pp. 177192.
[7] P. Maistri and R. Leveugle, Double-data-rate
computation as a countermeasure against fault
analysis, IEEE Trans. Computers, vol. 57, no. 11,
pp. 15281539, Nov. 2008.
[8] C. H. Yen and B. F.Wu, Simple error detection
methods for hardware implementation of advanced
encryption standard, IEEE Trans. Computers, vol.
55, no. 6, pp. 720731, Jun. 2006.
[9] G. Bertoni, L. Breveglieri, I. Koren, P. Maistri,
and V. Piuri, A parity code based fault detection for
an implementation of the advanced encryption
standard, in Proc. DFT, Nov. 2002, pp. 5159.
[10] G. Bertoni, L. Breveglieri, I. Koren, P. Maistri,
and V. Piuri, Error analysis and detection
procedures for a hardware implementation of the
advanced encryption standard, IEEE Trans.
Computers, vol. 52, no. 4, pp. 492505, Apr. 2003.
[11] C. Moratelli, F. Ghellar, E. Cota, and M.
Lubaszewski, A fault-tolerant DFA-resistant AES
core, in Proc. ISCAS, 2008, pp. 244247.

40
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
NANO MATERIALS FILLED

POLYMERS FOR REDUCING THE THERMAL
PEAK TEMPERATURE IN A VEHICLE
SIDHARTH RADHAKRISHNAN *, SUDHIRNAATH1
*UG Student, Dept. of Mechanical Engineering, RMK Engineering College, Chennai.
1
UG Student Dept. of Mechanical Engineering, RMK Engineering College, Chennai.
time is 10 min, 1 g of SWNTs can besynthesized per

day by this method. The SWNTs arecharacterized by
high-resolution transmission electronmicroscopy and
by Raman spectroscopy, showing the quality and the
quantity of products.The catalytic decomposition
method was suitable for scaling up and for achieving
a "controlled production" of SWNT. By this we
implied the ability to control the selectivity towards
SWNT by changing catalyst parameters and
operating conditions, all combined with the ability to
obtain a reliable quantitative measurement of the
amount of SWNT produced.The CVD processes offer
the best approach to the manufacturing of larger
SWNT quantities, with perhaps the most scalable
being the CoMoCAT process which uses a fluidized
bed reactor ( similar to those used in petroleum
refining, albeit, on a much smaller scale.
1. INTRODUCTION
There is an increasing demand for fuel nowadays and
it is soonexpected that there will be an acute shortage
in the fuel that weare using at present. Hence there is
a need to optimize the fuelusage.
Almost 10% of fuel in a vehicle is used for
maintaining thetemperature within it for the comfort
level of the passengers andthe main factor that
influences this is the air conditioner in thevehicle.
have made a carbon nano tube which is blasted
withGraphite vapors forming a chicken wired
structure. It is thencondensed with a polymer, which
brings up the required behavior of the material i.e. it
can act both as a sun proof sheetor as a normal
transparent sheet (allows sunlight to pass through)
according to the requirement. This can be stuck to
thewindow pane. Now a voltage of 5V is given to
change itsbehaviour from sun proof sheet to normal
sheet and vice versa.This eliminates the peak thermal
temperature attained in thevehicle when parked and
hence the work load of the AC isabruptly reduced.
2.FABRICATION OF CNT
Carbon nano tubes are tubular fibrous structures
composedentirely of graphitic carbon planes. The
carbon carbon doublebonds form a hexagon shape
within the lamellar graphite planesthat resemble
common chicken wire. The orientation of thegraphite
planes is parallel to the fiber axis along with
theseamless nature of tube structure that enables their
extrememechanical properties. This can be done by
ball milling or bynormal chemical vapor
Deposition method. It is then condensedwith a
polymer such as SMP (Shape memory polymer) to
get the requiredproperty.Large quantities of SWNTs
can be synthesized by catalyticdecomposition of
methane over well-dispersed metal particlessupported
on MgO at 1000C. The thus produced SWNTs can
beseparated easily from the support by a simple
acidic treatment toobtain a product with high yields
(7080%) of SWNTs. Because the typical synthesis
Fig .1 SCALABLE PROCESS
An illustration of a fluidized bed reactor which is

able to scale up the generation of SWNTs using the
CoMoCATprocess.In this CoMoCAT method,
SWNT are grown by CO disproportionate

41
www.iaetsd.in
(decomposition into C and CO2) at 700-950C in flow

of pure CO at a total pressure that typically ranges
from 1 to 10 atm.A process was developed that is
able to grow significant amounts of SWNT in less
than one hour, keeping selectivity towards SWNT
better than 90 percent. We discovered a synergistic
effect between Co and Mo that is critical for the
performance of the catalyst. The catalyst is effective
when both metals are simultaneously present on a
silica support with a low Co: Mo: separated, they are
unselectiveshows the selective synthesis of a SWNT
using the CoMoCAT method.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
product of the CoMoCAT process the dual benefit of

low cost and high product quality. This supported
catalyst approach also offers the unique ability to
provide a substantial degree of chirality control
during synthesis.SMPs can retain two or sometimes
three shapes, and the transition between those is
induced by temperature. In addition to temperature
change, the shape change of SMPs can also be
triggered by an electric or magnetic field, light or
solution. As well as polymers in general, SMPs also
cover a wide property-range from stable to
biodegradable, from soft to hard, and from elastic to
rigid, depending on the structural units that constitute
the SMP. SMPs include thermoplastic and thermoset
(covalently cross-linked) polymeric materials. SMPs
are known to be able to store up to three different
shapes in memory. SMPs have demonstrated
recoverable strains of above 800%.
2.1 Electro-active SMPs

This SMP is used in this project.The use of electricity
to activate the shape-memory effect of polymers is
desirable for applications where it would not be
possible to use heat and is another active area of
research. Some current efforts use conducting SMP
composites with carbon nanotubes short carbon fibers
(SCFs). Carbon black, metallic Ni powder. These
conducting SMPs are produced by chemically
surface-modifying multi-walled carbon nanotubes
(MWNTs) in a mixed solvent of nitric acid and
sulfuric acid, with the purpose of improving the
interfacial bonding between the polymers and the
conductive fillers. The shape-memory effect in these
types of SMPs have been shown to be dependent on
the filler content and the degree of surface
modification of the MWNTs, with the surface
modified versions exhibiting good energy conversion
efficiency
and
improved
mechanical
properties.Another technique being investigated
involves the use of surface-modified superparamagnetic nanoparticles. When introduced into
the polymer matrix, remote actuation of shape
transitions is possible.
Fig 2 SWNT
Fig.3 Diameter Distribution from Fluorescence

Analysis
The Histogram for SG 65 material shows the very

narrow distribution of SWNT diameters possible with
the CoMoCAT process. 90% of the tubes have a
diameter between 0.72 and 0.92 nm. 52% of the tubes
are (6,5) chirality.
2.1.1 SYNTHESIS OF SHAPE MEMORY

POLYMERS:
Preparation of Poly actide based urethane:
Two of the unique characteristics of the CoMoCAT

process are that it is readily scalable and its intrinsic
high selectivity is preserved as the reactor size is
scaled up. These characteristics impart the SWNT
(i)Materials required:
llactide, 1,4Butanediol(BDO) , stannous octate
(Sn(Oct)2),Hexamthylene diisocyanate (HDI) ,

42
www.iaetsd.in
toluene which is dried over Na wire and distilled

before use ,Ethyl Acetate which is dried over CaH2
before use.
(ii)Preparation of poly(l-lactide) diol (HO-PLAOH)
l-lactide was recrystallized in ethyl acetate for three
times. It was then added to a glass container which
had been flame-dried and equipped with a magnetic
stirring bar. A toluene solution of 1,4Butanediol(BDO)
and
Sn
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
A certain amount of the above prepared

poly(llactide) diol (PLA diol ) was dissolved in
double volume of toluene and heated at 75 C for 20
min. Sn(Oct)2 (1% of the PLA diol, mol/mol) in dried
toluene and a given amount of Hexamthylene
diisocyanate (HDI) were added to the solution. After
stirring for 10 min at 75 C, 1,4butanediol (BDO),
the mole number of which was equal to the molar
difference between HDI and PLA diol, was added
and the reaction mixture was stirred for another 6 h.
The polymer was isolated by dissolving the reaction
mixture in chloroform followed by precipitation in
ethanol.
Fig. 5 CARBON NANO TUBE CHICKEN WIRED

STRUCTURE
3.ADVANTAGES
According to the statistics published, there is a
consumption of about 40 billion liters of gasoline/
year for the usage of airconditioners alone, assuming
80% of vehicles use AC. Even anincrease of 0.4
km/liter will save around $6 billion annually.
The results of a study showsthat the fuel consumption
of the test vehicles with air conditioning systems in
operation increases with rising ambientair
temperature and humidity, reaching a value of about
18 percent on a typical Swiss summer day with an air
temperature of27 degrees and relative humidity of
about 60%.
Fig 4 Deformation under loading and unloading
(Oct)2(0.3% of the BDO, mol/mol) was then

transferred. An equal amount of toluene was then
injected into the container. The reaction vessel was
immersed into a thermostatic oil bath maintained at
125 C for 24 h. The reaction product was
precipitated into ethanol, filtered and dried at 40 C
in vacuum for 48 h.
4.CONCLUSION
Using the CNT sheets in the window pane
isfollowed, then around 20 billion liters of fuel can be
saved in ayear approximately and the efficiency of
the vehicle will have an increase of 5-7% from the
normal value.
(iii)Preparation of poly (llactide) polyurethane

(PLAU)

43
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Sorting
by
Sequence-Dependent
Assembly".Science302 (5650): 15451548.
DNA
Lendlein, A., Kelch, S. (2002). "Shape-memory

polymers".Angew. Chem. Int. Ed.41: 20342057.
Mohr, R. et al. (2006). "Initiation of shape-memory
effect by inductive heating of magnetic nanoparticles
in thermoplastic polymers" (free-download). Proc.
Natl. Acad. Sci. U.S.A.103 (10): 35403545..
Lendlein, A. et al. (2005). "Light-induced shapememory polymers".Nature434 (7035): 879882.
JinsongLeng, HaibaoLv, Yanju Liu and Shanyi Du.
(2008). "Comment on "Water-driven programable
polyurethane shape memory polymer: Demonstration
and mechanism"". Appl. Phys. Lett.92: 206105.b
Toensmeier, P.A., "Shape memory polymers reshape
product design", Plastics Engineering. 2 April 2009
Voit, W., T. Ware, et al. (2010)."High-Strain ShapeMemory Polymers."Advanced Functional Materials
20(1): 162-171.
REFERENCES:
Sen, S.; Puri, Ishwar K (2004). "Flame synthesis of
carbon nanofibers and nanofibers composites
containing
encapsulated
metal
particles".
Nanotechnology15 (3): 264268.
Naha, Sayangdev, Sen, Swarnendu, De, Anindya K.,
and Puri, Ishwar K. (2007)."A detailed model for the
Flame synthesis of carbon nanotubes and
nanofibers".Proceedings
of
The
Combustion
Institute31: 182129..
Yamada T, Namai T, Hata K, Futaba DN, Mizuno K,
Fan J, et al. (2006). "Size-selective growth of doublewalled carbon nanotube forests from engineered iron
catalysts". Nature Nanotechnology1: 131136.
MacKenzie KJ, Dunens OM, Harris AT (2010). "An
updated review of synthesis parameters and growth
mechanisms for carbon nanotubes in fluidized
beds".Industrial
&
Engineering
Chemical
Research49: 532338.
Jakubek LM, Marangoudakis S, Raingo J, Liu X,
Lipscombe D, Hurt RH (2009). "The inhibition of
neuronal calcium ion channels by trace levels of
yttrium released from
carbon nanotubes".
Biomaterials30: 63516357.
Hou P-X, Liu C, Cheng H-M (2008). "Purification of
carbon nanotubes".Carbon46: 20032025.
Ebbesen TW, Ajayan PM, Hiura H, Tanigaki K
(1994)."Purification of nanotubes".Nature367 (6463):
519..
Xu Y-Q, Peng H, Hauge RH, Smalley RE (2005).
"Controlled multistep purification of single-walled
carbon nanotubes".Nano Letters5: 163168
Meyer-Plath A, Orts-Gil G, Petrov S et al. (2012).
"Plasma-thermal purification and annealing of carbon
nanotubes".Carbon50: 39343942..
Arnold, Michael S.; Green, Alexander A.; Hulvat,
James F.; Stupp, Samuel I.; Hersam, Mark C. (2006).
"Sorting carbon nanotubes by electronic structure
using
density
differentiation".Nature
Nanotechnology1 (1): 605.
Tanaka, Takeshi; Jin, Hehua; Miyata, Yasumitsu;
Fujii, Shunjiro; Suga, Hiroshi; Naitoh, Yasuhisa;
Minari, Takeo; Miyadera, Tetsuhiko et al. (2009).
"Simple and Scalable Gel-Based Separation of
Metallic and Semiconducting Carbon Nanotubes"..
T.Tanaka. "New, Simple Method for Separation of
Metallic and Semiconducting Carbon Nanotubes".
Zheng, M.; Jagota, A; Strano, MS; Santos, AP;
Barone, P; Chou, SG; Diner, BA; Dresselhaus, MS et
al. (2003). "Structure-Based Carbon Nanotube

44
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
RTOS Based Electronics Industrial

Temperature and Humidity Monitoring using
ARM Processor
A. Prasath
P. Dhakshinamoorthi
PG Scholar
M.E - Embedded System Technologies
Nandha Engineering College
Erode, Tamilnadu, India
sivaprasath15@gmail.com
PG Scholar
M.E - Embedded System Technologies
Nandha Engineering College
Erode, Tamilnadu, India
dhakshinamoorthi08@gmail.com
patching to kernel. So the system updates also possible when it

required.
The ARM Controller is latest one and it support
higher end applications now a days. In here we can choose the
ARM
controller
ported
with
real
timeoperating
system(RTLinux).The system connected through the wireless
sensor network for monitoring remote area. RTLinux is a
preemptive, hard real-time deterministic multitasking kernel for
ARM Controller. RTLinux running with Linux command and
ANSI C source code for system and compilation.RTLinux can
runs on more number of tasks by patching as our requirement.
RTLinux performs inter-process communication (like
semaphores, message queuesand mailbox), timer management
and memory management. It supports for monitoring and
controlling the environment by getting information from sensed
value of electronics manufacturing industriesby guidance of the
Engineers.
The complete architecture of this paper has
beendivided into 3 parts: the system hardwaredetails, software
detail and finally the conclusion.
Abstract--The main of this paper is to monitor the

temperature and humidity values in manufacturing electronic
plants and assembling environment. The temperature and
humidity are the key issues in manufacturing electronics plant
and it leads to loss in production. This paper aims to provide a
solution to this problem by remote monitoring of the temperature
and humidity levels of different area of the plant with the help of
the Wireless Senor Network Module and thesystem implemented
withARM processor with porting of Linux based real time
operating system. Here in addition, thebuzzerfacility is there
tointimationsoundswhen over limit and SD cardfor further
reference and to stores the data instantly and contiguous. These
things make the electronic industries to manufacture the device
ideal.
Keywords--ARM
Processor,RTLinux,
Communication Protocol, Gateway, SD card.
WSN,RTC(DS1307),
I. INTRODUCTION
Recently the electronics industries and others facing
major production fault due to temperature and humidity, thus
temperature cause more defects like improper soldering joints,
extra oxidation of boards and bridging, solder components.
Even though the environment, particularly some machines like
solder paste refrigerator and desiccators for storage of paste and
bare PCB respectively also have to control over these
parameters.
Also some factory looking to control their machines
temperature with certain level to improve the efficiency of the
particular machine, such a case some time lead unexpected
accident, low product quality and more.
Hence now the monitoring and control system
established with LabView tool and interfaces of
microcontroller. But the authors have coming to share their
ideas in this paper, to implement the monitoring and allotment
the temperature and humidity system with ARM with porting
of RTLinux.
The system which is implemented with RTOS is
having multitasking capability to monitor multiple tasks and
controlling it. Also the system can add more applications by
II. HARDWARE DETAILS

Real-Time Module includes support for USB storage
devices, such as thumb drives and external USB hard drives,
for RT targets that have onboard USB hardware refer Fig 1.
Fig 1.Block diagram of industrial monitoring system

45
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The wireless gateway function in here is to receive the task

from sensors and pass the task to ARM Processor.
A.ARM PROCESSOR
ARM designs microprocessor technology that lies at
the heart of advanced digital products, from mobile phones and
digital cameras to games consoles and automotive systems, and
is leading intellectual property (IP) provider of highperformance, low-cost, power-efficient RISC processors,
peripherals, and system-on-chip (SoC) designs through
involvement with organizations such as the Virtual Socket
Interface Alliance (VSIA) and Virtual Component Exchange
(VCX). ARM also offers design and software consulting
services.
E.RTC (DS1307)
The DS1307 Serial Real time clock(RTC) counts
seconds, minutes, hours, day of the week, date, month and
year.The purpose of an RTC or a real time clock is to provide
precise time and date which can be used for various
applications. RTC is an electronic device in the form of an
Integrated Chip (IC) available in various packaging options. It
is powered by an internal lithium battery. As a result of which
even if the power of the system is turned off, the RTC clock
keeps running. It plays a very important role in the real time
systems like digital clock, attendance system, digital camera
etc. In applications where time stamp is needed, RTC is a good
option. Using RTC for designing such application has always
been a good designers choice although the beginning might
be a bit difficult.While designing any real time system which
deals with time, there are two ways of handling the time
factor. One is to generate the time internally which is done by
programming the timers of the controller and the other is to
use an RTC. The RTC is low power, 56 bytes of non-volatile
RAM for data storage, 2 serial interface wire in bi-directional
and 8 pin Dual Inline Package. The battery backup mode is
less than 500nA and it has automatic power switching to
battery when power fails at 2 5 C. The RTC operates in
industrial temperature range from 4 0 C to +85C. It is used
in TV, VCR and phonenumber recall. The DS1307 RTC is
connected to ARM controller using IC bus with time counters
refer Table 1.
ARM7 processor family continues to be used today

for simple 32-bit devices, newer digital designs are
increasingly making use of the newer, more powerful and
feature-rich ARM processors which offer significant technical
enhancements over the ARM7 family. System designers
wishing to upgrade from ARM7 benefit from a robust ARM
processor roadmap providing multiple upgrade options,
including the latest Cortex processors.In most cases migration
is straightforward, and brings significant benefits in PPA,
features and efficiency.
ARM's architecture is compatible with all four major
platform operating systems: Symbian OS, Palm OS, Windows
CE, and Linux. As for software, ARM also works closely with
its partners to provide optimized solutions for existing market
segments.
B. TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The LM35 series are precision integrated-circuit
temperature sensors, whose output voltage is linearly
proportional to the Celsius (Centigrade) temperature. The
LM35 has an advantage over linear temperature sensors
calibrated in Kelvin, as the user is not required to subtract a
large constant voltage from its output to obtain convenient
Centigrade scaling. The LM35 does not required any external
calibration or trimming to provide typical accuracies of C
at room temperature and cover a full -55 to +150C
temperature range. Low cost is assured by trimming and
calibration at the wafer level
UNIT
COUNTING
CYCLE
CARRY TO
NEXT UNIT
Seconds
Minutes
Hours(24)
Hours(12)
00 to 59
00 to 59
00 to 23
12AM
01 AM to 11
AM
12PM
01 PM to 11 PM
59 to 00
59 to 99
23 to 00
-
Date
C. HUMIDITY SENSOR
Humidity is the presence of water in air. The amount
of water vapor in air can affect human comfort as well as many
manufacturing processes in industries. The presence of water
vapor alsoinfluences various physical, chemical, and biological
processes. Humidity measurement in industries is critical
because it may affect the business cost of the product and the
health and safety of the personnel. Hence, humidity sensing is
very important, especially in the control systems for industrial
processes and human comfort. Controlling or monitoring
humidity is of paramount importance in many industrial &
domestic applications. In semiconductor industry, humidity or
moisture levels needs to be properly controlled & monitored
during wafer processing
Months
Years
Weekdays
Timer
01 to 31
01 to 30
01 to 29
01 to 28
01 to 12
01 to 03
0 to 6
00 to 99
CONTENT OF
THE MONTH
COUNTER
-
11PM to 12AM
31 to 01
30 to 01
29 to 01
28 to 01
12 to 01
6 to 0
No carry
1,3,5,7,8,10,12
4,6,9,11,
Table 1.Cycle length of the time counters, clock modes
F.SD Card
The SD-memory card is non-volatile flash memory,
portable device used in mobile, computer and other consumer
appliances. It gives high security, memory size can vary
depends on cost, used in audio and video recording.
The SD-memory card is a Secure Digital Input
Output (SDIO) card, it support data protection, avoid the
duplication sensed value in same timing and security systems
based on identification cards in International standard ISOD. GATEWAY
7816. An embedded version of MMC is eMMC, according to
The wireless gateways from Comcast provide the
the JESD84-A43. The interfacing of SD card with ARM using
functionality of a Wi-Fi router and voice modem in a single
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus and operates in 3.3volts
device. The wireless gateway functions such as firewall, port
in Table 2. It offers up to 8-bit wide interface and can be
forwarding, port blocking, diagnostic tools and WI-FI
applied in SD-memory card compatible hardware interfaces.
Protected Setup. It gives a secure wireless home network and
While the SD-memory card adds an advanced data storage
connects your computers, laptops, and other Wi-Fi electronic
functions
to an application and easily accessible.
products (such CONFERENCE
as game systems,
tablets, or
mobileINphones).
2nd INTERNATIONAL
ON CURRENT
TRENDS
ENGINEERING
RESEARCH
46
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
assembler and linker operation of embedded product in real

time in fig 2.
PIN
NUMBER
NAME
TYPE
DESCRIPTION
NCS
SPI card select (CS)

(negative logic)
DI
SPI serial
(MOSI)
VSS
Ground
VDD
Power
CLK
SPI
serial
(SCLK)
VSS
Ground
DO
SPI serial data out

(MISO)
NC
nIRQ
Unused
Unused
data
in
clock
Fig 2.RTLinux Operating System

Table 2.SPI Interfacing pins for SD memory card
RTLinux design objective is that the system should

be transparent, modular, and extensible. Transparency means
that there are no unopenable black boxes and the cost of any
operation should be determinable. Modularity means that it is
possible to omit functionality and the expense of that
functionality if it is not needed. The base RTLinux system
supports high speed interrupt handling and no more. And
extensibility means that programmers should be able to add
modules and tailor the system to their requirements. It has
simple priority scheduler that can be easily replaced by
schedulers more suited to the needs of some specific
application. When developing RTLinux, it was designed to
maximize the advantage we get from having Linux and its
powerful capabilities available.
G. BUZZER
Buzzer is an audio signaling device and it is
mechanical, electromechanical or piezoelectric. It is used as
alarm device in timing manner and confirmation of user input
from personnel computer or other devices by making sound.
Buzzer is connected to ARM using one wire connecting wire.
H.LED
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) are semiconductor light
sources and it has two terminals. The light emitted from LEDs
varies from visible to infrared and ultraviolet regions. They
operate on low voltage and power. LEDs are one of the most
common electronic components and are mostly used as
indicators of circuit. LED display the monitoring value of
temperature and pressure in real time environment.
RTLinux functions schedule a priority scheduler that

supports both a "lite POSIX" interface described below and
the original V1 RTLinux API, which controls the processor
clocks and exports an abstract interface for connecting
handlers to clocks. It posix IO supports POSIX style
read/write/open interface to device drivers, FIFO connects RT
tasks and interrupt handlers to Linux processes through a
device layer so that Linux processes can read/write to RT
components. RTLinux is a semaphore contributed package by
Jerry Epplin which gives RT tasks blocking semaphores and
POSIX mutex support is planned to be available in the next
minor version update of RTLinux. RTLinuxMemorybuffer is a
contributed package written by Tomasz Motylewski for
providing shared memory between RT components and Linux
processes
III. SOFTWARE DETAIL

It is a written description of a software product, that a
software designer writes in order to give a software
development team overall guidance to the architecture of the
software project. An SDD usually accompanies an architecture
diagram with pointers to detailed feature specifications of
smaller pieces of the design. Practically, a design document is
required to coordinate a large team under a single vision. A
design document needs to be a stable reference, outlining all
parts of the software and how they will work.
A. RTLinux
RTLinuxis open source hard real-time RTOS
microkernel.The function of the RTLinux is mostly depends
on kernel. The programming of RTLinux is written in Linux
command and C coding. It is portable, scalable, preemptive,
high-performance interrupt handling and multitasking kernel.
It is developed for commercial purpose by FSM Lab andWind
River System and it has connectivity with GUI and File
Systems. It is multi-environment real time kernel running in
core environment and supports multiple porting of devices. It
is easy to implement and highly secure real time system. It
supports processors and controllers embedded applications in
real time. RTLinux program coding supports compiler,
And the other application supporting codes are can

develop with C and C++ language which are generally used
for development of usual general purpose and special purpose
system.
IV. COMMUNICATIONS PROTOCOL
All communications between devices require that the
devices agree on the format of the data. The set of rules
defining a format is called a protocol. Communication
protocols cover authentication, error detection and correction,
and signaling. They can also describe the syntax, semantics,
and synchronization of analog and digital communications..
There are thousands of communication protocols that are used

47
www.iaetsd.in
everywhere in analog and digital communications.It supports

both wired and wireless communication.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
1-Wire bus. The 8-bit family code, a subset of the 64-bit ID,
identifies the device type and functionality.
Typically, 1-Wire slave devices operate over the
voltage range of 2.8V (min) to 5.25V (max). Most 1-Wire
devices have no pin for power supply; they take their energy
from the 1-Wire bus (parasitic supply). It is a unidirectional
bus and it is connects the LED display to ARM processor.
A. SPI BUS
SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) bus is a low power,
full duplex, master-slave interfacing bus. It is solid role in
embedded systems whether it is system on chip processors,
both with higher end 32-bit processors such as those
using ARM,
MIC
or Power
PC and
with
other
microcontrollers such as the AVR, PIC etc. These chips
usually include SPI controllers capable of running in either
master or slave mode. In-system programmable AVR
controllers can be programmed using an SPI interface. Chip
or FPGA based designs sometimes use SPI to communicate.
So, SPI is a common technology used nowadays for
communication with peripheral devices where we want to
transfer data speedily and within real time constraints. There
are many serial interfaces right from Morse code telegraphy,
RS232, USB, Fire wire, Ethernet and many more. Each serial
interface offers advantages or disadvantages for many designs,
depending on criteria such as needed data rate, space
availability, and noise considerations. It is simple 4 wire serial
communication bus and it operates on 10MH. In SPI data is
shifted in /out one at a time and transmit data from master
device to/from one or more slave devices over short distances.
It is high speed data transferring bus and no limit upto 8 bit
transfer.The SPI bus is straightforward and versatile, enabling
simple and fast communication with a variety of peripherals.
A high speed multi-IO mode host adapter and some invaluable
tool in debugging as well as adding SPI communication
capabilities to any test system.
V. CONCLUSION
In this paper, the authors are develops the idea to
monitor the temperature and humidity value using wireless
sensor in Real time. In this paper the existing model has to
monitor the temperature and humidity value using
microcontroller. The result of this paper is more secure to keep
the monitoring data in real time RTLinux. In future, ability to
add some more tasks to monitor, such as employee
authentication checking, data logging of cctv camera and etc.
The values of the monitoring data in real time are displayed on
the LED and Buzzer for intimation of warning.
VI. REFERENCES
[1].Prasath.A,PC based Data acquisition system with Interfacing of

I2C RTC (DS1307) & SPI ADC (MCP3201) with 8051, project
done at 2011.
[2].Kollam.M,Zigbee Wireless Sensor Network for
Interactive Industrial Automation published Year 2011.
Better
[3].Agrawal,Complete industrial solution for automation in

temperature and humidity monitoring using labview published
on IEEE conference at year 2012.
[4].Tamilselvan.K,SD card based Data Logging and Data Retrieval
for Microcontrollers to using c/os- II International Journal of
Engineering Research & Technology (IJERT) Vol.2 Issue 11,
November 2013.
B. IC BUS
Two wires: serial data (SDA) and serial clock (SCL).
All I2C master and slave devices are connected with only
those two wires. Each device can be a transmitter, a receiver or
both. Some devices are masters they generate bus clock and
initiate communication on the bus, other devices are slaves
and respond to the commands on the bus. In order to
communicate with specific device, each slave device must
have an address which is unique on the bus. I2C master
devices (usually microcontrollers) dont need an address since
no other (slave) device sends commands to the master .It
supports both Multi-master and Multi-slave, so it can detect
the collision easily. It supports 7 and10-bit addressing and
each device connects to the bus using software with unique
address. The maximum speed of the IC bus is 3.4Mbits/sec
and it varies depends on the modes of application. IC bus is
simple and flexible used in many applications.I2C bus is
transferred in 8-bit packets (bytes). There is no limitation on
the number of bytes, however, each byte must be followed by
an Acknowledge bit. This bit signals whether the device is
ready to proceed with the next byte. For all data bits including
the Acknowledge bit, the master must generate clock pulses. If
the slave device does not acknowledge transfer this means that
there is no more data or the device is not ready for the transfer
yet. The master device must either generate Stop or Repeated
Start condition.
[5].Prasath.A,
Dineshbabu.N,CompleteIndustrialSolution
for
Automation in Temperature andHumidity Monitoring using
Microcontrollerpresented at NCICC-2014,SNS College of
Technology at 2014.
[6].Tamilselvan.K,
Dhakshinamoorthi.P,An
Efficient
Data
Acquisition System for Microcontrollers with RTOS presented at
PCID-2014, BannariammanInstitute of Technology.
C. ONE WIRE BUS

One wire bus is a makes connection to one master
and multiple slaves. 1-Wire technology is a serial protocol
using a single data line plus ground reference for
communication. A 1-Wire master initiates and controls the
communication with one or more 1-Wire slave devices on the
48
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
UNDER-WATER WELDING USING ROBOTIC TECHNOLOGY

V.Prasanth1, S.Sukesh Kumar2, Dr.R.Gnanaguru3
1 Final year Mechanical, Narasus Sarathy Institute of Technology,Salem.
Email: prasanthvbala@gmail.com
2 Final year Mechanical, Narasus Sarathy Institute of Technology,Salem.
Email: sukeshkumaran007@gmail.com
3 Professor & Head / Mechanical, Narasus Sarathy Institute of Technology,Salem.
Email: nsithodmech@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
In some intricate situations, the Robot based

welding processes have replaced human welders.
During the last few years, the automation of welding
process for pipe structures have gained significant
momentum with an objective to improve the
productivity and accuracy in the areas involving
marine applications, etc. Various research studies in
the welding environment have shown that
productivity improvement is a major thrust area of
welding industry. The welders in todays world are
under tremendous pressure to meet two major
challenges. These are: the higher weld quality and;
reduced manufacturing cost.
Welding in offshore and marine application is

an area of research and understanding, where many
problems are still unsolved. The important application
of the off shore welding is the ship building and pipeline
construction. Since underwater welding is done at the
elevated pressure, the care must be ensured to improve
the welders safety. Hence the robotic technology is
recommended to overcome the problem relating to the
life threat of the welders. In this paper, a brief
description of the robot, designed for the underwater
welding is made. The problems in underwater welding
have also been discussed in context to the existing
welding techniques. Finally, the scope of further
research has been recommended.
Another emerging area in marine application

welding systems is the underwater welding
technique. Underwater Welding (UW) has been
significantly used for over five decades. However, its
use has not reached to a significant level in a welding
environment due to number of factors. The
underwater welding process came into existence with
the development of water-proof electrodes in 1940s
(Keats, 2005). It is the process of welding at elevated
pressures, normally underwater. It may be carried out
in the water itself or dry inside a specially
constructed positive pressure envelope, thereby
providing a special environment. Under water is also
known as hyperbaric welding when used in a dry
environment, and underwater welding when in a
wet environment. The application areas of this
welding technique include a wide variety of
structures, such as repair ships, offshore oil
Keywords: Underwater Welding, Welders Safety,

Robotic Technology.
I. INTRODUCTION
The recent developments in the manufacturing world
have led to a revolutionary change in the design and
development of various systems. Developments in
welding technology are one of such changes.
Welding processes have been used extensively as a
joining technique, used in design and fabrication of
various structures like naval ships, airplanes,
automobiles, bridges, pressure vessels, etc. Welding
has emerged as a better option in contrast to other
joining techniques in terms of joint efficiency,
mechanical properties with a greater application
impact.

49
www.iaetsd.in
platforms, and pipelines. Steel is the most common

material welded (Cary and Helzer, 2005). Various
researchers have defined the concept of underwater
welding in different ways (Haddad and Farmer, 1985;
Oates, 1996; Schmidt, 1996; Khanna, 2004; and Cary
and Helzer, 2005).
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
includes the self-shielded flux cored arc welding.

From economics point of view, the wet welding
technique with coated electrodes is considered. The
cooling rate in wet welds is much higher than in
those obtained in dry welding. In the temperature
range from 800 to 500 C it can change from 415 to
56 C/s (Steen, 1991). Underwater wet welds are also
known to contain high amounts of porosity. Porosity
may be formed by molecular hydrogen, carbon
monoxide or water vapour (Irie et al., 1997;
Cavaliere et al., 2006; and Cavaliere et al., 2008).
Pores are present to some extent in all wet welds. The
main factors affecting this phenomenon are (Shida et
al., 1997; Irie et al., 1997; Cavaliere et al.,2006; and
Cavaliere et al., 2008): water depth, electrode
covering and arc stability.
II. IMPORTANCE OF UNDERWATER WELDING

IN MARINE APPLICATIONS
In practice, the use of underwater wet
welding for offshore repairs has been limited mainly
because of porosity and low toughness in the
resulting welds. With appropriate consumable design,
however, it is possible to reduce porosity and to
enhance
weld
metal
toughness
through
microstructural refinement. Hence, welding in
offshore and marine application is an important area
of research and needs considerable attention and
understanding where, many problems are still
unsolved. In the present review, a brief understanding
of the problems in underwater welding will be
discussed in context to the existing welding
techniques. Detailed description of a few advanced
welding techniques has also been made. Finally, the
scope of further research would be recommended.
Special precaution should be taken to produce

underwater arc to protect it from surrounding water.
Wet welding does not need any complicated
experiment set up, its economical and can be
immediately applied in case of emergency and
accident as it does not need water to be evacuated.
However, difficulties in welding operation due to
lack of visibility in water, presence of sea current,
ground swells in shallow water and inferior weld
qualities (increased porosities, reduced ductility,
greater hardness in the heat affected zone, hydrogen
pick up from the environment) are the notable
disadvantages of wet welding technique.
III. CLASSIFICATION OF UNDERWATER

WELDING
Underwater welding may be divided into two main
types, wet and dry welding (Oates, 1996).There are
many welding types in each case. Wet type is
considered here in this robotic welding.
V. SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING

Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) is among the
most widely used welding processes. During the
process, the flux covering the electrode melts during
welding. This forms the gas and slag to shield the arc
and molten weld pool. Figure 1 shows the schematic
of shielded metal arc welding process. The slag must
be chipped off the weld bead after welding. The flux
also provides a method of adding scavengers,
deoxidizers, and alloying elements to the weld metal.
For underwater wet welding with Shielded Metal Arc
Welding (SMAW) technique, direct current is used
and usually polarity is straight (Khanna, 2004).
Electrodes are usually water proofed. Furthermore, it
is flux coated which causes generation of bubble
during welding and displaces water from the welding
arc and weld pool area. Hence, the flux composition
IV. WET WELDING

This type of welding process is carried out at ambient
water pressure in which, there exists a relationship
between the welder and the diver in the water. This is
carried out by means of a water-proof stick electrode,
with no physical barrier between water and welding
arc (Oates, 1996).
In wet welding technique, the complex structures
may also be welded (Oates, 1996; Shida et al., 1997;
Khanna, 2004; and Kruusing, 2004). One of the most
commonly used wet welding techniques is the
Shielded Metal Arc Welding (SMAW) process and
the Flux Cored Arc Welding (FCAW) process. It also

50
www.iaetsd.in
and depth of flux coating should be optimized to

ensure adequate protection. Electrodes for shielded
metal arc welding are classified by AWS as E6013
and E7014 (Khanna, 2004). Versatility, simple
experiment set-up, economy in operation and finished
product quality are notable advantages of the
technique. However, during welding, all electrical
leads, lighting gear, electrode holder, gloves, etc.,
must be fully insulated and in good condition. Ferrite
electrodes with a coating based on iron oxide should
be used as they resist hydrogen cracking. Flux cored
arc welding is another technique which could not yet
competed with SMAW because of reported excessive
porosities and problems with underwater wire
feeding
system
(Oates,
1996).
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
VII. PARTS OF UNDERWATER ROBOTIC

WELDING
The robot that is designed for the
underwater welding is based on the submarine
design. The main parts of the robot is
Propeller
Electromagnetic Wheels
Welding Rod holder and Rod
Stepper Motors
ATmega 16 Microcontroller
Camera
Lights
a.) Propeller
A propeller is a mechanical device for
propelling a boat or aircraft, consisting of a revolving
shaft with two or more broad, angled blades attached
to it. There are 4 propellers used in this robot. Two
propellers face the front side and the other two
propellers face the top side. When the propellers in
the front rotate clockwise the robot moves forward
and vice versa for anticlockwise direction, and when
the propellers at the top rotate clockwise the robot
moves up and vice versa for the anticlockwise
direction. The side wards movement i.e. Right to left
is done by deflecting the propeller arm.
Fig1: Schematic of shielded metal arc welding

VI. ROBOTICS
Robot is a machine capable of carrying out a
complex series of actions automatically, especially
one programmable by a computer. The word robot
was introduced to the public by the Czech interwar
writer Karel apek in his play R.U.R. (Rossum's
Universal Robots), published in 1920.(Zunt,
Dominik, 2007) The play begins in a factory that uses
a chemical substitute for protoplasm to manufacture
living, simplified people called robots.
Fig2: NX CAD model of propeller

b.) Electromagnetic Wheels
An electromagnet is a soft metal core made
into a magnet by the passage of electric current
through a coil surrounding it. The DC current supply
is given to the wheels to magnetize and stick firmly
on the metal surface.

51
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
PM and VR techniques to achieve maximum power

in a small package size.
Fig 3: NX CAD model of electromagnetic wheels

Fig 4: Stepper Motor
c.) Welding Rod Holder and Rod
e.) ATmega 16 Microcontroller
The positive side of the DC power supply is
given to the welding rod holder and whereas the
metal to be welded is given with the negative charge.
The rod used here is the consumable rod and the rod
is flux coated with the insulated material suitable for
the underwater welding.
ATMEGA 16 microcontroller is used in this

type of the robot. A microcontroller (sometimes
abbreviated C, uC or MCU) is a small computer on
a single integrated circuit containing a processor
core, memory, and programmable input/output
peripherals. Program memory in the form of NOR
flash or OTP ROM is also often included on chip, as
well as a typically small amount of RAM.
Microcontrollers are designed for embedded
applications, in contrast to the microprocessors used
in personal computers or other general purpose
applications.
d.) Stepper Motor

A stepper motor (or step motor) is a
brushless DC electric motor that divides a full
rotation into a number of equal steps. The motor's
position can then be commanded to move and hold at
one of these steps without any feedback sensor (an
open-loop controller), as long as the motor is
carefully sized to the application. The stepper motor
is connected to the H-Bridge and is interfaced to the
microcontroller.
Microcontrollers are used in automatically controlled

products and devices, such as automobile engine
control systems, implantable medical devices, remote
controls, office machines, appliances, power tools,
toys and other embedded systems. By reducing the
size and cost compared to a design that uses a
separate microprocessor, memory, and input/output
devices, microcontrollers make it economical to
digitally control even more devices and processes.
There are four main types of stepper motors: (Liptak,

Bela G., 2005)
Permanent magnet stepper

Hybrid synchronous stepper
Variable reluctance stepper
Lavet type stepping motor
Permanent magnet motors use a permanent magnet

(PM) in the rotor and operate on the attraction or
repulsion between the rotor PM and the stator
electromagnets. Variable reluctance (VR) motors
have a plain iron rotor and operate based on the
principle that minimum reluctance occurs with
minimum gap, hence the rotor points are attracted
toward the stator magnet poles. Hybrid stepper
motors are named because they use a combination of
Fig 5: ATMEGA 16 Microcontroller

52
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
f.) Camera
Camera is a device for recording visual
images in the form of photographs, film, or video
signals. The camera here converts the image to the
co-ordinate system. This co-ordinate system helps to
find the weld area in this context. The camera here is
supported by the focus light system on the either side.
Fig 7: NX CAD model of robot
CONCLUSION
The working safety is an important factor
for the weld done in the underwater. The threat to the
welder is from various aspects during the weld. This
exclusive model of a robot will be a solution for the
problems related to the underwater welding. There is
also a numerous future scope for this system.
Fig 6: NX CAD model of camera

g.) Lights
Light is the natural agent that stimulates sight and
makes things visible. The light here supports the
camera to generate the better picture.
REFERENCES
[1] Anand and Khajuria(2013), welding processes in
marine applications: a review, International Journal
of mechanical engineering research and robotics,
Vol.2, Jan2013, ISSN 2278-0149
VIII. OPERATION OF THE UNDER-WATER

ROBOT WELD
The operation of the robot is controlled by
the micro controller. The microcontroller gets its
input from the computer system. The wired interface
is used because its unable to construct an wireless
design efficiently in the place having the elevated
pressure. The electromagnetic wheels and propellers
are actuated by the stepper motors. This stepper
motors are interfaced to the microcontroller using the
H bridges. The movement of the robot is done using
the propellers and electromagnetic wheels are used to
stick to the surface. The camera helps to find the area
of the weld and converts it into the coordinate
system. This co-ordinate system helps to monitor the
weld and make a weld accurately on the surface. The
figure below is the NX CAD model of the robot.
[2] Cary H B and Helzer S C (2005), Modern

Welding Technology, Upper Saddle River, Pearson
Education, New Jersey.
[3] Cavaliere P, Campanile G, Panella F and
Squillace A (2006), Effect of Welding Parameters
on Mechanical and Microstructural Properties of
AA6056 Joints Produced by Friction Stir Welding,
J. Mater. Process. Technol., Vol. 180, pp. 263-270.
[4] Cavaliere P, Squillace A and Panella F (2008),
Effect of Welding Parameters on Mechanical and
Microstructural Properties of AA6082 Joints
Produced by Friction Stir Welding, J. Mater.
Process. Technol., Vol. 200, pp. 364-372.

53
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[5] Haddad G N and Farmer A J (1985), Weld. J.,

Vol. 64, No. 12, pp. 339-342.
[6] Irie T, Ono Y, Matsushita H et al. (1997),
Proceedings of 16th OMAE, pp. 43-50.
[7] Keats D J (2005), Underwater Wet WeldingA
Welders Mate, Speciality Welds Ltd.
[8] Khanna O P (2004), A Textbook of Welding
Technology, Dhanpat Rai Publications (P) Ltd., New
Delhi, India.
[9] Kruusing A (2004), Optics and Lasers in
Engineering, Vol. 41, pp. 329-352.
[10] Liptak, Bela G. (2005). Instrument Engineers'
Handbook: Process Control and Optimization. CRC
Press. p. 2464. ISBN 978-0-8493-1081-2.
[11] Oates W A (Ed.) (1996), Welding Handbook,
Vol. 3, American Welding Society, Miami, USA.
[12] Schmidt H-P (1996), IEEE Transactions on
Plasma Science, Vol. 24, pp. 1229-1238.
[13] Shida T, Hirokawa M and Sato S (1997),
Welding Research Abroad, Vol. 43, No. 5, p. 36.
[14] Steen W M (Ed.) (1991), Laser Material
Processing, Springer Verlag, New York.
[15] Zunt, Dominik. "Who did actually invent the
word "robot" and what does it mean?". The Karel
apek website. Retrieved 2007-09-11.

54
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
MODELING OF MAGNETICALLY
COUPLED EMBEDDED Z SOURCE
INVERTER
V. Vidhya1, Jeyasree Tagore2 , ME. Applied Electronics
Professor V.Thyagarajan Ph.d ,Dean Electronics &Communication Department.
Sriram Engineering College, Perumalpattu, Chennai
vidhyasreeeee@gmail.com,jeyatag@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
This Project deals with an Embedded Z source inverter to control the three phase induction motor. The Z
source inverters are recent topological options for buck boost energy conversion with a number of
possible voltage and current type circuitries. Embedded Z Source inverter is a single stage converter
which performs both buck boost energy conversions using the LC impedance network. The proposed
inverters provide high boost voltage inversion ability, a lower voltage stress across the active switching
devices, a continuous input current and a reduced voltage stress on the capacitors. In addition, they can
suppress the startup inrush current, which otherwise might destroy the devices. The microcontroller is
used to generate PWM pulses and to control operation of Z Source inverter. The complete hardware is
designed to drive the three phase induction motor. This paper presents the operating principles, analysis,
and simulation results, and compares them to the conventional switched inductor Z source inverter. The
desired three phase PWM signals are generated by using control circuit and detailed hardware results are
presented.
KEYWORD
Embedded Z source, PWM, voltage boost, Z Source Inverter, Boost inversion ability, motor drives, buck
boost.
1.
INTRODUCTION
work has been done in power quality

improvement using variable generators and
power electronic devices. Small-scale standalone wind energy systems are an important
alternative source of electrical energy, finding
applications in locations where conventional
generation is not practical. Unfortunately,
most of these systems do not capture power at
every wind speed especially low wind speeds
which are low in power but can be very
common, but modern permanent magnet
synchronous generator technology offers high
efficiency power conversion from mechanical
into electrical power. Moreover, it allows for
special machine design with very low speed
e.g. in gearless wind and hydro application
and at very high speed for micro-gas turbines,
which is of interest for several regenerative or
co-generative power conversion technologies.
A survey of already realized prototypes or in
use PM generator systems is presented for that
purpose. Impedance source inverter also
Now-a-days, PV energy has attracted

interest as a next generation energy source
capable of solving the problems of global
warming and energy exhaustion caused by
increasing energy consumption. So, solar
energy is considered as input source and this
energy is given to the Z-Source. As we know
solar module can give constant energy so to
satisfy load conditions i.e. buck boost
operations can be achieved by using Z Source
inverter. As we know, we have voltage source
inverter where voltage buck operation is
achieved and in current source inverter, boost
operation is achieved. So, to overcome these
effects and to achieve buck boost operation in
a single stage converter, a new technique is
implemented i.e. z
source inverter, by using Z source Voltage
buck boost operation is achieved in single
stage conversion. In recent years, a lot of

55
www.iaetsd.in
referred as Z-Source Inverter is an advanced

PWM inverter topology. Z Source Inverter is
more advantageous over traditional inverters
with high efficiency, improved power factor
and THD, EMI immunity and so on.
Nowadays PWM control method is mostly
used in power converter applications.
These PWM signals can be generated
using analog circuit as well as digital circuit.
PWM generation using analog circuit requires
large number of discrete circuits such as
triangular carrier wave generator circuit, sine
wave generator circuit; comparator, adder
circuits and phase shifters etc. Each of these
circuits is formed by connecting many
discrete components together such as
transistors, resistors, capacitors, inductors, opamps and so on. In addition analog method of
three phase PWM generation requires
accurately designed phase shifter circuits and
other circuit. Also the response of analog
circuit may get affected by environmental
conditions, noise, changes in the voltages and
currents in the circuit and so on. Thus analog
method is critical and increases complexity
and cost of the circuit. Digital method of
PWM
generation
requires
only
microcontroller
and
its
minimum
configuration. With the advent in the
technology now many microcontrollers has in
built feature of PWM generation. While some
special controller ICs are also available that
are designed and fabricated for three phase
PWM generation and control purpose. PWM
generation digitally require only knowledge of
internal architecture of controller and good
programming skill.
2.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
voltage gain are analyzed in detail and

verified by simulation.
Shahrokh FARHANGI [2] have presented the
design procedure of the Z-source converter as
a single phase PV grid connected transformerless inverter has been presented in this paper.
An optimal switching pattern for the
modulation of the converter has been
proposed, which reduces the switching loss
and common mode EMI. In single phase
application, the output power is not constant
and leads to a low frequency ripple in the
converter elements. An approximate analysis
has been proposed, which considers this
effect. The validity of the design method has
been verified by simulation.
3.
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
An impedance network abbreviated as ZSource is couples the inverter main circuit and
input power source. Z-Source circuit consists
of two capacitors and two inductors connected
in such a way as to form second order filter,
smoothens dc link voltage and current. Zsource inverter circuit provides both voltage
buck and boost properties, which cannot be
achieved with conventional voltage source
and current source inverters. Three phase
inverter circuit consists of six switches
connected in three legs, converts input dc link
voltage in to corresponding three phase ac
voltage. Microcontroller and driver circuit is
used to control on/off time of switching
devices in a proper sequence in a particular
time used in the main inverter circuit.
Microcontroller PIC used to generate
modified maximum constant boost PWM
signal. These PWM signal is applied to the
gate terminals of MOSFETs through gate. ZSource is the X Shaped structure consists of
L1, L2, C1, and C2 in which we can obtain
both buck-boost operations in single stage
conversion. In this DC Source is placed at farleft in series with diode. So, by this, chopping
is occurred in the source current which is
caused by the commutation of diode D. So, in
this condition to smoothen the source current
an additional LC filter is required which
would rise over all cost of the system and
construction of the system by this additional
LC filter is complex. So, to overcome the
above drawbacks, a new technique is
RELATED RESEARCH
Some of the recent researches

related to power quality improvement for
wind energy conversion systems and solar PV
using z source inverter are discussed Fang
Zheng Peng et al. [1] have proposed control
methods for the Z-source inverter and their
relationships of voltage boost versus
modulation index. A maximum boost control
is presented to produce the maximum voltage
boost (or voltage gain) under a given
modulation index. The control method,
relationships of voltage gain versus
modulation index and voltage stress versus

56
www.iaetsd.in
proposed i.e. embedded source inverter. In

this EZ-Source inverter, source is placed in
series with the inductor L1 andL2 and
chopping current i.e. Obtained in the previous
section is filtered. EZ-Source inverter,
smoothens the source current without any
additional LC filter but the gain of the ZSource and Ez Source is same but only source
filtering is achieved without any additional
LC filter. The voltage stress experienced by
C1 and C2 is lower than the original network
but in this EZ-Source inverter requires two
PV panels which are cost effective. So to
reduce stress across the capacitor and its
rating, to achieve lower harmonics, to obtain
low switching losses and to make system
compact in size, a new technique is
implemented i.e. partially parallel EZ-Source
inverter with reduced switches.
The Z-source network makes the shootthrough zero state possible. This shootthrough zero state provides the unique buckboost feature to the inverter. The Z-source
inverter can be operated in three modes.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Vd=VD= 0
Idc=IL+IC Ii= IL IC
Idc 0
Mode III:
Shoot-Through(Sx= SxON, x = A, B, or C;
D = OFF)
VL=VC +V dc /2 Vi= 0
Vd= VD= 2VC The inverter bridge is
operating in one of the seven shoot-through
states. The equivalent circuit of the inverter
bridge in this mode is as shown. This mode
separates the dc link from the ac line. This
shoot-through mode is to be used in every
switching cycle during the traditional zero
vector period generated by the PWM control.
Depending on how much a voltage boost is
needed, the shoot-through interval (T0) or its
duty cycle (T0/T) is determined. It can be
seen that the shoot-through interval is only a
fraction of the switching cycle.
Mode 1
In this mode, the inverter bridge is operating
in one of the six traditional active vectors; the
equivalent circuit. The inverter bridge acts as
a current source viewed from the DC link.
Both the inductors have an identical current
value because of the circuit symmetry. This
unique feature widens the line current
conducting intervals, thus reducing harmonic
current.
4. TYPES OF EZ-SOURCE
In this embedded Z-Source inverter, we have
A) Shunt embedded Z-Source inverter
B) Parallel embedded Z-Source inverter
A) Shunt embedded z-source inverter:
In general we have jumping currents which
flow
in the input DC source which will induce the
power Interruption in the input. By this
jumping currents, the complexity to control
maximum power and designing of system
increases. To overcome the traditional
network, Shunt EZ-Source is proposed,
Shunt EZ-Source consist two types
1. Partially shunt EZ-Source
2. Fully shunt EZ-source
Non-shoot-Through (SxSx, x = A, B, or C;
D = ON)
VL=Vdc /2 VCVi= 2VC
Partially shunt embedded Z (PSEZ)-Source

57
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
inverter:
In this PSEZ-Source inverter, VSI operates as
current source inverter during shoot-through
conditions. A switch SW is used for removing
the unwanted conditions of the diode during
voltage boost operations and it should be
turned off during traditional CSI
5.
SIMULATION RESULTS:
For PWM generation microcontroller is used.

The control circuit diagram is shown in the
following in fig, drawn using Proteus
software.
The six PWM signals are send at port P2 pins
P2.0 through P2.5. The control circuit
simulation is performed using Proteus
software. Five switches are provided for
special purposes, to interrupt microcontroller,
increment, decrement shoot-through time and
input voltage values and to change the mode
of operation two types of edge aligned PWM
waveforms
are
generated
using
microcontroller.
This circuit includes LCD interface at port0 of
microcontroller, five push button switches and
one led interfaced to port3 pins, gate driver
circuit not shown interfaced to PWM output
port2 pins and microcontroller minimum
circuit. LCD display is used to display starting
message regarding project title, welcome
message and provides user interface. It also
displays theoretical values of output voltage
for given input voltage. For this two modes of
operation are provided: one is traditional
mode of operation and other is boost mode. In
traditional mode of operation traditional
PWM is generated, while in boost mode of
operation some part of traditional zero state is
converted into shoot-through state.
In this, Vdc and inductor L are used for

inverter boost operation and this voltage boost
is equal to traditional CSI. Alternatively for
buck operation open circuit tate should be
connected in the switching sequence referring
to SX and SX (X=A, B or C)Switching OFF
simultaneously, meanwhile SW turns ON
toset the effective dc-link voltage. The
voltage-buck
(current-boost) ratio equals to the traditional
current type Z-Source inverter.
Fully shunt embedded Z
(FSEZ)- Source inverter: In FSEZ-Source
inverter,an equal voltage dc source is placed
instead of a capacitor C 1 in the shunt leg.
Voltage boost and buck capability are same in
both FSEZ and PSEZ.The current ratio of L 1
and L 2 are reduced due toequal DC-link
currents of L1 and L 2. But huge circulating
currents between inductor and source
are occurred and reduce output voltage
amplitude due to unequal input of two dc
voltage sources are considered. So to avoid
this, small rated capacitor is placed in series
with one dc source to share the voltage
difference. This current type SEZSource
inverter is not an ideal choice for substituting
traditional Z-Source inverter but easily
smoothen source current.

58
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
6.CONCLUSION
The partially parallel embedded Z-Source
inverter with reduced switches reduces
number of PV panels and wind power;
Capacitor rating smoothens source current and
also reduces total harmonic distortion. PPEZSource inverter makes system compact which
reduces cost and switching losses, lower
voltage stresses and line harmonics. The two
main objectives for WECSs are extracting
maximum power from wind and feeding the
grid with high-quality electricity. Compared
to conventional WECS with simple boost
converter based Z-Source inverter method, the
voltage profile is improved 35% by using
maximum constant boost with third harmonic
injection based Z-source inverter method.
REFERENCE
The E Z-source inverter can be operated in

both boosts and buck operations depending on
values of M. If M is greater than 0.5 it acts
as boost inverter, if M is less than 0.5 then it
acts as buck inverter. Here a 3-phase RLC
parallel load is connected to ZSI.
[1]Miao Zhu, Member, IEEE, Kun Yu, Student Member,

IEEE, and Fang Lin Luo, Senior Member, IEEE,
Switched Inductor ZSource Inverter. IEEE Trans. Power Electron, VOL. 25,
No. 8, August 2010.
[2]Miao Zhu, Member, IEEE, Kun Yu, Student Member,
IEEE, and Fang Lin Luo, Senior Member, IEEE,
Switched Inductor Z-Source Inverter. IEEE Trans.
Power Electron, VOL.25, No. 8, August 2010.
[3]S.Kamalakkannan, S.Deve Gowda, Digital simulation
of renewableEnergy Source Controlled EZ-Source
inverter system, 2012 IEEE.
[4] J. Li, J. Liu, and Z. Liu, Loss Oriented Evaluation
and Comparison of Z-Source Inverters Using Different
Pulse Width Modulation Strategies, in 2009 IEEE
Applied Power Electronics Conference and Exposition.
[5] F.Z. Peng, M. Shen, and Z. Qiang, Maximum Boost
Control of the Z-Source Inverter, IEEE Transactions on
Power Electronics, vol. 20no.4, pp. 833-838, July 2004.
[6] P.C. Loh, D.M. Vilathgamuwa, Y.S. Lai, G.T.
Chua, and Y. Li, Pulse-Width Modulation of ZSource Inverter, in Conf. Rec. 2004 IEEE Industry
Applications Conferences, pp. 148-155
[7] FZ. Peng, "Z-source inverter", IEEE Transactions
on Industry Applications, vol. 39, pp. 504-510, MarApr 2003.
[8] J. B. Liu, J. G. Hu, and L. Y Xu, "A modified space
vector PWM for z-source inverter - Modeling and
design," ICEMS 2005, in Proceedings of the Eighth
International Conference on Electrical Machines and
Systems, Vols 1-3, pp. 1242-1247, 200
The 3-phase output voltage across load is

shown

59
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
RSVP PROTOCOL USED IN REAL TIME

APPLICATION NETWORKS
Dr.S.Ravi1, A.Ramasubba Reddy 2 and Dr.V.Jeyalakshmi3
2
PG Student- M.Tech. VLSI and Embedded System

1, 3
Professor
Rama.annareddy@gmail.com
fixed network has been facing a great challenge due

to the participation of mobile hosts.
Abstract
RSVP is a receiver oriented reservation
protocol being an Internet standard approved by
Internet Engineering Task Force [IETF].The goal of the
Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) is to establish
Quality of Service information within routers and host
computers of the Internet. High speed networks support
use of dedicated resources through Resource
Reservation Protocol (RSVP). With RSVP, the network
resources are reserved and released there by providing
a mechanism to achieve a good quality of service (QoS).
This requests to reserve a path are transmitted in the
network b/w the data senders and receivers. This paper
provides an analysis of the RSVP protocol used in peerto-peer networks where each system works
simultaneously
as
client
and
server.
This
experimentation for Audio and video conferencing
application in various scenarios implemented in
OPNET software. This RSVP protocol reduces the
packet end-to-end delay.
An inter network[2] is a collection of

individual networks, connected by intermediate
networking devices, that functions as a single large
network. Internetworking refers to the industry,
products, and procedures that meet the challenge of
creating and administering internetworks. Fig:1
illustrates some different kinds of network
technologies that can be interconnected by routers
and other networking devices to create an
internetwork. Implementing a functional internetwork
is no simple task.
In this paper, we perform a comparative
analysis of the working of RSVP protocol in
conjunction with multimedia applications including
audio and video conferencing. We use a peer-to-peer
based network in which each system acts as a client
and a server. The reservation messages are generated
by the hosts and depending upon the flow of data,
some of the requests are accepted. Consequent to the
reservation of network bandwidth, the network
performance of the considered application improves.
For the analysis of RSVP protocol, we use the
metrics of the RSVP control traffic generated and the
packet end-to-end delay. Our simulation has been
performed using the OPNET IT Guru Academic
Edition v 9.1 (OPNET, 2011).
KEY WORDS: - RSVP, QoS, OPNET.
I. INTRODUCTION
Resource ReSerVation Protocol (RSVP) is a
receiver oriented resource reservation setup protocol
designed for Integrated Services Internet. RSVP has a
number of attributes that make it be adopted as an
Internet standard approved by Internet Engineering
Task Force (IETF) [1]. These attributes include
scalability, robustness, flexibility, dynamic group
membership, and stability for multi cast sessions,
support for heterogeneous receivers, and varieties of
reservation styles. However, the RSVP designed for

60
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the desired QoS in terms of a service class, which

comprises a Reservation Specification (RSpec), and a
Traffic Specification (TSpec). A RSpec defines the
reservation characteristics (i.e. the desired QoS) of
the flow, for example, the service rate the application
requests. A TSpec defines the traffic characteristics
of the flow, for example, the peak data rate. RSVP
uses several messages in order to create, maintain and
release state information for a session between one or
more senders and one or more receivers as shown in
Figure 2.
Path Setup: In RSVP, reservation requests travel

from receivers to the senders. Thus they flow in the
opposite direction to the user data flow for which
such reservations are being requested. Path messages
are used by the sender to set up a route to be followed
by the reservation requests.
Figure 1: Internetwork using different Network

Technologies
Using RSVP, the request to reserve the
resources is generated by a host in the form of a
message and sent to another receiver host that in turn
responds with another message. When a router
receives the message, it may decide to reserve the
resources and communicate to other routers in order
to effectively handle the packets. The reservation of
the resources such as communication bandwidth for a
data flow ensures efficient delivery of data for that
particular data flow thereby improving the
performance of the running application.
Path Error: A node that detects an error in a Path

message, generates and sends a PathErr message
upstream towards the sender that created the error.
Path Release: RSVP tear down messages are

intended to speed up the removal of path and
reservation state information from the nodes.
Setup: Resv messages carry

reservation requests (e.g. for bandwidth and buffers)
used to set up reservation state information in the
nodes of the route established by the path set-up
message. They travel upstream from the receiver(s)
to the sender [4].
Reservation
II. RESOURCE RESERVATION PROTOCOL

OVERVIEW
The Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP)
is a Transport Layer protocol designed to reserve
resources across a network for an integrated services
Internet. RSVP operates over an IPv4 or IPv6
Internet Layer and provides receiver initiated setup of
resource reservations for multicast or unicast data
flows with scaling and robustness. It does not
transport application data but is similar to a control
protocol, like Internet Control Message Protocol
(ICMP) or Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP). RSVP is described in RFC 2205. RSVP can
be used by either hosts or routers to request or deliver
specific levels of quality of service (QoS) for
application data streams or flows. RSVP defines how
applications place reservations and how they can
relinquish the reserved resources once the need for
them has ended.
RSVP reservation requests are defined in
terms of a filter specification (filter spec) and a flow
specification (flow spec) [3]. A filter spec is used to
identify the data flow that is to receive the QoS
specified in a flow specification. A flow spec defines
Figure: 2 RSVP messages.

Reservation Refresh: A reservation refresh is the
result of either a reservation state refresh timeout or a
receiver request to modify the reservation. Like path
states, reservation states need to be refreshed.
Reservation Release: ResvTear messages travel

from the receiver(s) to the sender and remove any

61
www.iaetsd.in
reservation state information associated with the

receivers data flow.
congestion. Some of the characteristics that qualify a

Quality of Service are:
Reservation Error: If a node detects an error in a

Resv message, it sends a ResvErr message
downstream to the receiver that generated the failed
Resv message. Processing ResvErr messages does
not result in the removal of any reservation state.
I.
Reservation Confirmation: Optionally, a receiver

may ask for confirmation of its reservation. A
ResvConf message is used to notify the receiver that
the reservation request was successful. In the
simplest case, a ResvConf message is generated by
the sender.
Minimizing delivery delay.

Minimizing delay variations.
Providing consistent data
capacity.
throughput
PRESENT WORK
The objective of this experimentation is to

do the Resource ReSerVation protocol (RSVP) as a
part of Integrated Services approach to providing
Quality of Service (QoS) to individual applications or
flows.
Two approaches have been developed to
provide a range of QoS. These are Integrated Service
and Differentiated Services. The RSVP follows the
Integrated Service approach , where QoS is provided
to individual applications or flows. The differentiated
Services approach provides QoS to large classes of
data or aggregated traffic.
Before doing of RSVP protocol, first we
have to do Queuing network of tat application.
Queuing schemes [9] provide predictable
network service by providing dedicated Band width,
controlled jitter, and latency and improved packet
loss characteristics. Each of following schemes
require customized configuration of output interface
queues. Queuing schemes are
First In First Out(FIFO)
Priority Queuing (PQ)
Custom Queuing(CQ)
Weighted Fair Queuing(WFQ)
In this application we have used only
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ). These Queuing
model diagram of RSVP is shown Fig 3.
In order to evaluate the performance of the
RSVP protocol, we used two different logical
scenarios in OPNET IT Guru Academic Edition
Software. Both the scenarios contain hosts
(workstations) together with routers using the Open
Shortest Path First (OSPF) (IETF, 1998-b) routing
protocol. The two applications considered for
experimentation are audio and video conferencing
with single application running at a time in a physical
scenario. Each physical scenario is further duplicated
to represent scenario with and without RSVP based
communication.
Router1 and Router2 are the nodes which
presents the two branches of organizations. Here in
this scenario, users of these two branches are
communication each other. Those users are provided
with VOIP,FTP and VEDIO applications. Router1
contains three users and Router2 contains two users
Design goals of RSVP are [5]
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Accommodate heterogeneous receivers.

Adapt to changing multicast group
membership.
Allow receivers to switch channels.
Adapt to changes in the underlying multicast
and unicast routes.
Exploit resource needs different applications
in order to use network resources efficiently.
Make the design modular to accommodate
heterogeneous underlying technologies.
Control protocol overhead so that it doesnt
grow linearly (or worse) with the number of
participants.
Types of Real Time Applications

Real-time communication, which generally
means audio and/or video, may be divided into
playback applications and interactive applications.
For interactive applications, the end-to-end delay is
significant, e.g. for internet phone it should rather not
exceed 0.3s[6][7]. For playback application, where
the communication is only in one direction, delay as
such is not critical, but jitter may be[8] classifies realtime applications into rigid and adaptive applications.
Rigid applications have a fixed playback point.
Adaptive applications move the playback point so
that the signal is replayed as soon as possible while
the data loss rate is acceptable. Thus, adaptive
playback applications work well on moderately
loaded datagram networks. The bandwidth
requirement may not be fixed, but some "rateadaptive" playback applications may change their
coding scheme according to network service
available.
Quality of Service means providing consistent,
predictable data delivery service during periods of

62
www.iaetsd.in
along with one server. This server uses to save the

data and this can be used by both router1 users and
router2 users for storing the data. Here data travelling
along the network is also stored n this FTP server
temporarily still the data reaches the destination, so
this will be helpful when there is data loss during the
transformation and the nodes can be retrieve plays
main role in configuration process and providing the
application and maintaining the quality of the
network.
Following the network layer of scenario2. In
this scenario we have to add another two hosts or
work stations, these are VOIP_RSVP server caller,
VOIP_RSVP server called. These VOIP_RSVP
server caller is connecting with west router and same
as VOIP_RSVP server called is connected with the
east router.
The voice application uses the G.711
transmission between peers, whereas the video
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
conferencing application transmits 10 frames per

second with each frame containing 128*120 pixels.
We use the shared explicit mode of reservation style
that allows multiple senders to share the same
reservation. The flow specification is set to 50,000
bytes/sec and buffer size is 10,000 bytes, whereas
75% is allowed as the reservable bandwidth at each
router and host. As shown in Fig. 3, the (logical)
scenario 1 contains two hosts, both of them are
workstations acting as peers since they transmit and
receive data simultaneously. The hosts are connected
using a core network of routers. These routers are of
type ethernet4_slip8_gtwy_adv and are interconnected following the mesh topology.
As shown in Fig. 4, the (logical) scenario 2
contains hosts, all of them are workstations acting as
peers. In contrast to scenario 1.
Figure: 3 Queuing model network scenario 1
Figure: 4 RSVP model network scenario 2

63
www.iaetsd.in
III. SIMULATION AND RESULTS
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Packet Delay Variation is the variance

among end-to-end delays for voice packets received
by this node.
Packet End-to-End Delay for a voice packet
is measured from the time it is created to the time it is
received. And Fig 6 and 7 are the voice packet end to
end delay of RSVP and voice packet delay variation.
Following are the graphs of traffic received

and sent in the both scenario 1 and scenario 2. These
two traffics must be same for any network to be more
efficient. See the Fg:5 for Queuing results are video
conferencing traffic received(bytes/sec), voice packet
delay variation, and voice packet end to end delay
(sec).
Figure:6 Time average in voice calling party, packet

end to end delay of RSVP
Figure: 5 Queuing model of RSVP i.e voice packet

delay, voice packet end to end delay.
Figure: 7 voice packet delay variation

64
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[6] Jan Lucenius , Research Scientist VTT

Information Technology The Application
Of RSVP.
IV. CONCLUSION
This paper presents a performance analysis
of the RSVP protocol. We simulate two logical
scenarios while incorporating the voice and the video
applications. The scenarios differ in the number of
hosts among which the communication takes place.
We use the peer-to-peer model for network
communication. The RSVP protocol is evaluated in
terms of the metrics of the control traffic sent and the
packet end-to-end delay.
Both for the voice application and video
application, a large number of RSVP control traffic is
sent only if the amount of data being transmitted
conforms to the flow specification given for RSVP.
For scenarios with small number of hosts, a large
amount of data meets the requirement, thereby
generating a large amount of RSVP control traffic.
RSVP therefore reserves the resources and allows
dedicated communication. Consequently, the
communication performance improves as the packet
end-to-end delay decreases. In contrast, for scenarios
with large amount of data, the RSVP protocol is
unable to perform well and the delay increases for
voice application.
[7] Schwantag, Ursula: An Analysis Of The

Applicability Of RSVP. Diploma Thesis.
University Of Oregon And University Of
Karlsruhe. June 1997.
[8] R. Braden, D. Clark, And S. Shenker
Integratedservices
In
The
Internet
Architecture: An Overview.Request For
Comments (Informational) RFC 1633,
[9] Internet Engineering Task Force, June 1994
Salil Bhalla, Kulwinder Singh Monga,Rahul
Malhotra Optimization Of
Computer
Networks Using Qos.
REFERENCES
[1] M. A. Khan, G. A. Mallah* And A. Karim
Analysis Of Resource Reservation
Protocol (Rsvp) For P2p Networks.
[2] Vikas Gupta1, Baldev Raj2 Optimization
Of Real-Time Application Network Using
RSVP ISSN: 22316612 Oct. 2013
[3] Braden R., Et Al. Resource Reservation
Protocol (RSVP) -- Version 1: Functional
Specification. RFC 2205, IETF, September,
1997.
[4] Mara E. Villapol , Jonathan Billington A
Coloured Petri Net Approach To
Formalising And Analysing The Resource
Reservation Protocol
[5] Lixxia Zhang, Stephen Derring, Deborah
Estrin, Scott Shenkar, And Daniel Zappala
RSVP: A New Resource Reservation
Protocol IEEE Sep 1993.

65
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
VERSATILE BICYCLE
(AN AMPHIBIOUS VEHICLE)
-Shyam.C,
IV yr, Mechanical Department,
ID no: VM6446,
Veltech Multitech Engineering College
Mob:9962685946 E-Mail: shyamfeb1993@gmail.com
-Saravana Muthu.K,
ID no: VM6484,
Mob:9962096121 E-Mail: saravank19@gmail.com
-Santhosh.P,
ID no: VM6431,
Mob:7708577673 E-Mail: santhoshpalani94@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
OBJECTIVE OF OUR PROJECT
A versatile bicycle that runs both on land

and water is to be designed and fabricated. Usually
bicycle is designed to run on land. But our vehicle is
more versatile. We have used high density thermocol
blocks to create buoyancy force that makes the cycle
float on water. The thermocol blocks are attached to
the L- clamps. For the movement in water ,we have
fixed paddles to the rear of the cycle that is connected
to the rear wheel sprocket through chain drive. While
riding on land, the L-clamp can be easily folded and
locked. If necessary the thermocol blocks can be
detached from L-clamp. Its useful is crossing back
waters, lakes etc., can be used in flood days and also
as water sport. Our project deals with solving the real
time problems faced by people in India.
The main objective of our project is to modify a

normal bicycle so that, it can be used both on land
and water. We make sure that the modifications do
not cause any unease to the rider and the comfort of
riding on land is not reduced.

66
www.iaetsd.in
VERSATILE BICYCLE BOTH IN WATER AND

LAND MODE
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
MATERIALS USED
Material
Bicycle
Thermocol
Specifications
No.
density of 20
kg/m3 ,200 mm
thickness
M.S.Sheet
M.S.Sheet
M.S.Sheet
Iron rod
3mm thickness
6 mm thickness
1 mm thickness
Tempered,
6mm dia
Standard
Standard
Standard
Single
side
threaded
Double
side
threaded
Lorry hinges
Chain drive
Sprocket
Hub
Hub
4
4
2
2
1
1
THERMOCOL
Versatile bicycle in swimming pool
Thermocol is one of the major raw materials of our

project. We use 4 blocks of thermocol to create
buoyancy force that makes the cycle to float in
water.We have cut the thermocol blocks in
aerodynamics shape to provide better displacement in
water.
THE L - CLAMPS
The L-clamps are
re made of mild steel of thickness
3mm and 6 mm. The clamp is foldable and can be
folded while operating the bicycle on the land. The
folding is done by fixing hinges. The thermocol
blocks can be fitted and locked by using bold and
nuts. The thermocol can be attached or detached
detache
according to the riders wish. The supporting rod
should be fitted while moving in water.
Versatile bicycle on land

67
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
PROPERTIES OF MILD STEEL

(for L-Clamps
Clamps , adjusting plate , paddles)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Possess good ductility and can be bent

easily.
Possess good machinability.
Has good tensile strength.
Possess excellent weld ability.
Good toughness and hardness.
PROPERTIES OF TEMPERED STEEL

(used for supporting rods)
3-D MODEL OF VERSATILE BICYCLE
1. Very high tensile strength.

2. Excellent toughness and hardness.
3. Ductility is reduced.
4. Machinability is reduced.
PADDLES
The paddle is used to give displacement in water. Its
made of sheet metal of 1 mm thickness. The paddles
are nothing but blades that rotate by peddling action.
The paddle blades are welded to a hollow pipe which
is welded to a hub.
ub. The hub is welded with the
sprocket and chain drive connects the paddle sprocket
with the rear double threaded hub sprocket. Thus the
paddle rotate by the chain drive power transmission.
There are 6 blades in total which acts as paddle in the
versatile bicycle.
3-D MODEL OF L-CLAMPS

CLAMPS
EXPERIMENTAL DETAILS
Average speed in water : 4 to 5 km/hr
Average speed on land : 15 to 20 km/hr
Time for fitting the
thermocol blocks
3-D MODEL OF PADDLES
: 2 to 3 mins
Time for dismantling

the thermocol blocks
: 1 to 2 mins
PADDLES IN VERSATILE BICYCLE

68
www.iaetsd.in
BUOYANCY FORCE
WORKING OF VERSATILE BICYCLE
Buoyancy is an upward force exerted by a fluid that

opposes the weight of an immersed object. In a
column of fluid, pressure increases with depth as a
result of the weight of the overlying fluid. Thus a
column of fluid, or an object submerged in the fluid,
experiences greater pressure at the bottom of the
column than at the top. This difference in pressure
results in a net force that tends to accelerate an object
upwards. The magnitude of that force is proportional
to the difference in the pressure between the top and
the bottom of the column, and is also equivalent to
the weight of the fluid that would otherwise occupy
the column, i.e. the displaced fluid. For this reason,
an object whose density is greater than that of the
fluid in which it is submerged tends to sink. If the
object is either less dense than the liquid or is shaped
appropriately (as in a boat), the force can keep the
object afloat. This can occur only in a reference
frame which either has a gravitational field or is
accelerating due to a force other than gravity defining
a "downward" direction. In a situation of fluid statics,
the net upward buoyancy force is equal to the
magnitude of the weight of fluid displaced by the
body.
In versatile bicycle, we have used thermocol blocks

to create buoyancy force.There are 4 blocks of even
volume to give balance in the water .The thermocols
are attachable and detachable in the L-clamps and the
L-clamps itself is foldable.
The movement in the water is given through paddles
that are fixed to back of the versatile bicycle. These
paddles are connected to the rear wheel of the bicycle
through chain drive. Double threaded hub has been
used to put on two sprockets .In one sprocket, the
normal chain is connected to the pedals and in
another sprocket, the chain drive that rotate the
paddles are connected. Thus, the movement is given.
These paddles can be adjusted according to the
weight of the rider when inside the water. There is an
adjustable rod that increases or decreases the altitude
of the position of the paddles. The paddles should be
half inside and half outside the water to maximum
displacement.
ADVANTAGES
BICYCLE
PROPERTIES
OF
EXPANDED
POLYSTYRENE (THERMOCOL)
Typical Properties:
Density Range
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
15-30
Kg/m
0.028Thermal conductivity at 0.031 K

10 mean temperature
cal m/hr.
mc
Compressive Strength
0.8-1.6
Kg/cm
Cross breaking Strength
1.4-2.0
Kg/cm
Tensile Strength
3-6 kg/cm
Application Range
-200 +80
deg C
Water absorption by %
Volume for 7 days in 0.5%
water
Self ignition point
300 C
Melting Range
100-200C
OF
VERSATILE
Single vehicle is used instead of two

vehicles while crossing water bodies.
Reasonable speed on water is achieved.
No major unease or discomfort to rider

while riding on land.
The thermocol blocks are detachable, hence

weight is reduced while riding on land.
There is no sucking of water by thermocol

as its of high density quality.
In overall , the vehicle is very robust and can

be used in any conditions.
As the vehicle is cycle, its pollution free and

environmental friendly.
No extra fuel or energy required.
As the factor of safety given is 2, the

chances of drowning is zero.

69
www.iaetsd.in
Required surface area = 51020/20 = 2551 cm2.
DESIGN CALCULATIONS
Density of water
Density of thermocol
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The thermocol blocks

locks are cut in aerodynamic
shape as per design requirement shown (surface
are > 2551 cm2) in fig
1 g/cm3
= 20 kg/m3 =>
0.02g/cm3
Final dimensions of the thermocol block

Density of thermocol > density of water
Thus thermocol floats in water.
Material
Weight
Bicycle
25 kg
Rider
75 kgs
Total
100 kgs (app. mass)
Applied load = 100 x 9.8 Newtons = 980

Newtons
Required factor of safety is 2.
Factor of safety = allowable load/applied load
The dimensions are chosen to get the required

surface area, thus to satisfy the design.
2= allowable load / 100 x 9.8

Allowable load = 2 x 100 x 9.8 Newtons
Surface area = [(50 x 36)+(0.5

+(0.5 x (12+50) x 25 )]
Allowable mass = 200 kg or 200000

0000 grams
= 2575 cm2 (> 2551 cm2)
1 cm3 of thermocol can bear (1- 0.02) grams of

mass.
Volume of 1 block = 2575 x 20

= 51500 cm3 (> 51020 cm3)
= 0.98 grams of mass

Thus the design of thermocol blocks are
satisfied.
So for bearing 200000 grams of mass , we need

200000/0.98 cm3 of thermocol.
= 204081 cm3 of thermocol required.
No. of blocks needed = 4
So , volume of 1 block = 204081/4 = 51020 cm3.
Standard thickness of thermocol blocks = 20 cm
Volume of 1 thermocol block = surface area x
thickness
51020 = required surface area x 20

70
www.iaetsd.in
TEST DRIVE IN WATER
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
APPLICATIONS
BICYCLE
OF
VERSATILE
Used to cross rivers, ponds, lakes in villages.
Can be used as main mode of transport in

states like Kerala, Goa etc. where crossing
of back waters is very much necessary task.
Can be used in flood prone states like Bihar,

West Bengal, Orissa etc. as a medium of
transport for evacuation process.
Can be used as a medium of transport in

areas
like
Velachery,
Madipakkam,
Adambakkam, Korattur, Annanur etc. where

short term flooding occurs during monsoon
season.
Can be used as a water sport in tourist spots

like Ooty, Kodaikanal etc. along with
boating.
TEST DRIVE IN LAND
Can be used for small scale fishing process

in lakes and ponds.
Can be used by children for having fun in

water ride and also serves as normal bicycle.
LIMITATIONS
BICYCLE
OF
VERSATILE
Though the versatile bicycle reaches a

reasonable speed in water, its lower than hitech amphibious vehicles that runs on fuel.
The stylish shape of the bicycle is slightly

altered.
Doubles cannot be ridden in versatile

bicycle as the clamps are fixed.

71
www.iaetsd.in
COST OF FABRICATION
S.NO
COMPONENTS
COST
BICYCLE
2000
THERMOOL
1000
M.S.SHEET
1000
MISCELLENEOUS
(HUBS,SPROCKETS,CHAINS
ETC)
1000
FABRICATION
(LABOR,TRANSPORTATIONS
ETC)
2000
TOTAL
7000
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
To improve the aesthetics of the bicycle to

make it more marketable.
To use aluminum hollow pipes instead of

mild steel to decrease the weight.
To increase the velocity of the bicycle in

water.
To improve the aesthetics and ergonomics of

the versatile bicycle.
REFERENCE BOOKS
An Introduction To Fluid Dynamics by Bachelor
Fluid mechanics by R.K.Bansal
COMMERCIALIZATION
PRODUCT
OF
OUR
Engineering Mechanics by Koteeshwaran
Our product has not yet hit the market so far. So it

will be a brand new innovation .It has a great
potential market in states like Kerala, Goa where
crossing of back water is a unavoidable test , in flood
prone states like Bihar, Orissa, West Bengal, Tamil
Nadu etc, Once it is launches in market, our product
will become a basic need in each and every house. As
our product has a lot of major applications, it has a
great potential to be commercialized in the market
successfully
FUTURE
DEVELOPMENTS
VERSATILE BICYCLE
ACHIEVEMENTS
BICYCLE SO FAR
OF
VERSATILE
II place in ICTACT young innovator

award,2014
III place in CII innovator award,2014
Applied for patent successfully.
IN
To replace the thermocol material with

welded sheet metal of that shape.
Making the whole L-clamp

detachable and attachable.
To replace the paddles with propellers for

giving high displacement in water.
To give rust preventive coating for the rust

prone areas like frame, chain, sprockets of
bicycle.
easily

72
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
DATABASE INTRUSION DETECTION USING

ROLE BASED ACCESS CONTROL
SYSTEM
Mrs. ANTONY VIGIL
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR
SRM UNIVERSITY
MRINALINI SHRIDHAR
STUDENT
SRM UNIVERSITY
R OVIYA
STUDENT
SRM UNIVERSITY
used to protect the data and the system. Amending all

the above methods, newer methods have come up to
protect the same for daily operations and decision
making in organizations. Database is a group or
collection of data's which may contain valuable and
sensitive information about the institution and
organization, which is accessed by the people of the
organization internally and externally every day.
Any leak of information in these systems
will devastate the whole database system and the
data's, leading to a great loss. Hence the data need to
be protected and secured. The recent models of
protection of DBMS were the dynamic threshold
method and the data mining method of Intrusion
detection system. Intrusion detection method is a
process which analyses the unauthorized access and
malicious behaviors and finds intrusion behaviors
and attempts by detecting the state and activity of an
operating system to provide an effective means for
intrusion defend. In this paper, we will see how
RBAC will help us to protect the database along with
the intrusion detection with limited rules.
RBAC- Role based access control, also
known as role based security is a method to restrict
access of just one user, and also many users
depending on the role of the users. The roles are
prioritized like Example: Administrators access
sensitive attributes and the DBMS and its attributes
can be used. RBAC is a rich technology for
authentication privileges and controlling the access of
the information and data. It makes the administration
of the security (work) much easier and simpler,
though the process may be tedious and little vast. The
possibility of adding newer application inside the
secured system is much easier with the different
access control mechanism. Extracting the data from
the protected information system is much easier only
by an authorized person. Talking about the sensitivity
of the attributes we will have to refine the audit log
to extract the data attributes.
In the past few years computer crime and
security survey conducted by the Computer Security
Institute(CSI) have seen a lot of drastic improvement
ABSTRACT- In this paper, we propose a different

approach for the database intrusion detection
(IDS). Database Management (DBMS)
has
become a key criteria in the information system
(IS) storing valuable information of the system.
We are urged to protect it to the fullest without
losing any bit of information. Intrusion detection,
which gathers and analyses the information
system was one of the methods which protects the
database the fullest with all sorts of rules. In this
paper, we move into the Role based Access
Control (RBAC) system which controls the
administered databases for finding out sensitive
attributes of the system dynamically. Role based
Access Control is a method to restrict system
access by authorized and unauthorized people
directly. The access is based on the roles of the
individual users within the organization.
Important roles like administrator, access
sensitive attributes and if their audit logs are
mined, then some useful information regarding
the attributes can be used. This will help to decide
the sensitivity of the attributes. Since the models
of the database intrusion detection has proposed a
lot of rules , it is time to change the system to
protect it more evidently with less rules and
regulations which would be useful for detecting all
sorts of transactions.
Keywords: Database intrusion detection, Role
based access control system, Administered
database, Audit logs, Sensitive and attributes.
1.INTRODUCTION
In past years, Database Management System
(DBMS) have become an indispensible part of the
life of the organizers and the users using it. Hence it
was the primary priority to safeguard the DBMS, no
matter how easy or difficult it was. The motive of the
researches was first based on these ideas of
protecting the DBMS and to prevent the leakage of
data. The past years, Authentication user privileges ,
Auditing, Encryption and lots of methods have been

73
www.iaetsd.in
in both the aspects ,but only thing was that there need
to be a lot of adjustments in the rules given by each
model. We are in the scoop of improving the
database system and protecting it. In 2005, about
45% of the inquired entities have reported increased
unauthorized access to information due to the poor
system management. In 2007, financial application
fraud was the leading cause and found it double as
compared to the previous year also 59% of the
respondents outlined insider abuse as the security
problem. In 2013, survey the number has dropped
down and the security was much more than the past
few years. The statistics being, the percentage threats
due to insiders has been dropped to 20% and the
financial fraud which was a cause before were
eliminated in the upcoming years. Now only 10-20%
are reported as unauthorized users. This shows that
the database security has been improving day to day
and researches have been conducted every time a
model is proposed before implementing to action.
USERS
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
TASK /JOB
ACCESS
CONSTRAINTS
SESSIONS
FIG 1. MODEL OF RBAC
3.RELATED WORKS
RBAC supports three well known principles and
hence we work out our plan in 3 steps:
1. Principle of minimal authority
2. Divide and rule method of duties
3. Data abstraction
2.ROLE BASED ACCESS CONTROL MODEL

The Role based access control model
proposes 3 relationships between the attributes given.
They are:
a) USER-JOB: Which defines the relationship
between the user and the task defined in that system.
b) JOB-ACCESS: Which defines the relationship
between the job or the task of the person and the
access to that particular work.
c) JOB-JOB: Which defines the job to job
relationship between the users.
Now defining each attribute of the model we
have the users of an organization represents an
organizer or an agent of that field. The task or the job
represents the responsibility or the functioning of the
user within the organization. The access represents
the approval or a permission to that particular task or
event of that organization. The sessions box
represents the overall relationship between the user
and the task the contribution both has in the RBAC
model. It does not point towards the access field as
the access field is directed only by the task the user
performs. Constraints represent the limitations or the
boundary of each entity of that data that is, the user,
task or job, access as well as the relationship between
them is also restricted. The sessions represent the
Divide and rule mechanism of the RBAC model. The
fig 2 and 1 are interlinked process and each step of
the data flow diagram will implement the following
attributes of the user.
User
Data secured
Principle of minimal authority

Authorization access
Divide and rule method
Data abstraction
Data
FIG 2. DATA FLOW DIAGRAM
The sensitivity of an attribute is based on
the database application. We have to divide the
attributes into 3 divisions so as to protect the
attributes according to the sensitivity or the position
order they hold. Sensitivity refers to the position
order a data has to be protected. If the data are least
sensitive we can give it minimal protection. If the
data are highly sensitive in the attribute set we need

74
www.iaetsd.in
to protect it to the fullest. In some schematics we are

not able to tell whether the data is sensitive or not. To
give a clear picture of the attributes we have taken
the Student Database Schema.
TABLE 1.TEACHER'S SALARY
SCHEMA
NAME*
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
STAFF ID*
ADDRESS*
DATABASE
STAFF
TABLE NAME
ATTRIBUTE NAME
GETS
Name [i], Staff-id [j], Address
[d], Phone no [a]
STAFF
ACCOUNT
SALARY TYPE
ACCOUNTS
Administrator
ACCOUNT
Account-id [b], Staff-id [c],

Status [g], Month [e], Year [f],
Amount [h]
Salary-type [k], LOP and
Deductions [l]
ACC ID*
TABLE 2. TYPES OF SENSITIVE ATTRIBUTES

SENSITIVITY
ATTRIBUTE
Light
sensitivity
a, b, c, d, i, ,j ,k
Medium
sensitivity
e, f
II
High sensitivity
g, h, l
III
AMT DEPOSIT***
STATUS**
FIG 3.RBAC MODEL USING E-R MODEL
WEIGHTS
a) Principal of minimal authority- Also known as
the principle of least privilege means that the access
to the information system or its resources for only its
own legitimate purpose by every user or the module.
In simple words, we can say that an authorized user
can access that information system or the resource
only for their own privileged purpose. Privileged/
Authority refers to the right a user has or granting
access to the user to use a particular system. For
example, the user defined in its domain can access
only its domain and its attributes. The person
accessing a bank account can go through only their
bank procedures and account. The system does not
access or grant permission to access other accounts.
Similarly an admin user accessing a computer can go
into only the admin user account all other password
accounts are blocked for the admin user.
b)Divide and rule method of duties- it can also be
termed as the separation of duties among the users. It
helps the task to be completed faster. A mutual
exclusive role is achieved to complete a particular set
of task. RBAC brings this advantage of time
management. the database is secured as well as the
data are given to the authorized people easily with
security.
c)Data abstraction- Data abstraction is a simple
concept of accessing the data whenever we want to
but with the permission of authorized people. It has
different modes to it.
The sensitivity of the attributes can also be

given by the entity-relationship model [E-R]. But
with relation to the RBAC model , an administrator is
required to control the database for its sensitivity. It
is a perception of the real world. It is the
diagrammatic representation of how the attributes are
considered. The * represents if the attributes are
sensitive or not. The model represents a collection of
entities or data's and the contribution to the system.
To maintain the account and the staff system we need
a main administrator. Hence the RBAC system
proposed in this E-R model .Thus E-R model is
modified as:
STAFF + ACCOUNT + SALARY TYPE =
ACCOUNTS ADMINISTRATOR

75
www.iaetsd.in
i)Public Mode- The access to the data by

any user of the domain, but limited to a particular
organization. This requires a common security where
only the users of the organization can access it.
ii)Private Mode- The access of the data is
limited only to the key user of that particular search
of interest. That is only the accountants can handle
the accounts of the organization and hence access to
that particular class is given only to that particular
user. A manager accessing the accounts of the
company will be denied from accessing it.
iii)Protected Mode- The user in that
particular domain and the senior user that is one or
maximum two users who has to write to access that
domain can access it with ease. Example only the
accountants and the chief of the company can check
the accounts of hat particular institution and make
changes in that. The others have no right to access
these without their permission. For the others the
domain remains in blocked state.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
a)Develop Plans- To make best use of RBAC we can

develop and plan for the RBAC system into best
work in an organization or for a project's security of
data. Example to extract the maximum security from
RBAC a development plan including a project, etc.
should be developed along with the deadline , budget
etc.
b)Compile- This step involves the collection and
putting together of all data , files , projects, etc. so as
to identify the level of security needed to implement
it. Sensitivity of the attributes should be determined
so as to segregate and compile the system to one to
provide the highest security possible.
c)Define Roles- As we have discussed that operation
of database system is first best used only by the key
user or the important user of that organizer or a
system. Hence assigning a particular role to that
person for the easy access of the software to access
the data with ease and implement any kind of proper
change within the system.
d)Analyze- this is a main step for any kind of system
to know and to formulate RBAC. This would bring
about the betterment of the system so that the next
stage of implementation would be easier to execute.
Any changes needed in the system should be done in
this stage so that no further disputes arise at the later
stage.
e)Integrate- Before any problem occurs in the system
like system failure, we need to transfer each
application's security system to a centralized security
system so as to provide a secured companywide
information access. this would be the last step of the
process and would be the final stage without making
any changes.
e)Implement- To put forth whatever we have
executed these many steps without any errors or any
types of problems. These are the best ways to protect
a data from the external user.
Thus refining the system and protecting it
according to the steps followed would give a better
result. Always the principle of divide and rule
method is followed in RBAC which is the key
principle of the system.
4. IMPLEMENTATION
RBAC is a complex system that involves a
strategic process prepared by an expertise. RBAC is
best implemented by applying a structured and
detailed procedure. The use of divide and rule
method is very essential to implement these process.
Each task or step is broken down into sub tasks for
the work and implementation to be easier and more
efficient. The steps involved are:
DEVELOP PLANS
COMPILE
DEFINE ROLES
5.PROCESS USING A FORMULAE

ANALYSE
Each datum is a process streamline flow of

information which is guarded by security. These
syntaxes along with the formula help in the security
purpose. This formula was implemented in the Web
Based technology, now it is time to implement it in
Database to ensure its safety.
INTERGRATE
IMPLEMENT
FIG 4.PROCESS

76
www.iaetsd.in
Syntax:
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
brackets represents that it is a secured data and hence

it is the start of the process and that the data must be
protected fully. Hence we cannot find the sensitivity
of the attribute at the mid stage of the process. The
same process with a change to denote the sensitivity
is represented as :
P=>0
no process
|P|P
composition of the process
| O(P).X output value of the process, X is the
outcome.
| I(P).Y
input value/ getting input from the
user of the process, Y is the input variable.
| !!I(P).Y repetition of the input variables.
P=>| {(staff)P | name(P).X | staff id(P).X |

phone(P).X} || {(account)P | account id(P).X |
AMOUNT DEPOSITED(P).X | STATUS(P).Y}
P=> run the process

| D(P)
main data or the attributes
| read(P)
read the data or the attributes
| change(P) change the data or the attributes
P=>enable(R).D
gives permission to R to
access a data
P=>disable(R)>D gives permission to R to
disable the data or remove or stop the process till R.
The other way is:

P1=>| (staff)P| name(P).X | staff id(P).X | phone(P).X
P2=>| (account)P | account id(P).X | AMOUNT
DEPOSITED(P).X|STATUS(P).Y
P=>| P1||P2
Thus this formula would be easy for the
generation of large sets of data and to secure the data
and hence even if there is a small change in the
capitalization or the attributes or the brackets or any
syntax mistake there would be an error generated in
the system which would spoil the whole set of data.
This is done for just a small set of data. We can
proceed this for a huge one. An outsider seeing this
would not understand the type of data or the
importance of the data and hence would hesitate to
meddle with it.
For the above E-R diagram of the process ,the

interaction between the staff salary and the account
we can create a formula based on the process.
P=>| {(staff)P | name(P).X | staff id(P).X |
phone(P).X} || {(account)P | account id(P).X |
amount deposited(P).X | status(P).Y}
The other way of representing it is to split the

process:
6.CONCLUSION
Intrusion detection mechanism helps to
secure the data in an organization. In this paper we
have discussed in detail how the database could be
secured by using Role Based Access Control System.
The key benefits of RBAC are high efficiency and
low maintenance cost for any type of organization be
it big or small. Also RBAC system could be designed
and used to improve the operational performance and
strategic business value. This system could
streamline and automate any business procedures,
thus providing high/ better/ faster benefits to the user.
It also helps to maintain privacy and confidentially of
the employees in any organization. Thus we can
conclude that mission to protect any key business
process is a main vision of RBAC system in database
intrusion detection.
P1=>| (staff)P| name(P).X | staff id(P).X | phone(P).X

P2=>| (account)P | account id(P).X | amount
deposited(P).X | status(P) .Y
P=>| P1||P2
Where staff and the account have no

sensitivity and hence it's just an attribute of the
system, where as the other attribute- name, staff id,
phone, account, account id, amount deposited are the
inputs and the output is the status.
The two processes can be divided and then
later combined to form a single equation. If the
process needs to be changed or read or any other kind
of operations, they can be done by the given formula
which would be useful for the later run.
To calculate the sensitivity or to know the
sensitivity of the attributes, automatic capitalization
would be invoked to represent the highest sensitive
attributes in the given set of data or the formula
generated at the end of the process typed. The least
sensitive are given in small letters. The medium
sensitive might be in italic letters. The ones inside

77
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
REFERENCES
[1] Intrusion detection database system with dynamic
threshold value By Khomlal sinha and Tripti Sharma
[2] Database Intrusion Detection using Weighted
Sequence Mining Abhinav Srivastava1, Shamik Sural1 and
A.K. Majumdar2
[3] J. Han, M. Kamber, Data Mining: Concepts and
Techniques, Morgan Kaufmann Publishers (2001).
[4] U. Fayyad, G. P. Shapiro, P. Smyth, The KDD Process
for Extracting Useful Knowledge from Volumes of Data,
Communications of the ACM, pp. 27-34 (1996).
[5] R. Bace, P. Mell, Intrusion Detection System, NIST
Special Publication on Intrusion Detection System (2001).
[6] A. Srivastava, S. Sural, A.K. Majumdar, Weighted
Intratransactional Rule Mining for Database Intrusion
Detection, Lecture Notes in Artificial Intelligence, Springer
Verlag, Proceedings of Pacific-Asia Conference in
Knowledge Discovery and Data Mining, pp. 611-620
(2006).
[7] W. Lee, S.J. Stolfo, Data Mining Approaches for
Intrusion Detection, Proceedings of the USENIX Security
Symposium, pp. 79-94 (1998).
[8] D. Barbara, J. Couto, S. Jajodia, N. Wu, ADAM: A
Testbed for Exploring the Use of Data Mining in Intrusion
Detection, ACM SIGMOD, pp. 15-24 (2001).
[7] C. Y. Chung, M. Gertz, K. Levitt, DEMIDS: A Misuse
Detection System for Database Systems, IFIP TC-11 WG
11.5 Working Conference on Integrity and Internal Control
in Information System, pp. 159-178 (1999).
[8] V.C.S. Lee, J.A. Stankovic, S.H. Son, Intrusion
Detection in Real-time Database Systems Via Time
Signatures, Real Time Technology and Application
Symposium, pp. 124 (2000).
[9] Intrusion detection database system with dynamic
threshold value By Khomlal sinha and Tripti Sharma
[10] Database Intrusion Detection using Weighted
Sequence Mining Abhinav Srivastava1, Shamik Sural1 and
A.K. Majumdar2
[11] S.Y. Lee, W.L. Low, P.Y. Wong, Learning
Fingerprints for a Database Intrusion Detection System,
Proceedings of the European Symposium on Research in
Computer Security,
pp. 264-280 (2002).

78
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
DETECTION OF ADDICTION OF AN INDIVIDUAL AND

AVOIDING ADDICTION USING EMBEDDED SYSTEMS
Dhivya.R,
Department of EEE,
Kongu Engineering College,
Perundurai.
divyarcvd@gmail.com
Mathivani.M,
Department of EEE,
Kongu Engineering College,
Perundurai.
mathivanimarimuthu@gmail.com
based
upon
are
The
Brainwaves and Addiction.
ABSTRACT:
Addiction is a chronic disease
causing disorder in the brain memory
and related circuits leading to
characteristic biological, psychological,
social and spiritual manifestations. This
is
reflected
in
an
individual
pathologically pursuing relief by
unrecommended substance use and other
behaviors. In the world, about 47% of
people are found to spend their waking
hours in thinking of matters apart from
their normal mind-set and about 80% of
the people are addicted to one more
addictive substances. In this paper we
are going to explain how addiction could
be avoided using an embedded device by
using the phenomenon of frequency
following response of the brain by
controlling brain waves.
Brain,
1.1.THE BRAIN:
Brain, an electrochemical organ
which functions as a coordinating centre
of sensation, nervous activity and
intelligence. At the root of all our
thoughts, emotions and behaviours is the
communication between neurons within
our brains. Brainwaves are produced by
synchronised electrical pulses from
masses of neurons communicating with
each other. The Brainwaves are
produced by the lobes of the brain and
they are,
Frontal lobe
Parietal lobe
Temporal lobe
Occipital lobe
Limbic lobe
Insular cortex
1.INTRODUCTION:
Before going on to details we
are supposed to know
the basic
terms.The basic terms that this paper is
Thus, temporal lobe processes

auditory information from the ears and
relates it to Wernicke's area of the

79
www.iaetsd.in
parietal lobe and the motor cortex of the

frontal lobe. The amygdale is located
within the temporal lobe and controls
social and sexual behavior and other
emotions. The limbic system is
important in emotional behavior and
controlling movements(Refer Fig 1.1).
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
frequencies are dominant when we feel

wired, or hyper-alert. Brainwave speed
is measured in Hertz (cycles per second)
and they are dived into bands deliniating
slow, moderate, and fast waves.
There are four categories of these
brainwaves, ranging from most activity
to least activity. These are (Refer Fig1.2)
Delta waves
Theta waves
Alpha waves
Beta waves.
Gamma waves
Delta waves are waves with high
amplitude. It has a frequency of 0.5 4
Hertz. They never go down to zero
because that would mean that you were
brain dead. But, deep dreamless sleep
would take you down to the lowest
frequency.
Typically, 2 to 3 Hertz. Theta waves
are waves with amplitude lesser than that
of delta waves and have a greater
frequency of 5 8 Hertz. A person who
has taken time off from a task and begins
to daydream is often in a theta
brainwave state.
Alpha waves are waves with
amplitude lesser than that of theta waves
and have a greater frequency of 9-14
Hertz. A person who takes time out to
reflect or meditate is usually in a alpha
state.
Beta waves are the waves that have
the lowest amplitude and have the
highest frequency of 15 40 Hertz.
These waves are again classified into
low beta waves and high beta waves
according to their range of frequencies.
Fig 1.1
Researchers have speculated that
a fully functional brain generates as
much as 10 watts of electrical
power.Other conservative investigators
calculated that the brain generates 50
milli volts. Although, the generated
power is limited in very specific ways it
occurs as a charateristics of the human
brain.
1.2.BRAINWAVES:
Electrical activity emanating from
the brain is displayed in the form of
brainwaves. It is important to know that
all humans display five different types of
electrical patterns or brain waves
across the cortex. Our brainwaves
change according to what were doing
and feeling. When slower brainwaves
are dominant we can feel tired, slow,
sluggish, or dreamy. The higher

80
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The low beta waves have a

frequency of 15 32 Hertz. A
person
making
an active
conversation would be in the low
beta state.
The high beta waves have a
frequency of 33 40 Hertz. A
person in a stress, pain or
addiction would be in the high
beta state.
Gamma waves are involved in higher
processing tasks as well as cognitive
functioning. They are important for
learning, memory and information
processing. It is thought that the 40 Hz
gamma wave is important for the
binding of our senses in regards to
perception and are involved in learning
new material. It has been found that
individuals who are mentally challenged
and have learning disabilities tend to
have lower gamma activity than average
S.No.
Brainwaves
Frequency range
(Hertz)
1)
Delta
0.5 4
2)
Theta
5-8
3)
Alpha
9 14
4)
Low Beta
15 32
5)
High Beta
32 40
6)
Gamma
40-100
Fig 1.2
1.2.1.ADDICTION:
There are two types of addiction:
Physical dependency
Psychological dependency.
Physical dependence can happen
with the chronic use of many drugs
including many prescription drugs even
if taken as instructed. Thus, physical
dependence in and of itself does not
constitute addiction, but it often
accompanies addiction.
In this paper, we are going to solely
consider the psychological addictions in
designing the addiction avoider device.
1.2.2.PSYCHOLOGICAL
DEPENDENCY:
A person becomes dependent on
something to help alleviate specific
emotions. Psychological dependence
begins after the first trial which a person
then becomes satisfied and the
satisfaction increases with each use. This
constant feeling leads to psychological
reinforcement which eventually leads to
dependence. Along with substances,

81
www.iaetsd.in
people can also become dependent on

activities as well; such as shopping,
pornography, self-harm, and many more.
While a psychologically dependent
person attempts to recover, there are
many withdrawal symptoms that one can
experience throughout the process. Some
of the withdrawal symptoms are:
headache, poor judgement, trembling
hands, and loss of attention span and
focusing.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
directionality of the sound. This is really

just an auditory illusion. The rate of this
fluctuation can be controlled by the use
of specific sound frequencies. For
example, by playing a tone of 200 Hz in
the left ear and 210 Hz in the right ear, a
fluctuation of 10 Hz is detected by the
brain. The difference between the two
frequencies could be called a "sub
harmonic" a sound that is below the
threshold of human hearing. However,
this sub-harmonic binaural frequency
may still be detected as a slight pulsing
sound. This pulsing, or beating, is why
we call them binaural "beats". Binaural
beats cause the brain to adjust its
dominant frequency to match the sub
harmonic frequency of the beating
sound. This is what is known as the
"frequency following response". We
can take advantage of the frequency
following response by creating binaural
frequencies that help to induce specific
brainwave frequencies. For example, we
know that someone who is in a state of
deep meditation may have a dominant
brainwave frequency of say, 6 Hertz (6
cycles per second). When we listen to
binaural tones that have been
programmed to produce a 6 Hertz sub
harmonic
frequency,
our
own
brainwaves will follow the frequency of
the beat and will naturally adjust in
sympathy.
Directly using an infrasonic
auditory stimulus is impossible, since the
ears cannot hear sounds low enough to
be useful for brain stimulation. Human
hearing is limited to the range of
frequencies from 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz,
2.THE ADDICTION AVOIDER:

2.1.PRINCIPLE:
Binaural Beats is the Principle
behind this device. Binaural Beats or
"binaural tones" are an auditory effect
that is created in the brain when two
tones of slightly different frequencies are
played separately into each ear. This
effect was discovered in 1839 by
Heinrich Wilhelm Dove. Normally,
when a sound reaches our ears, your
brain uses this information to help
decipher where the sound is coming
from. If we hear a noise that originates
slightly to our left, then the sound will
not only be a little louder in our left ear,
it also arrives at our left ear a few
milliseconds sooner than it arrives at our
right ear. We may not notice this effect
on a conscious level, but our brain
certainly does. So our brain is very
sensitive to small variations in the
frequency of sounds, and to the way
those sounds reach our ears. When we
listen to binaural beats, our brain is
subjected to an effect that is perceived as
a
constant
fluctuation
in
the

82
www.iaetsd.in
while the frequencies of human brain

waves are below about 40 Hz. To
account for this, binaural beat
frequencies must be used.
According to this view, when the
perceived beat frequency corresponds to
the delta, theta, alpha or beta range of
brainwave frequencies, the brainwaves
entrain to or move towards the beat
frequency. For example, if a 315 Hz sine
wave is played into the right ear and a
325 Hz one into the left ear, the brain is
supposed to be entrained towards the
beat frequency (10 Hz, in the alpha
range). Since alpha range is usually
associated with relaxation, this is
supposed to have a relaxing effect. Some
people find pure sine waves unpleasant,
so a pink noise or another background
(e.g. natural sounds such as river noises)
can also be mixed with them.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The block diagram(Refer Fig

1.3) consists of the following parts
whose operation is as below:
2.3.1.SENSORS:
The sensors used are EEG
sensors:
An electroencephalogram detects
abnormalities in the brain waves or
electrical activity of the brain. During
the procedure, electrodes consisting of
small metal discs with thin wires are
pasted on the scalp. The electrodes
detect tiny electrical charges that result
from the activity of the brain cells. The
charges are amplified as analog signals.
The sensor sends the analog
brainwave signal into the 8515
microcontroller.
2.3.2.MICROCONTROLLER:
2.2. BLOCK DIAGRAM:
Fig 1.4
The Atmel 8515(Refer Fig 1.4)
microcontroller is a 40 pin, 4 MHz 8bit
microcontroller and has 8K FLASH, 512
EEPROM, 512 SRAM.The AT90S8515
is
a
low-power
CMOS
8-bit
microcontroller. It has an internal analog
to digital converter (ADC) and internal
battery.
The signal that is sent by the
sensors is converted from analog to
digital signal. The microcontroller has a
Fig 1.3
2.3.EXPLANATION
WORKING:
OF
THE

83
www.iaetsd.in
pre-defined program, which analyses the

digital signal and compares it with the
digital signal equivalent of the analog
signal having the frequency range of 32
40 Hz which is already stored in the
memory of the microcontroller. If on
comparison the analyses on two signals
are nearly same then the microcontroller
acknowledges and triggers the oscillator
1 and oscillator 2.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Addiction avoider can be used to

cure stress or tension on any individual.
The concept of binaural waves can be
further researched and used to find a
device for communication with deaf and
dumb individuals. It can be further used
to study the resonance of brain during
brain diseases.
4.MERITS:
a)The headband used is made of
rubber is easy to use.
b)The whole device is light weight
and can be carried anywhere we want.
c)Helps in Relaxation of mind
d)Concentration and Focus level can
be increased
2.3.3.OSCILLATORS:
The oscillator is designed in such
a way that it produces a particular audio
wave below 1500 Hz. The oscillator will
be designed such that it has 10 13 Hz
difference in frequency with oscillator 1.
This difference in frequency creates
Binaural Beats. Thus if the brain of an
individual produces 32 40 Hz (High
Beta waves) i.e. if he/she is in stress or
addicted to some substance, the binaural
beats having a frequency of about 10-13
Hz creates a stimulus making the brain
to move towards the stimulated
frequency.
5.DEMERITS:
1) Those meeting any of the
following
criteria/conditions should not use
binaural beats
Brain disorders
Pregnant women
People with heart disorders
Photosensitive people
2.3.4.STEREO HEADPHONE:
The sensation of auditory
binaural beats occurs when two coherent
sounds of nearly similar frequencies are
presented one to each ear with stereo
headphones or speakers. This is done by
sending audio waves from one oscillator
to one of the two sides of the headphone
and another oscillator to another side of
the headphone.
6.CONCLUSION:
Addiction Avoider is the safest
and simplest device to use in prevention
of Addiction. It is used for any type of
addiction like addiction caused by taking
narcotic drugs or alcohol and simple
addictions like overeating, sexual
intercourse and mannerisms.
3.FUTURE PROSPECTS:

84
www.iaetsd.in
7.REFERENCE:
[1]Wilson.R.Palacios, Cocktails and
dreams: Perspectives on drugs and
alcohol use
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[12]www.angelfire.com/empire/serpentis
666/Brainwaves.htm
[2]Psychological Abstracts, American

Psychological Associations.
[3]Cognition and Addiction, Marcus
Munafo, I.Albery.
[4]Addiction Conspiracy: Unlocking
Brain Chemistry and addiction, Lee
Tannenbaum, 2008.
[5]Drugs and the Future: Brain Science
and Addiction, David.J.Nutt, Trevor.
Robbins, 2006.
[6]Mapping the mind, Rita Carter,
Christopher.D.Frith, 1998.
[7]The truth about addiction and
recovery , Stanton Peele, Archie
Brodsky, Mary Arnold.
[8]Detection of seizures in epileptic and
non-epileptic patients using GPS and
Embedded Systems by Abhiram
Chakraborty Ukranian Journal of
Telemedicine and medical Telematics
(TOM 3 No.2 Pg. 211)
[9] www.bio-medical.com
[10]www.ercim.org/publication/
Ercim_News/enw51/bielikova.html
[11]www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/
ency/article/003931.htm

85
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Surface Roughness analysis of drilling on

GFRP composites by experimental
investigation and predictive modeling
1,2
*1 Prasanna Ragothaman,2Harihar Karthikkeyan

Department of Mechanical Engineering ,Sri Ramakrishna Engineering College,Coimbatore,India
1
prasse1994@gmail.com,2haridooo93@gmail.com
Abstract: Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastics composites

have an increased application in recent days, due to its
enhanced structural properties, Mechanical and
thermal properties. Drilling of holes in GFRP becomes
almost unavoidable in fabrication. The heterogeneous
nature of this kind of materials makes complications
during machining operation. However, drilling is a
common machining practice for assembly of
components. The quality of holes produced in the GFRP
material is severely affected by surface roughness,
Circularity and Delamination . The objective of the
study is to apply the full factorial design, ANOVA and
Fuzzy logic model to achieve an improved hole quality
considering the minimum surface roughness through
proper selection of drilling parameters. The regression
method is employed in the Experimental investigation
and Mathematical modelling of drilling of GFRP
material using HSS drill bits and the fuzzy logic model
for the validation of the mathematical model.
factors affect the surface finish. Many theoretical

models have concluded that the effect of spindle
speed on surface roughness is minimal [8]. In
practice, however spindle speed has been found to
be an important factor [9]. The quality of drilling
surfaces depends on the cutting parameters and
tool wear, while changing the cutting parameters
causes to tool wear [10].Researchers have
attempted to model the surface roughness
prediction using multiple regression, mathematical
modeling based on physics of process, fuzzy logic
[11].Machining operation being highly nonlinear in
nature, soft computing techniques have been
found to be very effective for modeling [12].The
influence of process parameters such as spindle
speed, lubrication and feed rate on surface finish
were investigated during the experimentation of
Metal matrix composites. The experiments were
conducted according to the full factorial design
.The percentage of contribution of highest
influential factors can be determined using
analysis of variance(ANOVA) a statistical tool, used
in design of experiments[13,14]. Fuzzy logic is a
mathematical formalism for representing human
knowledge involving vague concepts and a natural
but effective method for systematically
formulating cost effective solutions of complex
problems [15]. A model was developed for surface
roughness on drilling of GFRP composites using
fuzzy logic [16]. The primary objective of this study
is to quantify the influence of process input
parameters on surface roughness by formulating a
mathematical model and validating using Fuzzy
logic model.
Index terms: GFRP, ANOVA, Fuzzy logic, aircraft

fuselage, Full factorial Method, Drilling, Surface
Roughness.
I.Introduction
Glass fiber Reinforced Plastics (GFRP) are widely
being used in the automotive, machine tool
industry, aerospace components, sporting
equipments [1] because of their particular
mechanical and physical properties such as specific
strength and high specific stiffness. An aircraft
fuselage structure around 100,000 holes is
required for joining purpose [2, 3]. About 60% of
the rejections are happening in aircraft industry
due to the defects in the holes [4]. Many of these
problems are due to the use of non-optimal
cutting tool designs, rapid tool wear and cutting
parameters [5, 6]. Among the defects caused by
drilling with tool wear, Delamination appears to be
the most critical [7].The surface finish of the work
piece is an important attribute of hole quality in
any drilling operation. During machining many
II. Design of Experiment

Design of experiment is the design of all
information -gathering exercises where variation is
present, whether under the full control

86
www.iaetsd.in
experimenter or not. The cutting speed, feed rate

and thickness of GFRP plate are the three
parameters under investigation in the present
study. A full factorial experimental design with a
total number of 27 holes drilled into the GFRP
specimen to investigate the hole quality on
Surface Roughness. The full factorial design is the
most efficient way of conducting the experiment
for that three factors and each factor at three
levels of experiments is used. Hence as per
factor
Levels
(factors to power of levels) formula =
factors
3
Levels
,N = 3 = 27, N- number of experiments.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Fig 3: Experimental Setup

Experiments were carried out in high speed radial
drilling machine using HSS drill of 10mm diameter.
Experiments were carried out according to full
factorial design. It provide a powerful and
efficient method for designing processes that
operate consistently and optimally over a variety
of conditions. The selected levels of process
parameters were given in Table 1.Fig. 3 shows the
photographic view of the experimental setup.
Further, the hole quality characteristics surface
roughness measured using roughness tester
[Mitutoyo TR-200].Fig. 2 shows the measurement
of hole quality characteristics using roughness
tester. Point angle was measured before every drill
for 27 experiments using Digital Profile Projector
[OPTOMECH, 10x magnification].
Table 1:Assignment levels for process parameters

Levels
Factors
1
2
3
Speed,s(rpm)
280
900
1800
Feed,f(mm/rev)
0.18
0.71
1.40
GFRP Plate
5
10
15
thickness,t(mm)
Fig 1: Fabricated GFRP plate

IV . RESULTS AND DISCUSSION
III. Specimen preparation
The Glass fiber reinforced composite used is
fabricated using hand lay-up technique [12]. The
composition type is Glass fibers (fiber length=2030mm) reinforced with isopathalic resin with 30%
reinforcement .The material was fabricated and
then cut into pieces of 22cm x 11cm for all the
three thicknesses of plate (Fig.1)
A. ANOVA
The Analysis of variance is extensively used to
analyze the experimental results. ANOVA tests the
significance of group difference between two or
more groups. The normal probability plot
represents that all the points on the normal plot
lie close to the straight line (main line) or not.
Versus fits plots represents that how far deviation
occur from the normal distribution. An interaction
plot is occurs when the change in response from
the one level of a factor to another level differs
from change in response at the same two level
second factor. A main effect plot is present when
different levels of an input affect the responses
directly.
A. Methodology
B. ANOVA FOR SURFACE ROUGHNESS

Fig.4 Represent that all the points lie closer to the
regression line, this implies that the data are fairly
normal and there is a no deviation from the
normal. Histogram graph shows the skewness. The
Equation No. 1 represents that feed has much
effect on Ra. The main effect plot for Surface
Roughness has been shown in the Fig 5. The plot
shows that Ra decrease with low cutting speed
Fig 2: Surface Roughness Tester

87
www.iaetsd.in
and low feed rate for 15 mm plate, as well as the

initial (without wear in drill bit ) point angle has
less effect on Ra. Table 2 Shows that the analysis
of variance of second order model with 95%
confidence interval for the Surface roughness
experiments.
Parameter
A gives 44.2%
contribution to the Ra.
C.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Mathematical model for Surface

Roughness
The models were based on the Box-Behnkn design

method. The developed second order
mathematical model for surface roughness.
Surface Roughness
= 4.87 - 0.00086 (s) + 2.49 (f) + 0.249 (t)-------(1)
Table 2 : Analysis of variance
Predictors
Coef
SE Coef
Constant
4.873
2.352
2.07
0.05
8.56e-4
1.09e-3
-0.78
0.442
2.494
1.367
1.49
0.151
0.2487
0.1673
2.07
0.017
S = 3.54808 R-Sq = 21.1% R-Sq(adj) = 10.8%
Fig.4 Residual plot for Ra
Source
DF
SS
MS
Regression
77.44
25.81
2.05
0.135
Residual
Error
23
289.54
12.59
Total
26
366.99
Fig.6 Represent that high feed rate and low speed

have less effect on Ra while drilling on 5mm
thickness plate. When drilling on 10mm thickness
of plate with cutting parameters of low speed and
feed rate shows surface roughness is minimized.
For 15mm plate high speed and high feed rate has
less effect on Ra. From Fig.5 shows that when
decreasing the point angle , the effect of surface
roughness is increased . Decreasing the point angle
causes tool wear . Fig 7 shows the predicted and
measured hole characteristics at different drilling
process parameter conditions. The result
significantly shows that the values relatively follow
the similar trend pattern of the measured value
and predicted values from the developed
regression model.
Fig 5 Main Effects plot for Ra
V. Fuzzy logic model

Fuzzy logic refers to a logical system that
generalizes the classical two-value logic for
reasoning under uncertainty. It is a system of
computing and approximate reasoning based on a
collection of theories and technologies that
employ fuzzy sets, which are classes of objects
without sharp boundaries. Fuzzy logic is the best in
capturing the ambiguity in input. Fuzzy logic has
Fig 6 :Interaction plot for Ra

88
www.iaetsd.in
become popular in the recent years, due to the

fact that it is possible to add human expertise to
the process. Nevertheless, in the case where the
nonlinear model and all the parameters of a
process are known, a fuzzy system may be used.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Rule 1: if Thickness is Low and Speed is Low and

Feed rate is Low then surface roughness is Very
Very low (VVL).
D .Aggregation of Rules
A .Development of fuzzy logic model
The aggregation of all the rule outputs is

implemented using max method, the commonly
used method for combining the effect of all the
rules. In this method the output of each rule is
combined into single fuzzy set whose membership
function value is used to clip the output
membership function. It returns the highest value
of the membership functions of all the rules.
The surface roughness and circularity error in

drilling of GFRP is assumed as a function of three
input variables viz.plate thickness, spindle speed,
and feed rate. The Fuzzy logic prediction model is
developed using Fuzzy Logic Toolbox available in
Matlab version 7.10(R2010a).In this work
Mamdani type Fuzzy Inference Systems(FIS) is
used for modeling. The steps followed in
developing The fuzzy logic model are described
below.
E .Defuzzification
The aggregate output of all the rules which is in
the form of fuzzy set is converted into a numerical
value (crisp number) that represents the response
variable for the given data sets. In the present
work, the centroid defuzzification method is used
for this purpose. It is the most popular method
used in most of the fuzzy logic applications. It is
based on the centroid calculation and returns
center of area under the curve.The predicted
values of surface roughness are compared with
the experimental output, prediction model output
and fuzzy output. The comparison of prediction
performance in fuzzy logic output, prediction
model output with the experimental results is
given in the Table 3.
B. Fuzzification of I/O variables:
Surface roughness,Ra (m)
The input and output variables are fuzzified into

different fuzzy sets. The triangular membership
function is used for simplicity yet computationally
efficient. It is easy to use and requires only three
parameters to define.The input variables plate
thickness [5-15 mm] ,spindle speed [280-1800
rpm] and feed rate [0.18-1.4 mm/rev] are fuzzified
into three fuzzy sets viz.Low (L),Medium(M),and
High(H) as shown in the Fig.11 (a,b,c).The output
variable i.e. The surface roughness and circularity
error are divided into nine fuzzy sets as Very Very
Low(VVL),VeryLow(VL),Low(L),Medium1(M1),Medi
um2 (M2), Medium3 (M3),High (H),Very High
(VH),Very Very High (VVH) as shown in Fig.11 (d) to
increase the resolution and accuracy of prediction.
C . Evaluation of IF-THEN rule
The three input variables are fuzzified into three
fuzzy sets each, the size of rule base becomes
27(3x3x3).For generating the Fuzzy rules, the level
of the variable having more membership grade on
a particular fuzzy set is considered. With
appropriate level of all the input variables
representing the corresponding fuzzy set, the
surface roughness values are used for 27 data sets
of fuzzy rule base. Since all the parts in the
antecedents are compulsory for getting the
response value, the AND (min) operator is used to
combine antecedents parts of each rule.
The implication method min is used to correlate
the rule consequent with its antecedent. For
example, the first rule of the FIS can be written as
20
15
Experimental
Value
10
5
Predicted
Value
Fuzzified
Value
1 5 9 13 17 21 25
Hole number
Fig.9 Correlation between Experimental Ra

with predicted Ra and Fuzzified Ra
Fig.9 indicates that the outputs from the
experiments, Prediction model, Fuzzy are in good
correlation with each other.

89
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Table 3: Surface roughness values for Experimental output, Predicted output and Fuzzy output
S.
No
Plate
thickness
t (mm)
Speed
s(rpm)
Feed
f(mm/rev)
Point
angle
()
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
280
280
280
900
900
900
1800
1800
1800
280
280
280
900
900
900
1800
1800
1800
280
280
280
900
900
900
1800
1800
1800
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
0.18
0.71
1.40
10732'07"
10729'47"
10725'32"
10720'44"
10717'58"
10715'20"
10719'31"
10712'25"
10708'28"
10702'57"
10647'11"
10639'47"
10630'09"
10628'42"
10624'50"
10621'20"
10619'26"
10616'32"
10632'07"
10558'10"
10552'37"
10544'12"
10536'04"
10514'39"
10522'42"
10508'35"
10458'49"
Surface Roughness, Ra (m)

Experimental
Predicted
output
output
Fuzzy
output
3.19
11.98
6.49
4.09
9.16
8.79
12.96
7.27
3.33
5.64
8.98
11.42
1.76
7.12
8.58
7.72
10.07
8.97
8.37
10.48
15.75
5.43
18.25
11.43
4.74
6.64
8.55
2.15
10.00
5.75
3.62
7.87
7.87
12.1
5.75
2.50
3.62
7.87
10.00
2.19
5.75
7.87
5.75
10.00
7.87
7.87
10.00
14.30
3.62
16.4
10.00
3.62
5.75
7.87
6.3224
7.6421
9.3602
5.7892
7.1089
8.8270
5.0152
6.3349
8.0530
7.5674
8.8871
10.6052
7.0342
8.3539
10.0720
6.2602
7.5799
9.2980
8.8124
10.1321
11.8502
8.2792
9.5989
11.3170
7.5052
8.8249
10.5430
Fig 10 :Surface roughness vs Speed

Fig 12:Surface roughness vs Feed rate
The variation of surface roughness with
different combinations of input variables is studied
using the output surface FIS.Fig 10,11 12 shows
the
Functional
dependence
of
surface
roughness(Ra) with Plate thickness ,feed rate and
Spindle speed .It can be observed that the surface
roughness increase with increase in plate thickness
or increase in spindle speed or increase in feed
Fig 11 :Surface roughness vs Thickness

90
www.iaetsd.in
rate. And it is also observed that surface

roughness is decreases with small plate thickness,
medium spindle speed and small feed rate.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[6] Komaduri R, Machining of fiber-reinforced

Composites, Mechanical Engineering, 115 (4),
(1993) 58-66.
VI .Conclusion
[7] A.M. Abrao et.al,. Drilling of fiber reinforced

plastics: A review, Journal of Materials Processing
Technology 186 (2007) 17.
This experimental investigation presents the

surface roughness characteristics of drilling on
GFRP composites. A simple regression prediction
model was developed based on the function of
process variables and the following conclusions
were made
[8] Abrao A M, Faria PE, Campus Rubio J., C., Reis

P, PauloDavim J Drilling of fiber reinforced plastics:
A Review. J Materl. Process Technology 186 (2007)
[9] CaprinoG, Tagliaferi V Damage development in
drilling glass fiber reinforced plastics. Int J Mach
tools Manuf (6): (1995) 817-829.
1)Surface Roughness was analyzed as a function of

process input variables. Validation was done with
a developed fuzzy rule based model. The results
obtained from experiments, Prediction model and
the fuzzy model are in good correlation with each
other.
[10]Hocheng, H.and H. Puw. On drilling

characteristic
fiber
reinforced
Thermoset
&Thermoplastics. Int J Mach tools Manuf ,32
(1992)583-592.
2)From analysis of variance and from the fuzzy

model, the results indicated that low feed rate,
high spindle speed and 5mm thickness of GFRP
plate gives better Surface Roughness.
3)It was observed that the surface roughness
increases with the decreasing of point angle.
[11]M.Chandrasekaran,
M.Muralidhar,
C.M.Krishna and U.S.Dixit, Application of soft
computing techniques in machining performance
prediction
and
optimization:a
literature
review,Int J Adv Manuf Technol,Vol.46(2010) 445464.
4)Further investigations are needed to enhance

the hole quality characteristics considering
different tool materials and tool diameters,
considering machine vibration, etc during drilling
of GFRP composites.
[12]M.Chandrasekaran and D.Devarasiddappa

,Development of Predictive Model For Surface
Roughness in End Milling of Al-SiC Metal matrix
Composites using Fuzzy logic, Engineering and
Technology 68 (2012) 1271-1276
VII .References
[13] C.Y.Hsu,C.S.Chen,C.C.Tsao,Free abrasive wire

saw machining of ceramics, Int J Adv
Manuf Technology 40 (2009) 503-511.
[1] Park, J. N., Cho, G. J.A Study of the Cutting

Characteristics of the Glass Fiber Reinforced
Plastics by Drill Tools, International Journal of
Precision Engineering and Manufacturing, vol. 8
(2007) 11-15
[14]
Bala
Murugan
Gopalsamy,Biswanath
Mondal,Sukamal Ghosh,Optimisation of machining
parameters for hard machining:grey relational
theory approach and ANOVA,The International
journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology 45
(2009) 1068-1086.
[2] VijayanKrishnaraj, Member, IAENG, Effects of

Drill Points on Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic
Composite While Drilling at High Speed,
Proceedings of the World Congress on Engineering
2008 Vol II, WCEE 2008, July 2-4(2008) London.
[15]Vikram
Banerjee
et.al,Design
space
exploration of mamdani and sugeno inference
systemsfor fuzzy logic based illumination
controller, International journal of VLSI and
Embedded system-IJVES (2012) 97-101.
[3] Sonbatry El, Khashaba U.A, Machaly T, Factors

affecting the machinability of GFRP/epoxy
composites, Comp Structures, 63 (2004) 329-338.
[16]B.latha and B.S.Senthilkumar, Modeling and

Analysis of Surface Roughness Parameters in
Drilling GFRP Composites Using Fuzzy Logic,
Materials and Manufacturing Processes 25 (8)
(2010) 817-827.
[4] Montgomery, D.C.,. Design and Analysis of

Experiments: RSM and Designs. John Wiley and
Sons. New York, USA, 2005.
[5] Konig W, WulfCh, Gra P and Willercheid H,
Machining of fiber reinforced plastics, Annals CIRP,
34 (2) (1985) 537-548.

91
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
N-chance based coordinated cooperative cache

replacement Algorithm for Social wireless networks
1
Yanamala Kumar , Endela Ramesh

1
2
1
M.Tech (CSE) Student,Audisankara Institute Of Technology,Gudur.

CSE,Assistant Professor, Audisankara Institute Of Technology,Gudur.
kumaryanamala10@gmail.com,2rameshreddycse@gmail.com
Abstract:Cooperative caching is a technique

used in wireless networks to improve the
efficiency of information access by reducing
the access latency and bandwidth usage.This
paper discusses about cooperative caching
policies for minimizing electronic content
provisioning cost in Social Wireless
Networks (SWNET). SWNETs are formed
by mobile devices, such as data enabled
phones, electronic book readers etc., sharing
common interests in electronic content, and
physically gathering together in public
places. Electronic object caching in such
SWNETs are shown to be able to reduce the
content provisioning cost which depends
heavily on the service and pricing
dependences among various stakeholders
including content providers (CP), network
service providers, and End Consumers
(EC).Cache replacement policy plays a
significant role in response time reduction
by selecting suitable subset of items for
eviction from the cache. In addition, this
paper suggests some alternative techniques
for cache replacement. Finally, the paper
concludes with a discussion on future
research directions.
1.INTRODUCTION:
RECENT emergence of data enabled
mobile devices and wireless-enabled data
applications have fostered new content
dissemination models in todays mobile
ecosystem. A list of such devices includes
Apples
iPhone,
Googles
Android,
Amazons Kindle, and electronic book
readers from other vendors. The array of
data applications includes electronic book
and magazine readers and mobile phone
Apps. The level of proliferation of mobile
applications is indicated by the example fact
that as of October 2010,Apples App Store
offered over 100,000 apps that are
downloadable by the smart phone users.
Wireless mobile communication is a fastest
growing segment in communication
industry[1]. It has currently supplemented or
replaced the existing wired networks in
many places. The wide range of applications
and new technologies[5] simulated this
enormous growth. The new wireless traffic
will support
heterogeneous traffic,
consisting of voice, video and data. Wireless
networking environments can be classified
in to two different types of architectures,
infrastructure based and ad hoc based. The
former type is most commonly deployed
one, as it is used in wireless LANS and
global wireless networks. An infrastructure
based wireless network uses fixed network
access points with which mobile terminals
Keywords:Data
Caching,
Cache
Replacement,SWNETs,Cooperative caching,
content provisioning, ad hoc networks

92
www.iaetsd.in
interact for communication and this requires

the mobile terminal to be in the
communication range of a base station. The
ad hoc based network structure alleviates
this problem by enabling mobile terminals to
cooperatively form a dynamic network
without any pre existing infrastructure. It is
much convenient for accessing information
available in local area and possibly reaching
a WLAN base station,which comes at no
cost for users.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
forms cooperative cache collectively takes

the replacement decision.This paper
discusses about coordinated replacement
policy.
2.RELATED WORK:
There is a rich body of the existing
literature on several aspects of cooperative
caching including object replacements,
reducing cooperation overhead, cooperation
performance in traditional wired networks.
The Social Wireless Networks explored in
this paper, which are often formed using
mobile ad hoc network protocols, are
different in the caching context due to their
additional constraints such as topological
insatiability and limited resources. As a
result, most of the available cooperative
caching solutions for traditional static
networks are not directly applicable for the
SWNETs. Three caching schemes for
MANET have been presented[9][11]. In the
first scheme, CacheData, a forwarding node
checks the passing-by objects and caches the
ones deemed useful according to some
predefined criteria. This way, the subsequent
requests for the cached objects can be
satisfied by an intermediate node. A
problem with this approach is that storing
large number of popular objects in large
number of intermediate nodes does not scale
well.The second approach, CachePath, is
different in that the intermediate nodes do
not save the objects; instead they only
record paths to the closest node where the
objects can be found. The idea in CachePath
is to reduce latency and overhead of cache
resolution by finding the location of objects.
This strategy works poorly in a highly
mobile environment since most of the
recorded paths become obsolete very soon.
The last approach in is the HybridCache in
which either CacheData or CachePath is
used based on the properties of the passingby objects through an intermediate node.
While all three mechanisms offer a
Mobile terminals available today have

powerful hard ware, but the capacity of the
batteries goes up slowly and all these
powerful components reduce battery life.
Therefore adequate measures should be
taken to save energy. Communication is one
of the major sources of energy onsumption.
By reducing the data traffic energy can be
conserved for longer time. Data caching has
been introduced[10] as a techniques to
reduce the data traffic and access latency.
By caching data the data request can be
served from the mobile clients without
sending it to the data source each time. It is
a major technique used in the web to reduce
the access latency. In web, caching is
implemented at various points in the
network. At the top level web server uses
caching, and then comes the proxy server
cache and finally client uses a cache in the
browser.
This paper provides algorithms,for Energy
efficient cooperative cache replacement in
wireless networks. The topic of caching in
ad hoc networks is rather new, and not much
work has been done in this area.The
replacement policies for MANETs are
classified into two groups uncoordinated and
coordinated. In uncoordinated replacement,
the data item to be evicted is determined
independently by each node based on its
local access information. In coordinated
replacement policy,the mobile nodes which

93
www.iaetsd.in
reasonable solution, and that relying only on

the nodes in an objects path is not most
efficient. Using a limited broadcast-based
cache resolution can significantly improve
the overall hit rate and the effective capacity
overhead of cooperative caching. According
to the protocols the mobile hosts share their
cache contents in order to reduce both the
number of server requests and the number of
access misses. The concept is extended in
for tightly coupled groups with similar
mobility and data access patterns. This
extended version adopts an intelligent bloom
filter-based peer cache signature to
minimize the number of flooded message
during cache resolution. A notable limitation
of this approach is that it relies on a
centralized mobile support center to
discover nodes with common mobility
pattern and similar data access patterns. Our
work, on the contrary, is fully distributed in
which the mobile devices cooperate in a
peer-to-peer fashion for minimizing the
object access cost. In summary, in most of
the existing work on collaborative caching,
there is a focus on maximizing the cache hit
rate of objects, without considering its
effects on the overall cost which depends
heavily on the content service and pricing
models. This paper formulated two object
replacement mechanisms to minimize the
provisioning cost,
instead of just
maximizing the hit rate. Also, the validation
of our protocol on a real SWNET interaction
trace with dynamic partitions, and on a
multiphone Android prototype is unique
compared to the existing literature. From a
user selfishness standpoint, Laoutaris et
al.investigate its impacts and mistreatment
on caching. A mistreated node is a
cooperative node that experiences an
increase in its access cost due to the selfish
behavior by other nodes in the network. In,
Chun et al study selfishness in a distributed
content replication strategy in which each
user tries to minimize its individual access
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
cost by replicating a subset of objects locally

(up to the storage capacity), and accessing
the rest from the nearest possible location.
Using a game theoretic formulation, the
authors prove the existence of a pure Nash
equilibrium under which network reaches a
stable situation. Similar approach has been
used
in which the authors model a
distributed caching as a market sharing
game.
The work in this paper has certain similarity
with the above works as we also use a
monetary cost and rebate for content
dissemination in the network. However, as
opposed to using game theoretic approaches.
Analysis of selfishness in the work is done
in a steady state over all objects whereas the
previous works mainly analyze the impact of
selfishness only for a single data item.
3.Network Model,Cache Replacement

Policies:
3.1 NETORK MODEL
Fig. 1 illustrates an example SWNET within
a University campus. End Consumers
carrying mobile devices form SWNET
partitions, which can be either multi-hop
(i.e.,MANET) as shown for partitions 1, 3,
and 4, or single hop access point based as
shown for partition 2. A mobile device can
download an object (i.e., content) from the
CPs server using the CSPs cellular
network, or from its local SWNET partition.
Two types of SWNETs are considered. The
first one
involves stationary SWNET
partitions. Meaning, after a partition is
formed, it is maintained for sufficiently long
so that the cooperative object caches can be
formed and reach steady states. Second type
is also investigated to explore as to what
happens when the stationary assumption is
relaxed.To investigate this effect, caching is
applied to SWNETs formed using human

94
www.iaetsd.in
interaction traces obtained from a set of real

SWNET nodes.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Data caching in MANET is proposed as

cooperative caching. In cooperative caching
the local cache in each node is shared
among the adjacent nodes and they form a
large unified cache. So in a cooperative
caching environment, the mobile hosts can
obtain data items not only from local cache
but also from the cache of their neighboring
nodes. This aims at maximizing the amount
of data that can be served from the cache so
that the server delays can reduced which in
turn decreases the response time for the
client. In many applications of MANET like
automated highways and factories, smart
homes and appliances, smart class rooms,
mobile nodes share common interest. So
sharing cache contents between mobile
nodes offers significant benefits. Cache
replacement algorithm greatly improves
the effectiveness of the cache by selecting
suitable subset of data for caching. The
available cache replacement mechanisms
for ad hoc network can be categorized in to
coordinated and uncoordinated depending
on how replacement decision is made. In
uncoordinated scheme
the replacement
decision is made by individual nodes. In
order to cache the incoming data when the
cache is full, replacement
algorithm
chooses the data items to be removed by
making use of the local parameters in each
node.
Fig. 1. Content access from an SWNET in a

University Campus.
3.2. Cache Replacement

Caching in wireless environment has unique
constraints like scarce bandwidth, limited
power supply, high mobility and limited
cache space. Due to the space limitation,
the mobile nodes can store only a subset of
the frequently accessed data. The
availability of the data in local cache can
significantly improve the performance
since it overcomes the constraints in
wireless environment. A good replacement
mechanism is needed to distinguish the
items to be kept in cache and that is to
be removed when the cache is full. While it
would be possible to pick a random object
to replace when cache is full, system
performance will be better if we choose an
object that is not heavily used. If a heavily
used data item is removed it will probably
have to be brought back quickly, resulting
in
extra
overhead.
So
a
good
replacement policy is essential to achieve
high hit rates. The extensive research on
caching for wired networks can be adapted
for the wireless environment with
modifications to account for mobile terminal
limitations and the dynamics of the wireless
channel.
3.4.Split Cache Replacement
Fig.2. Cache partitioning in split cache policy.
To realize the optimal object placement

under homogeneousobject request model
The following Split Cache policy is
3.3. Cache Replacement Policies in Ad

hoc networks

95
www.iaetsd.in
proposed in which the available cache space

in each device is divided into a duplicate
segment ( fraction) and a unique segment
(see Fig. 2). In the first segment, nodes can
store the most popular objects without
worrying about the object duplication and in
the second segment only unique objects are
allowed to be stored. The parameter in Fig.
2 (0 1) indicates the fraction of cache
that is used for storing duplicated objects.
With the Split Cache replacement policy,
soon after an object is downloaded from the
CPs server, it is categorized as a unique
object as there is only one copy of this
object in the network. Also, when a node
downloads an object from another SWNET
node, that object is categorized as a
duplicated object as there are now at least
two copies of that object in the network.
store more appropriate data, thereby

reducing the number of evictions. If a node
doesnt cache the data that adjacent
nodes have it can cache more distinct data
items which increase the data availability.
There is coordination between the
neighboring nodes for the proper placing of
data. Another feature of coordinated
replacement is that the evicted data may be
stored in neighboring nodes which have free
space. Some of the replacement policies
which make use of coordinated cache
replacement are given below.
4.1.1 N-chance
The N-chance algorithm dynamically
partitions the cache of each client between
blocks needed by the local client and the
cooperative cache. Managers are responsible
for
maintaining consistency and block
location information.The replacement policy
in N-chance uses a combination of local
LRU information and duplicate avoidance to
decide the best block to replace. Clients
always replace the oldest block on their
LRU lists. Whether the client forwards or
discards the oldest block depends on the
number of copies of the block. Blocks with
more than one copy are discarded, while
blocks with only one copy, or singlets are
forwarded to another client at random. If a
client does not know whether or not one of
its blocks is a singlet, it simply asks the
manager.
For storing a new unique object, the least

popular object in the whole cache is selected
as a candidate and it is replaced with the
new object if it is less popular than the new
incoming object. For a duplicated object,
however, the evictee candidate is selected
only from the first duplicate segmentof the
cache. In other words, a unique object is
never evicted in order to accommodate a
duplicated object.
4.Dynamic Partitioning coordinated
cooperative
cache
replacement
Algorithm for Social wireless networks
4.1 Coordinated
Policies
Cache
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
replacement
5. Discussion and Future work

Most of the replacement algorithms used in
ad hoc networks is LRU based which uses
the property of temporal locality. This is
favorable for MANET which is formed for a
short period of time with small memory
capacity. Frequency based algorithms will
be beneficial for long term accesses. It is
better if the function based policies can
adapt to different workload condition. In
Coordinated cache replacement strategy for

cooperative caching schemes in mobile
environments should ideally consider cache
admission control policy. Cache admission
control decides whether the incoming data is
cacheable or not. Substantial amount of
cache space can be saved by proper
admission control, which can be utilized to

96
www.iaetsd.in
these schemes if we are using too many

parameters for finding the value function,
which are not easily available the
performance can be degraded. Most of the
replacement algorithms mentioned above
uses cache hit ratio as the performance
metric. In wireless network the cost to
download data item from the server may
vary. So in some cases this may not be the
best performance metric. Schemes which
improve cache hit ratio and reduce access
latency should be devised. In cooperative
caching coordinated cache replacement is
more effective than local replacement since
Algorithm
N-chance
Cache Consistency
Block-based
Block Location
Manager-based
Replacement Policy
Random Client
Duplicate Avoidance
Non-singlets deleted
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the replacement decision is made by

considering the information available in the
neighboring nodes. The area of cache
replacement in cooperative caching has not
received much attention. Lot of work needs
to be done in this area to find better
replacement policies.
Server Caching
Traditional
Table.1 key features of the N-chance, GMS
[2]. Denko, M.K., Tian, J.,Cross-Layer

Design for Cooperative Caching in Mobile
Ad Hoc Networks, Proc .of IEEE
Consumer Communications and Networking
Conf( 2008).
[3]. L. Yin, G. Cao: Supporting cooperative
caching in ad hoc networks, IEEE
Transactions on Mobile Computing,
5(1):77-89( 2006).
[4]. Chand, N. Joshi R.C., and Misra, M.,
Efficient Cooperative Caching in Ad Hoc
Networks Communication System
Software and Middleware.(2006).
[5] S. Lim, W. C. Lee, G. Cao, C. R. Das: A
novel caching scheme for internet based
mobile ad hoc networks. Proc .12th
Int. Conf. Computer Comm. Networks
(ICCCN 2003), 38-43 ( Oct. 2003).
6. Conclusion
general comparison were made of the major
replacement policies in wireless networks
and summarized the main points. Numerous
replacement policies are proposed for
wireless networks, but a few for cooperative
caching in ad hoc networks.The operation,
strengths and drawback of these algorithms
are summarized. Finally some alternatives
are provided for cache replacement and
identified topics for future research.
7.References
[1] C. Aggarwal, J.L. Wolf, and P.S. Yu,
Caching on the World Wide Web, IEEE
Trans. Knowledge and Data Eng.,
vol. 11, no. 1, pp. 94-107, Jan./Feb. 1999

97
www.iaetsd.in
[6] Narottam Chand, R.C. Joshi and Manoj

Misra, "Cooperative Caching Strategy in
Mobile Ad Hoc Networks Based on
Clusters," International Journal of Wireless
Personal Communications special issue on
Cooperation in Wireless Networks, Vol. 43,
Issue 1, pp. 41-63, Oct 2007
[7] Li, W., Chan, E., & Chen, D. (2007).
Energy- efficient cache replacement policies
for cooperative caching in mobile
ad hoc network. In Proceedings of the IEEE
WCNC (pp33493354).
[8]. B. Z heng, J. Xu, and D. L ee. Cache
invalidation and replacement strategies for
location dependent data in mobile
environments,. IEEE Transactions on
Computers, 51(10) : 11411153, October
2002.
[9]. Mary Magdalene Jane.F, Yaser Nouh
and R. Nadarajan,Network Distance Based
Cache Replacement Policy for LocationDependent Data in Mobile Environment,
Proceedings of the 2008 Ninth International
Conference on Mobile Data Management
Workshops ,IEEE Computer Society
Washington,DC,USA,2008.
[10].Kumar, A., Sarje, A.K. and Misra, M.
Prioritised Predicted Region based Cache
Replacement Policy for location dependent
data in mobile environment, Int. J. Ad Hoc
and Ubiquitous Computing , Vol. 5, No. 1,
(2010) pp.5667.
[11]. B. Zheng, J. Xu, and D. L. Lee. cache
invalidation and replacement strategies for
location-dependent
data
in
mobile
environments. IEEE Trans. on Comp,
51(10):1421, 2002.
[12] Q. Ren and M. Dhunham. Using
semantic caching to manage location
dependent data in mobile computing. Proc.
Of ACM/IEEE MobiCom, 99:210221,
2000.
[13] K . Lai, Z .Tari, and P. Bertok .
Mobility aware cache replacement for
location dependent information services. In
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Technical Report T R- 04-04 ( R MI T

School of C S & I T ),2004.

98
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 101
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Cellular Mobile Broadband using

Millimeter-Wave for 5G systems
B. Praveen Balaji, R. Sriram
UG Scholar, Jaya Engineering, Chennai.
praveenbalaji8@gmail.com, sriram3838@gmail.com
ABSTRACT
Due to the increasing popularity of smart
phones and other mobile data devices such as
netbooks and ebook readers, mobile data traffic
is experiencing unprecedented growth. As
today's cellular providers attempt to deliver
high quality, low latency video and multimedia
applications for wireless devices, they are
limited to a carrier frequency spectrum ranging
between 700 MHz and 2.6 GHz. The global
bandwidth shortage facing wireless carriers has
motivated the exploration of the underutilized
millimeter wave (mm-wave) frequency spectrum
for
future
broadband
cellular
communicationnetworks.In this article, we
explore the 3300 GHz spec-trum and describe
a millimeter-wave mobile broadband (MMB)
system that utilizes this vast spectrum for
mobile communication. We describe the
millimeter-wave spectrumand its propagation
characteristics. We then discuss the network
architecture, followed by the air interface design
of the MMB system. After that, we conclude the
article with a summary and brief discussion of
future work.
INTRODUCTION
A vast amount of spectrum in the 3300 GHz
range remains underutilized. The 330 GHz
spectrum is generally referred to as the super
high frequency (SHF) band, while 30300 GHz is
referred to as the extremely high frequency
(EHF) or millimeter-wave band. mm-wave
frequencies could be used to augment the
currently saturated 700MHz to 2.6 GHz radio
sprectrum bands for wireless communications.
The combination of cost effective CMOS
technology that can now operate well into the mwave frequency bands, and high-gain, steerable
antennas at the mobile and base station,
strengthens the viability of mm-wave carrier
frequencies
allow
for
larger
bandwidth
allocations, which translate directly to higher
data transfer rates. Mm-wave sprectrum would
allow service providers to significantly expand
the channel bandwidths far beyond the present
20 MHz channels used by 4G customers.
By increasing the RF channel bandwidth for

mobile radio channels, the data capacity is greatly
increased, while the latency for digital traffic
is greatly decreased, thus supporting much
better internet-based access and applications that
require minimal latency. Mm-wave frequencies, due
to much smaller wavelength,
may
exploit
polarization and new spatical signal processing
techniques, such as massive MIMO and adaptive
beamforming. Given this significant jump in
bandwidth and new capabilities offered by mmwaves, the base station-to-device links, as well as
backhaul links between base stations, will be able
to handle much greater capacity than today's
4G
networks
in
highly populated ares.
The
current
fourth-generation
(4G)
systems including LTE and Mobile WiMAX
already
use advanced technologies such as
orthogonal
frequency-division
multiplexing
(OFDM),
multipleinput
multiple-output
(MIMO),
multi-user
diversity,
link
adaptation, turbo code, and hybrid automatic
repeat request (HARQ) in order to achieve
spectral efficiencies close to theoretical limits in
terms of bits per second per Hertz per cell [1].
With
limited
room
for
further
spectralefficiency improvement, another possibility
to increase capacity per geographic area is to
deploy many smaller cells such as femtocells and
heterogeneous
networks.
However,
because
capacity can only scale linearly with the number
of cells, small cells alone will not be able to meet
the capacity required to accommodate orders of
magnitude increases in mobile data traffic.
Millimeter-wave communication systems
that can achieve multigigabit data rates at a
distance of up to a few kilometers already exist
for point-to-point communication. However,
the compo-nent electronics used in these
systems, including power amplifiers, low noise
amplifiers, mixers, and antennas, are too big
in size and consume too much power to be
applicable in mobile com-munication.

99
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 102

57 64
3 GHz
The portion of the
164
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

200
300 GHz
RF spectrum above 3
GHz has been largely
54 GHz
99 GHz
99 GHz
unexploited for commercial wireless

applications. More
recently there has
All cellular mobile

communications
Potential 252 GHz

available bandwidth
been some interest
60 GHz oxygen
absorption band
in exploring this
Water vapor (H2O)

absorption band
(a)
spectrum for shortrange and
28.35
27.50
28.60
29.10
29.25
29.50
31.075 31.225
GHz
fixed wireless
communications.
75
M
Hz
150
MHz
850 MHz
150
MHz
75
M
Hz
Block A - 1.15 GHz
LMDS bands
Block B - 150 MHz

(b)
71
76
81
5 GHz
86
92
94
2
GHz
5 GHz
95 GHz
0.9
GHz
12.9 GHz
70 / 80 / 90 GHz bands
(c)
Figure 1. Millimeter-wave spectrum.
MILLIMETER WAVE SPECTRUM

UNTETHERING THE 3300 GHZ SPECTRUM
Almost all commercial radio communications
including AM/FM radio, high-definition TV, cellular, satellite communication, GPS, and Wi-Fi have
been contained in a narrow band of the RF spectrum in 300 MHz3 GHz. This band is generally
referred to as the sweet spot due to its favorable
propagation characteristics for commercial wireless
applications.
Within the 3300 GHz spectrum, up to

252 GHz can potentially be suitable for
mobile broadband as depicted in Fig. 1.
Millimeter waves are absorbed by oxygen and
water vapor in the atmosphere. The frequencies
in the 5764 GHz oxygen absorption band can
experience attenuation of about 15 dB/km as
the
oxygen
molecule
(O2)
absorbs
electromegnetic energy at around 60 GHz. The
absorption rate by water vapor (H 2O)
depends on the amount of water vapor and
can be up to tens of dBs in the range of 164200
GHz [2]. We exclude these bands for mobile
broadband applications as the transmis-sion
range in these bands will be limited. With a
reasonable assumption that 40 percent of the
remaining spectrum can be made available over
time, millimeter-wave mobile broadband (MMB)
opens the door for a possible 100 GHz new
spectrum for mobile communication more
than 200 times the spectrum currently allocated
for this purpose below 3 GHz.
Table 1. Current 2G,3G,4G

and LTE-A spectrum and
bandwidth allocations
100
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 103
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
MILLIMETER-WAVE PROPAGATION
Attenuation (dB)
FREE-SPACE PROPAGATION
Millimeter waves travel solely by line-of-sight, and
are blocked by building walls and attenuated by
foliage. Transmission loss of millimeter wave is
accounted for principally by free space loss. A
misconception
among
wireless
general
engineers is that free-space propagation loss
depends on frequen-cy, so higher frequencies
propagate less well than lower frequencies. The
reason for this miscon-ception is the underlying
assumption often used in radio engineering
textbooks that the path loss is calculated at a
specific frequency between two isotropic
antennas or /2 dipoles, whose effective aperture
area
increases
with
the
wavelength
(decreases with carrier frequency). An antenna
with a larger aperture has larger gain than a
smaller one as it captures more energy from a
passing radio wave. However, with shorter wavelengths more antennas can be packed into the
same area.
In addition, large numbers of
antennas enable transmitter and receiver
beamforming with high gains.[3]
REFLETION, DIFFRACTION, FOLIAGE AND
OTHER PENETRATION LOSSES
Another common myth in wireless engineering
community is that rain and atmosphere make mmwave spectrum useless for mobile communications.
However, when one considers the fact that today's
cell sizes in urban environments are on the order of
200 m, it becomes clear that mm-wave cellular can
overcome these issues.
Material
Thickness (cm)
< 3 GHz
[6, 8]
40 GHz
[7]
60 GHz
[6]
Drywall
2.5
5.4
6.0
Office whiteboard
1.9
0.5
9.6
Clear glass
0.3/0.4
6.4
2.5
3.6
Mesh glass
0.3
7.7
10.2
Chipwood
1.6
.6
Wood
0.7
5.4
3.5
Plasterboard
1.5
2.9
Mortar
10
160
Brick wall
10
t178
Concrete
10
17.7
175
Table 2. Attenuations for different materials.

For 3300 GHz frequencies, atmosphere gaseous
losses and precipitation attenuation are typically less
than a few dB per kilometer [2], excluding the
oxygen and water absorption bands. The loss due
to reflection and diffraction depends greatly on
the material and the surface. Although reflection and diffraction reduce the range of millimeter-wave, it also facilitates non-line-of-sight
(NLOS) communication.
While signals at lower frequencies can penetrate more easily through buildings, millimeterwave signals do not penetrate most solid
materials very well. The indoor coverage in this
case can be provided by other means such as
indoor millimeter-wave femtocell or Wi-Fi
solutions.
Figure 2. Atmospheric attenuation in dB/km as a function

of frequency over the EHF band. Peaks in absorption at
specific frequencies are a problem, due to atmosphere
constituents such as water vapor (H2O) and carbon
dioxide (CO2)
Figure 3. Summary of penetration losses through various

common building materials
Weissbergers modified exponential decay

model, or simply, Weissbergers model, is a radio
wave propagation model that estimates the path loss
due to the presence of one or more trees in a pointto-point telecommunication link. This model
belongs to the category Foliage or Vegetation
models. Foliage losses for millimeter waves are
signif-icant and can be a limiting impairment for
prop-agation in some cases. Weissbergers model
is formally expressed as
where,
L = The loss due to foliage. Unit: decibels (dB)
f = The transmission frequency. Unit: gigahertz
(GHz)
d = The depth of foliage along the path. Unit:
meters (m)

101
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 104
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Figure 5. Atmospheric absorption across mmfwave frequencies in dB/km. nhe
attenuation caused by atmospheric absorption is 0.0l2 dB over 200m at 2, GHz and

0.0lw dB over 200m at 3, GHz.Frequecies from x0 to l00 GHz and l25 to lw0 GHz also
have small losses
Figure 4. Rain attenuation in dB/km across frequency

at various rainfall rates. nhe rain attenuation at 2, GHz
has an attenuation of xdB/km for a very heavy rainfall
of 25 mm/hr. If cell coverage regions are 200m in
radius attenuation will reduce to l.4 dB
Therefore, a mechanism such as

supporting emergency communications
over cellular bands when millimeter-wave
com-munications are disrupted by heavy
rains should be considered as part of the
MMB system design.
COHERENCE TIME, DOPPLER SPREAD AND
MULTIPATH
In communications systems, a communication
channel may change with time. Coherence time is
the time duration over which the channel
impulse response is considered to be not varying.
Such channel variation is much more significant
in wireless communications systems, due to
Doppler effects. The Doppler of a wireless
channel depends on the carrier frequency and
mobility. The Doppler shift values of
incoming waves on different angles at the
receiver are different, resulting in a phenomenon
called Doppler spread. In the case of MMB, the
narrow beams at the transmitter and receiver
will significantly reduce angular spread of
the incoming waves, which in turn reduces
the Doppler spread. In addition, as the
incoming waves are concentrated in a certain
direction, there will be a non-zero bias in the
Doppler spectrum, which will be largely compensated by the automatic frequency control (AFC)
loop in the receiver. Therefore, the time-domain
variation of an MMB channel is likely to be
much less than that observed by omnidirectional
antennas in a rich scattering environment.
With narrow transmitter and receiver beams,
the multipath components of millimeter waves
are limited. Studies show that the root mean
square (RMS) of the power delay profile (PDP)
of a millimeter-wave channel in an urban environment is 110 ns, and the coherent bandwidth
of the channel is around 10100 MHz [4].
However, it is noted that the transmitter and

receiver antenna gains used in these studies are
higher than those used in MMB. Therefore, it is
possi-ble that in an MMB system a longer path
can be observed and the coherence bandwidth is
small-er than those reported in these studies.
MMB NETWORK ARCHITECTURE

A STANDALONE MMB NETWORK
An MMB network consists of multiple
MMB base stations that cover a geographic
area. In order to ensure good coverage, MMB
base sta-tions need to be deployed with higher
density than macrocellular base stations. In
general, roughly the same site-to-site distance
as micro-cell or picocell deployment in an urban
environ-ment is recommended. An example
MMB network is shown in Fig. 6.
The transmission and/or reception in an
MMB system are based on narrow beams, which
suppress the interference from neighboring
MMB base stations and extend the range of an
MMB link. This allows significant overlap of
coverage among neighboring base stations.
Unlike cellular systems that partition the geographic area into cells with each cell served by
one or a few base stations, the MMB base stations form a grid with a large number of nodes
to which an MMB mobile station can attach. The
MMB base station grid eliminates the problem
of poor link quality at the cell edge that is inherent in cellular system and enables high-quality
equal grade of service (EGOS) regardless of the
location of a mobile.
With the high density of MMB base stations,
the cost to connect every MMB base station via
a wired network can be significant. One solution
to mitigate the cost (and expedite the deployment) is to allow some MMB base stations to
connect to the backhaul via other MMB base
stations. Due to large beamforming gains, the
MMB inter-BS backhaul link can be deployed in
the same frequency as the MMB access link

102
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 105
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

MBS_0
Packet data
server gateway
MBS_1
MBS_2
MBS_3
CBS_A
MBS_6
MBS_5
MBS_4
50
0m
m
1k
MS1
MBS_8
1k
Network
MS1
CBS_B
MS2 MBS_7
MBS_9
MBS_10
MS4
MBS_11
CBS_C
MBS_14
MBS_12
MS3
Cellular base station (CBS)
MBS_13
MMB base station (MBS)
Fixed line between MBS and CBS
Cellular communication link

MMB + 4G base station
MMB base station
Fixed line between CBS / MBS and

packet data server / gateway
MMBcommunication link
(a)
(b)
Figure 6. MMB network: a) architecture; b) hybrid MMG + 4G system.

the downlink to and uplink from an MMB
mobile station without causing much interference. This greatly increases the deployment flexibility of MMB and allows MMB to achieve
higher-density deployment than femtocells or
heterogeneous networks deployed in sub-3 GHz
spectrum.
Another challenge with millimeter-wave is
the low efficiency of RF devices such as power
amplifiers and multi-antenna arrays with current
technology. A solution to avoid multi-antenna
arrays at the MMB base station is to use fixed
beams or sectors with horn antennas. Horn
antennas can provide similar gains and beam
widths as sector antennas in current cellular systems in a cost-effective manner [5]. The mobile
station receiver still needs to use a multi-antenna array to form a beamforming pattern toward
the base station. As the mobile station moves
around, beamforming weights can be adjusted so
that the beam is always pointing toward the base
station.
HYBRID MMB + 4G SYSTEM

It is expected that 4G systems will have good
coverage and reliability when MMB systems
start to deploy. A hybrid MMB + 4G system can
improve coverage and ensure seamless user
experience in mobile applications. In a hybrid
MMB + 4G system, system information,
control channel, and feed-back are transmitted
in the 4G system, making the entire
millimeter-wave spectrum available for data
communication. One example of a hybrid
MMB + 4G system is shown in Fig. 3b.
Compared with millimeter waves, the radio
waves at < 3 GHz frequencies can better penetrate obstacles and are less sensitive to non-lineof-sight (NLOS) communication link or other
impairments such as absorption by foliage, rain,
and other particles in the air. Therefore, it is
advantageous to transmit important control
channels and signals via cellular radio frequencies, while utilizing the millimeter waves for high
data rate communication.
MMB AIR INTERFACE DESIGN

SPATIAL FILTERING
Spatial filtering is a signal processing technique used
in sensor arrays for directional signal transmission or
reception. This is achieved by combining elements in
a phased array in such a way that signals at particular
angles experience constructive interference while
others experience destructive interference. Spatial
Filtering can be used at both the transmitting and
receiving ends in order to achieve spatial selectivity.
Spatial Filtering otherwise known as
Beamforming is a key enabling technology of
MMB. For MMB transceivers, the small size
(/2 dipoles) and separation (also around /2) of
millimeter-wave antennas allow a large number
of antennas and thus achieve high beamforming
gain in a relative small area (e.g., tens of antennas per square centimeter area at 80 GHz carrier frequency). Additionally, with a large number
of antennas and high-gain (and thus narrow)
beams, antenna technologies such as spatial-division multiple access (SDMA) can be implemented readily.

103
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 106
Beamforming can be achieved in digital baseband, analog baseband, or RF front-end. With

digital beamforming and multiple RF chains, it
is possible to transmit multiple streams of data
simultaneously, thus enabling SDMA or MIMO
operation. However, the cost of implementing
one RF chain per antenna can be prohibitive,
especially given the large number of antennas in
MMB. With analog baseband beamforming or
RF beamforming, one or a few RF chains can be
used. In that case, the number of data streams
that can be transmitted is limited by the number
of RF chains. These approaches require fewer
RF components and are typically chosen for lowcost/low-power solutions.
Transmit beamforming is generally more
challenging, requiring either antenna weights
feedback from the receiver or antenna calibrations. Moreover, due to low efficiency of millimeter-wave power amplifiers with the current
technology, battery power consumption is another issue for mobile station transmitter beamforming. To reduce the cost and complexity of
mobile stations, a phased approach where initial
deployments are hybrid MMB + 4G systems
with downlink-only transmission in the millimeter-wave band can be considered. This
removesthe requirement for mobile stations to
transmit in the millimeter-wave band.
MULTIPLEXING SCHEME
In MMB, we use OFDM and single-carrier
waveform for flexibility in support multiple
bandwidths, simpler equalizer and MIMO
receiver, and ability to support efficient multiple
access,
etc.Orthogonal
frequency-division
multiplexing (OFDM) is a method of encoding
digital data on multiple carrier frequencies.
A large number of closely spaced orthogonal
sub-carrier signals are used to carry data on
several parallel data streams or channels. Each
sub-carrier is modulated with a conventional
modulation scheme (such as quadrature
amplitude modulation or phase-shift keying) at a
low symbol rate, maintaining total data rates
similar to conventional single-carrier modulation
schemes in the same bandwidth.
Figure 7. Idealized system model for Transmitter

An inverse FFT is computed on each set of
symbols, giving a set of complex time-domain
samples. These samples are then quadrature-mixed to
passband in the standard way. The real and imaginary
components are first converted to the analogue
domain using digital-to-analogue converters (DACs);
the analogue signals are then used to modulate cosine
and sine waves at the carrier frequency, These signals
are then summed to give the transmission signal,
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Figure 8. Idealized system model for receiver
The receiver picks up the signal \scriptstyle r(t),

which is then quadrature-mixed down to baseband
using cosine and sine waves at the carrier frequency.
This also creates signals centered on low-pass filters
are used to reject these. The baseband signals are then
sampled and digitised using analog-to-digital
converters (ADCs), and a forward FFT is used to
convert back to the frequency domain. This N parallel
streams, each of which is converted to a binary stream
using an appropriate symbol detector. These streams
are then re-combined into a serial stream, which is an
estimate of the original binary stream at the
transmitter.
Additionally, MMB also supports transmission with single-carrier waveform. Single-carrier
waveform has lower peak-to-average-power ratio
(PAPR) than OFDM. . For single-carrier
transmissions with binary phase shift keying
(BPSK) or quaternary PSK (QPSK), an ADC
with 24 bits would suf-fice, which greatly
reduces the power consump-tion of the MMB
receiver.
LINK BUDGET
The key factors that determine the downlink link
budget of an MMB system are the base station
transmission power, transmitter and receiver
beamforming gains, and path loss.
Table 3 shows the link budget for four different MMB systems. A 20 dB margin is assumed
to account for cable loss and losses due to penetration, reflection, or diffraction. A noise figure
of 10 dB and an implementation loss of 5 dB are
assumed at the receiver. As shown in Table 2,
with 35 dBm transmission power, 1 GHz system
bandwidth, 28 GHz carrier frequency, and realistic assumptions of transmitter and receiver
antenna gains (case 1), more than 2 Gb/s can be
achieved at 1 km distance.
CONCLUSION
Given the worldwide need for cellular spectrum and
the relativelylimited amount of research done on
mm-wave mobile communications, we have
discussed frequency range 3-300 GHz to gain insight
on path loss, building penetration loss, Doppler
spread and multipath for the design of future mmwave cellular broadband systems.

104
www.iaetsd.in
PI LAYOUT
5/19/11
9:04 AM
Page 107
Due to the narrow beam width of MMB

transmissions, the interfer-ence among MMB
base stations is a lot smaller than traditional
cellular systems, and the cover-age of
neighboring
base
stations
significantly
overlap. As a result, the MMB base stations
form a grid that can provide communication
with good link quality regardless of the mobile
stations location within the coverage of the grid.
In order to operate in an urban mobile
envi-ronment while keeping a low overhead, we
chose the MMB subcarrier spacing to be 480
kHz and the CP to be 520 ns. We also designed
the frame structure to facilitate hybrid MMB +
4G opera-tion. In the link budget analysis, we
show that a 2 Gb/s data rate is achievable at 1 km
distance with millimeter waves in an urban mobile
environment.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
We would like to thank our college staffs and
officials for providing us with constant support
and encouragement.
REFERENCES
[1] F.Khan, LTE for 4G Mobile Broadband,:Air Interface

Technologies and Performance, Cambridge Univ. Press,
2009.
[2] D.M. Pozar, Microwave Engineering, 3rd ed., Wiley,
2005.
[3]FCC, "Millimeterwave Propagation: Spectrum
Management Implications," Office of Eng. and Tech.,
Bulletin no.70, July, 1997
[4]H.Xu et al., "Measurements and Models for 38-GHZ
Point-to-Multipoint Radiowave Propogation," IEEE JSAC,
col.18, no. 3, Mar.2000.
[5]C.A. Balanis, Antenna Theory: Analysis and Design, 3rd
ed., Wiley, 2005.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
MMB link budget analysis
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
Case 4
TX power (dBm)
35.00
35.00
25.00
25.00
TX antenna gain (dBi)
30.00
30.00
30.00
30.00
Carrier frequency (GHz)
28.00
72.00
28.00
72.00
Distance (km)
1.00
1.00
0.50
0.50
Propagation loss (dB)
121.34
129.55
115.32
123.53
Other losses
20.00
20.00
20.00
20.00
RX antenna gain (dBi)
15.00
15.00
15.00
15.00
Received power (dBm)
61.34
69.55
65.32
73.53
Bandwidth (GHz)
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
Thermal PSD (dBm/Hz)
174.00
174.00
174.00
174.00
Noise figure (dB)
10.00
10.00
10.00
10.00
Thermal noise (dBm)
74.00
74.00
74.00
74.00
SNR (dB)
12.66
4.45
8.68
0.47
Implementation loss (dB)
5.00
5.00
5.00
5.00
Data rate (Gb/s)
2.77
0.91
1.74
0.4
Table 3. MMB link budget.

105
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
ELECTRIC ROAD CLEANER

AVINASH PRABU, S.KAUSHIK, PRIYANKA PRAKASH, HARITHA HARIDASAN, S.BALAMURUGAN,
S.VIGNESH
Avinashprabu1993@gmail.com,sudarshan.ampli@gmail.com,priyankasun@gmail.com,
harithaharidasan15@gmail.com, balasekar@ymail.com,vigneshsanman@gmail.com
Ph.no:9941777029, 9841350409
PRINCE SHRI VENKATESHWARA PADMAVATHY ENGG COLLEGE, PONMAR
ABSTRACT
Although conventional sweeping vehicles
already exist, they are designed to operate on a
small scale and use IC engines which are
proving to be more and more expensive and
polluting with increasing fuel costs and
increasing global warming. The whole system
comprises of three separate DC motor systems
each of which control the vacuum system, the
sweeping system and the overall propulsion
system of the vehicle. The amount of carbon
Cleanliness is the most important aspect of

every proper civilization. In this paper we
look into the aspect of electric vehicles being
used to maintain a citys cleanliness. We
focus on the use of dc motors to create a
vehicle that can be effectively used to
maintain road cleanliness. This paper is
aimed at designing a vehicle that can both
maintain operational efficiency and stick to
its task. The system comprises of dc motor
systems and separate speed and current
control circuits.
dioxide emitted is only 12.6 g/km while it

is 60 to 130g/km in other internal
combustion engine cars.
Keywords: Brushless DC motor (BLDC) ,

motor circuit (MC), sweeper circuit(SC),
vacuum circuit(VC), ultrasonic sensor
circuit(USC), Internal
combustion(IC),BatteryElectric
Vechicle(BEV).
II. SYSTEM DESIGN

PROPULSION SYSTEM
It is the system that is used to propel the
entire vehicle and comprises of a single
DC motor complete with a controller
circuit that automatically varies the speed
of the motor in accordance to control
inputs.
I. INTRODUCTION
With increasing vehicular traffic and road
usage levels, it is necessary for a machine that
can effectively maintain road related rubbish
to be developed. The electric road cleaner aims
to utilize the high torque that a DC motor can
provide simultaneous vehicular propulsion and
at the same time sweep and vacuum the road
thereby combining the work conventionally
done with different systems under one.
VACCUM SYSTEM
It is the heart of the cleaning process and
is used to suck in all the rubbish present on
the road that is suitably swept in by the
sweeper circuit.
SWEEPER SYSTEM
It is used to suitably push the rubbish
towards the vacuum suction point. It

106
www.iaetsd.in
consists of two DC motors coupled to four

sweepers along with a stepper motor all of
which work together as a unit.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
This battery system is used for propelling

the main motor to drive the vehicle. The
batteries produce an output of 120V and
comprise of 5-24V batteries connected in
series and have 6 rows of such batteries
and the switch over between the rows is
done by a micro-controller.
SENSOR SYSTEM
The sweeping system is connected to a
mount that can be raised or lowered
depending on the gradient of the road and
obstacles. The sensor and sweeper systems
work in tandem.
Sub-system Battery:
This is used to run the vacuum and
sweeping sub-systems and produce an
output of 12V and comprise of 5-12V
batteries connected in parallel and again
the discharging is controlled by a
dedicated micro-controller.
STEPPER MOTOR SYSTEM

It is used to lower or raise the sweepers
according to the sensor inputs. It is
controlled by a microcontroller and rotates
180 deg on each command pulse.
2. MOTOR
The motor used is a BLDC motor. It can
produce 10 HP output power with an input
voltage of 120V. The current rating is
70A, maximum speed is 3450rpm. The
motor gets its input from the controller.
The motor is directly coupled to the
wheels.
III. PROPULSION SYSTEM
3. CONTROLLER
The above shows the basic block diagram of a

BEV. The battery acts as the power source and
the controller modulates the power supplied to
the motor in accordance to the control inputs.
1. BATTERY SYSTEM
In place of an internal combustion engine,
the proposed car has a bank of batteries -the battery system. The battery system is
composed of two subsystems 1. For the
propulsion motor 2. For the sweeping and
vacuuming systems.
The controller used in this vehicle is a dcdc controller manufactured in the name
CURTIS 1231c-86XX. The above shows
Propulsion Battery:

107
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Gear
torque=motor
torque*(input
speed/output speed)*gear efficiency
the block diagram of the DC-DC

controller, it works akin to a chopper but
has inner feedback and reference loops.
The pedal press is converted into voltage
level by a suitable throttle potentiometer
which is given as the reference input to the
controller. It has five terminals namely,
Input speed=3000rpm
Output speed=1000rpm
Gear efficiency=0.85
B+: Positive terminal of the battery pack.
Gear torque=50*(3000/1000)*0.85
B-: Negative terminal of the battery pack.
=127.5Nm
M-: Motor ground connection.

A2: Armature winding ground.
A1 of the motor is connected to the battery
positive while S2 is connected to A2 and
S1 is connected to M-.KSI is switch that
connects the reference voltage to the
controller.
IV. SWEEPER SYSTEM

The sweeping system is a set of four
rubber sweepers that act to push the dust
inwards to the vacuum system. The
sweepers are actuated by two motors and
are connected via a gear so as to ensure
that enough torque can be produced for the
operation. The motors are rated at 0.5HP
and have can run over a range of input
voltages with the preferred one being 24V.
Controller characteristics:
Voltage (V): 96-144.
Current (A): 500.
2 MIN RATING (A): 500.
5 MIN RATING (A): 375.
1 HOUR RATING (A): 225.
The above shows the block diagram of the

sweeping system, the control input dictates
the output speed of the DC motor thereby
controlling the speed of the sweepers as
needed.
Output torque calculation:

P= (2*pi*N*T)/60.
P: Motor Output power(rated)=20 HP.
1. CHOPPER CIRCUIT
T: Output torque.
N: Operating speed of motor.
Re-arranging:
T= (60*P)/(2*pi*N).
T=(60*20*765)/(2*3.1415*3000).
T=50 NM(approx).
The chopper circuit is a buck-boost

converter that is used to vary the output

108
www.iaetsd.in
voltage in accordance with the inputs from

the main control panel. By selecting the
appropriate option, the control unit can be
used to operate the chopper in buck/boost
mode thereby varying the output speed of
the motor.
1.1. OPERATION AS
CONVERTER
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
inductor L and via Tr2, directly back to

the supply negative terminal charging
up the magnetic field around L. Whilst
this is happening D2 cannot conduct as
its anode is being held at ground
potential by the heavily conducting Tr2.
For the duration of the on period, the
load is being supplied entirely by the
charge on the capacitor C, built up on
previous oscillator cycles. The gradual
discharge of C during the on period (and
its subsequent recharging) accounts for
the amount of high frequency ripple on
the output voltage, which is at a
potential of approximately VS + VL.
BUCK
In this mode Tr2 is turned off, and Tr1 is

switched on and off by a high frequency
square wave from the control unit. When
the gate of Tr1 is high, current flows
though L, charging its magnetic field,
charging C and supplying the load. The
Schottky diode D1 is turned off due to the
positive voltage on its cathode.
2. CONTROL CIRCUIT
1.2. OPERATION AS A BOOST

CONVERTER
The PWM wave is a square wave with

varying duty cycles, the IC is six Schmitt
trigger inverter circuit that produces high
frequency variably duty cycle square
output. This acts as the gate signal to the
switches aiding in the conduction.
In Boost Converter mode, Tr1 is turned

on continually and the high frequency
square wave applied to Tr2 gate. During
the on periods when Tr2 is conducting,
the input current flows through the

109
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
thyristor switch we can control the output

voltage and thus the speed of the motor.
V. VACUUM SYSTEM
Vaccum-2:
The second vacuum system acts as a
suction/blower device based on the season.
In summer when the moisture on the roads
is minimal the setup is used as a vacuum
device. During rainy seasons, the setup
funnels hot air from the main motor
toward the ground thus drying up moisture
and enabling easier vacuuming and
preventing sand from sticking to the
ground. This is also a universal motor
coupled to the fan controlled by a chopper
and the field has a reversal circuit used to
control the direction of rotation.
The vacuum system is used to suck in the

dust present on the road that is swept
toward it by the sweeping system. The
vacuum system comprises of two different
vacuum pumps each of which operate
individually. The above diagram shows the
block diagram of the two individual
vacuum systems.
Vacuum-1:
This a universal motor driven vacuum
creator used to suck in the dust irrespective
of the season and road conditions. The
universal motor is coupled to the fan and is
driven by a chopper which is fed from a
lead acid battery source. The chopper used
is a BOOST chopper.
Boost Chopper:
The above shows the block diagram of the
reversal system. The motor has two
windings one for forward operation and
the other for reverse operation, by using a
DPDT switch to switch between the
windings, the direction of operation of the
universal motor can be reversed.
Universal motor:
Universal motors can rotate at a speed of
up to 20000 rpm. It is used for low torque
applications. The motor used in the
vacuum system is a 1400W 12v DC motor.
The above diagram is the boost chopper

used; by varying the firing pulse of the

110
www.iaetsd.in
Calculation of the radius of the impeller:
raised
by
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the
stepper
motor.
Suction Pressure=(1/2)*rho*V^2.
rho-Density of air=1.225.
Suction Pressure: 30 KPA.
V-Velocity of the fan blade.
Re-arranging:
V=Sqrt((2*Suction Pressure)/rho).
V=Sqrt((2*30*10^3)/1.225).
V=Sqrt(48,979.592).
V=221.31 M/SEC.
V=(R*W*2*pi)/60
Where,
R-Radius of fan blade.
W-Speed in RPM.
Re-arranging:
R= (60*V)/(W*2*pi).
R= (221.31*60)/(10000*2*3.1415).
R= 13278.6/62830.
R=0.211M.
The ultrasonic ping sensor provides an

easy method of distance measurement.
Interfacing to a microcontroller is a snap.
A single I/O pin is used to trigger an
ultrasonic burst (well above human
hearing) and then "listen" for the echo
return pulse. The sensor measures the time
required for the echo return, and returns
this value to the microcontroller as a
variable-width pulse via the same I/O pin.
VI. SWEEPER PROTECTION

SYSTEM:
The sensor provides precise, non-contact

distance measurements within a 2 cm to 3
m range. Ultrasonic measurements work in
any lighting condition, making this a good
choice to supplement infrared object
detectors. Simple pulse in/pulse out
communication requires just one I/O pin.
Burst indicator LED shows measurement
in progress.
The 5V pin of the PING is connected to
the 5V pin on the Arduino, the GND pin is
connected to the GND pin, and the SIG
(signal) pin is connected to digital pin 7 on
the Arduino.
The sensor output pin is connected to an
arduino board which converts the analog
signals from the sensor to digital values
which act as input to the microcontroller.
The microcontroller reads the output of the
arduino and rotates the stepper motor
according to the same. If the distance
measured by the sensor is lesser than or
1. PING SENSOR:
The ping sensor is an ultrasonic sensor
which measures the distance from the
vehicle and any obstacle. If the distance is
lesser than 2m, the sweeper system will be

111
www.iaetsd.in
equal to 2m, the input to the controller will

1 otherwise the input will be 0.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
VII. ADVANTAGES
The principal advantages of this system
involve its large adaptability and relative cost
efficiency. Absence of regular fuelling reduces
fuel costs and the design of the system with
only a electric energy source means that there
is no need for a separate oil fuel for the vehicle
and additional electricity for the other systems.
2. FLOW CHART FOR STEPPER

MOTOR CONTROL:
VIII. CONCLUSION
The proposed paper deals with the use of a electric
vehicle for sweeping and vacuuming purposes. An
electric vehicle has the dual advantage of both being
relatively eco-friendly as well as much more cost
efficient. Instead of individual systems for the sweeper
and cleaner using electric systems and operating the
vehicle on combustion engine, the systems use of pure
electric propulsion means the unit can be designed as a
whole. The entire vehicle can be modified and
redesigned as needed for operation. The vehicle can save
costs on fuel in the long run as well as the fact that
electricity remains the only future resource for mankind.
This vehicle can also reduce road pollution and thereby
help reduce the amount of accidents that occur due to
improper road maintenance.
3. ALGORITHM:
Step 1: start the process
Step 2: send trigger signals to the
microcontroller
IX. REFERENCES
Step 3: read the output of the sensor
[1] en.wikipedia.org
[2] http://www.evworld.com
[3] http://www.saxton.org
[4] http://www.fueleconomy.gov
[5] http://auto.howstuffworks.com
Step 4(A) : if the output of the sensor is 0,

goto step 4(B): Else goto step 5.
Step 5: initialize the data pointer
[6] SERBIAN JOURNAL OF ELECTRICAL

ENGINEERING
Step 6: push data 0C to the higher byte of

data pointer and 00 to lower byte.
Vol. 8, No. 2, May 2011, 127-146

[7] Kueck, J.D., J.R. Gray, R. C. Driver
and J. S. Hsu, Assessment of Available
Methods for Evaluating InService Motor Efficiency, Oak Ridge
National Laboratory, (Draft) January 1996.
[8] McCoy, Gilbert A. and John G.
Douglass, Energy Efficient Electric
Motor Selection Handbook, U.S.
Department
of Energy, DOE/GO-10096-290, August
1996.
Step 7: move the data to R0.

Step 8: initialize the out port and enable it.
Step 9: move the data in R0 to out port C0.
Step 10: give a delay of 5 seconds.
Step 11: goto step 1.

112
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[9] von Jouanne, Annette, Alan Wallace,

Johnny Douglass, Craig Wohlgemuth, and
Gary Wainwright, A Laboratory
Assessment of In-Service Motor
Efficiency Testing Methods submitted for
publication at the IEEEInternational
Electric Machines and Drives Conference,
Milwaukee, WI, May 1997.
[10] U.S department of
energy,determination of electric motor
load and efficiency,USA, 2009
[11]chapter-21 digital potentiometers and
controllable filters by jack.r.smith
[12]Power Electronics by Dr.P.S.Bimbhra
[13] http://www.learnaboutelectronics.org/PSU/psu33.php.
[14]http://www.robotroom.com/PWM.html.
[15]google-images.
[16]google-books

113
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Analysis of Output DC Current Injection in 100kW grid

connected VACON 8000 Solar inverter
Sneha Sunny George
PG Scholar, Dept of EEE
Amal Jyothi College of Engineering
Kanjirappally, Kottayam
snehasunny2712@gmail.com
Robins Anto
Head of Department
Mar Baselios Christian College of
Engineering and Technology
Sreenath B
Kuttikanam, Peermade
Asst Professor, Dept of EEE
robinsantoiitb@gmail.com
Amal Jyothi College of Engineering
Kanjirappally, Kottayam
bsreenath@amaljyothi.ac.in
efficiency of the system. H-bridge multilevel inverters are
more suitable for renewable energy harvesting due to the
presence of separate DC sources.
Abstract Solar energy technologies have gained much

importance in the recent scenario due to their ability to
produce clean, reliable, useful power. Grid connected
Photovoltaic system requires conversion from DC to AC to
harness the useful energy produced. A Photovoltaic inverter
directly connected to the grid can cause, besides the
generation of several current harmonics, a DC current
component injection. Excessive DC current injection into the
AC network can result in problems such as increased
corrosion in underground equipment and transformer
saturation. The paper aims at evaluating the output DC-current
injection in grid connected inverter used for a 100kW solar
power plant installed at Amal Jyothi College of Engineering,
Koovapally, through experimental analysis.
II.
Grid connected inverters are used to convert the DC power

thus obtained into AC power for further utilization. They are
directly fed solar electricity to the grid. As it does not have the
battery component, the cost of the system is low. The main
quality requirements / factors affecting
these power
converters are total harmonic distortion (THD) level, DC
current injection and power factor, the Impulse Withstanding
ratio (or BIL), High Frequency Noise / Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC), Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker of
Inverter System. Therefore, inverters connecting a PV system
and the public grid are purposefully designed, allowing energy
transfers to and from the public grid. [1-3]
Keywords: Grid connected inverter, DC offset current

I.
Grid Connected Inverter and DC injections
Introduction
Due to approximate short circuit characteristics of
AC network, a little DC voltage component can accidently be
produced by grid connected inverters which can create large
DC current injections. If output transformers are not used,
these inverters must prevent excessive DC current injection,
which may cause detrimental effects on the network
components, in particular the network transformers which can
saturate, resulting in irritant tripping. This may also increase
the losses and reduce the lifetime of the transformers, if not
tripped. Moreover, the existence of the DC current component
can induce metering errors and malfunction of protection
relays and can create an adverse effect on the overall
functioning of the solar power plant.
With the increase in energy crisis concerns growing during

day by day, much recognition is being gained in the potential
of solar energy as a sustainable energy source . Solar energy
adds flexibility to the energy resource mix by decreasing the
dependence on fossil fuels, but the greatest barrier to the
technological expansion in this field is the costs of devices
used for converting sun`s energy in the form of radiation into
useful electrical energy, limited space and energy. Even
though there has been a massive downward tendency in the
price of PV modules, the price of grid connected inverters still
remains high thereby increasing the overall cost. The
efficiency of the plant plays a crucial role in the profit
obtained from sustainable energy resources being harnessed.
The major benefit of designing a reliable, stable, efficient and
lower cost photovoltaic power electronics system is the
availability of reliable and quality power without relying on
the utility grid. It also avoids the major investment in
transmission and distribution. To the nation, the major benefit
lies in the fact that it reduces greenhouse gas emissions,
responding to the increasing energy demands by establishing a
new, high-profiled industry.Therefore, it is required to
minimize the losses and improve the efficiency of power
electronic devices used. Use of multilevel inverters has
increased the quality of waveforms and thereby increasing
Therefore, there are stringent regulations in many countries

to prevent the network from the large DC current injection.
Since most Indian standards published by BIS are aligned to
IEC standards, DC injections up to 1% is being proposed by
the BIS in the Indian standard keeping with IEC 61727. The
H-bridge or Multi Level inverter
eliminates the DC
component of the current by adding switches on the DC side
to clamp the voltage during the zero voltage periods. This
method could be also applied by clamping in the AC side.
1
114
www.iaetsd.in
Both methods could not guarantee elimination of DC

component as the unbalance due to forward power electronic
switch voltages and PWM control can not be removed. [4-6]
III.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
In bright sunshine days, the beam and albedo radiations are

greater . But that during cloudier days the diffused
components are more. The data collection was made for sunny
and rainymonths ie in the months of February, march, April
and May. From, the analysis of the available data, it is found
that the panel has different behavior for varying
insolation,temperature etc. From the experimental Datas
collected, the efficiency of the inverter has reached up to 87%
during high radiation time i.e.the inverter is never operating
near at its full capacity and the average DC to AC conversion
is below 90%.The inverter efficiency very slowly declines
after peak value is reached.PV system at its best is operating
in the 20 to 40% range of rated output and hence is operating
in the 87 to 91% efficiency range during the sunniest periods.
Since the inverter is kept in a mechanical room under the roof
and the temperature differences was not as drastic as they
would be for inverters located outside.
Experimental Result
The main objective of the work is to conduct an analysis

study of output DC injection in grid connected 100kW
VACON 8000 solar inverter installed at the 100kW solar plant
in Amal Jyothi College of Engineering, Kanjirappally, India.
Technical analysis of the plant is done to evaluate the effect of
environmental and climatic conditions on the performance of
the system. The analysis also evaluates the effects DC offset to
variations in its operating conditions. The International Energy
Agency (IEA) Photovoltaic Power Systems Program
describes, in its IEC Standard 61724, the parameters used to
assess the performance of solar PV systems.
Fig 2. Solar insolation vs Time on a rainy day (a) and clear

day (b)
From the analysis done, on a clear day with bright sunshine
the panel receives daily average solar radiation of about
4.56kW/m2 to 5.24kW/m2. During the rainy days the solar
radiation is about 3.13kW/m2 to 4.3kW/m2. Thus from the
data collection it can be classified into two groups. First, high
solar radiation groups that is available from January to mid
April. The average solar insolation available over the region
from the online satellite data the solar radiation available is in
the range of 5 to 6kW/m2 for sunny hours and is around
4kW/m2 for rainy hours. The plot describes the solar radiation
for sunny and rainy days.
Fig 1: Block diagram of 100kW solar plant
The block diagram shown above represents the entire grid

connected solar power plant installed at Amal Jyothi College
of Engineering. 100kW solar panels are used to trap solar
radiations. The energy obtained is converted to useful AC
supply using a VACON built inverter.The energy harnessed
from the sun is used to meet the requirements of an entire 7storey building block. When the energy harnessed is not
sufficient the required amount is taken from the KSEB grid.
The main sources of DC injections are power supply,

computer, network faults, geomagnetic phenomenon,
cycloconverters, lighting circuits/ dimmers, embedded
generators, AC and DC drives and photovoltaic grid inverters.
Due to approximately short circuit characteristics of an AC
network under a DC voltage excitation, a little DC voltage
component that can be accidentally produced by the inverter
will produce large DC current injection. This causes
detrimental effects on the network components, in particular
the network transformers which can saturate, resulting in
irritant tripping. This may also increase the losses in and
reduce the lifetime of the transformers, if not tripped.
Since Kerala is placed in the equatorial region, it has high

solar insolation and temperature. The normal ambient
temperature varies from 23-33degC. The variation in solar
insolation and temperature affects the panel PV panel
performance. Rise in temperature results in degradation of
efficiency and power output of the solar panel. The solar
insolation falling in the earth`s atmosphere has direct or beam
radiation,diffused radiation and albedo or reflected radiation.
2
115
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Moreover, the existence of the DC current component can

induce metering errors and malfunction of protection relays.
The effect of DC currents on the accuracy of Domestic
Electricity watthour meters is both an issue in relation to the
type of meter used and its method of connection to the supply
network. As a consequence, it is believed that the effect of DC
components acting upon watt hour meters merits further
investigation, (best undertaken by direct testing due to the
reluctance of manufacturers to discuss operation).There are
thus stringent regulations in many countries to prevent the
network from the large DC current injection.The solar
insolation Vs output DC injection graph for a period of
3months is shown in the following graph.
Fig 3. Efficiency Vs output power on a rainy day & clear day
The plots show the relation of DC inverter input power and
inverter efficiency for clear and rainy day. The inverter is
found to have a serious defect of frequent shutdown if the
voltage drops to a low value that lasts only for a few seconds.
The estimated fault is due to an error in one of the parameters
coded in the software installed in the inverter. This defect is to
be corrected and rectified otherwise it will result it complete
failure of the system.Solar insolation or irradiance was
measured using the pyranometer at an interval of 30 minutes
along with other details collected. The total energy harnessed
by the installed inverter upto 16th may 2014 is 123992kwh.
Fig 4. solar insolation vs DC offset on a rainy day & clear
day
IV.
The VACON 8000 SOLAR inverters use special digital

control techniques to limit the DC offset in the output obtained
from the inverter. When solar insolation is below the required
value ( i.e.DC output voltage of solar panels is less than 340V)
or when a fault occurs the inverter shutdowns and starts only
5mins after the fault condition is restored. This results in an
error the value (357.67 %)of DC offset measured using
FLUKE power analyzing meter. During March - mid April
2014 time period, the DC o_set varies between 0.04 (during
high solar insolation) -0.19(During low solar-insolation)
percent and during mid April- May 2014 time period,the DC
offset varies between 0.03 during high solar insolation to 0.15
during low solar radiation time period. The maximum allowed
DC offset in India is 1 % of the output obtained.
Conclusion
The overall system efficiency can get effected if DC

current injections are not limited to, the standards specified by
Indian standards and IEEE standards. The installed control
technique in the 100kW inverter limits the DC injection to
standard values unless tripped. Performance evaluation
conducted shows relation of solar insolation on DC offset and
output power on the efficiency of the system
On analytic calculation of the PV inverter efficiency, it

was found that between during the course of the experiment
conducted between March to May on a sunny / clear day the
efficiency of the 100 kW inverter was found to be 82.6%.
Similarly for a rainy day the average efficiency of the inverter
is calculated to be 80.23%. This can even drop if the solar
insolation considerably drops. The daily average PV inverter
output generation and efficiency can be noted to be
360kWh/day at 82.26% efficiency for a clear sky and about
200kWh/day at 80.23% efficiency for a rainy day.
3
116
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
References
[1] Yanqing Li, Cheng Chen, Qing Xie, Research of An Improved Gridconnected PV Generation Inverter Control System, 2010 International
Conference on Power System Technology, pp.1-6, 0ctober 2010
[16]
[2] E. Koutroulis, F. Blaabjerg, Methodology for the optimal design of

transformerless grid-connected PV inverters, IET Power Electron.,
Vol. 5, Iss. 8, pp. 14911499, 2012, June 2012
[17] Report on "CP4742 Grid Connected Renewable Energy System

Technical Guidelines," pp. 1-18, October 2009
[3] Angelina Tomova, TU Sofia, Grid connected pv inverter topologies: an

overview, Phd Seminar, DERlab Young researchers, Glasgow, UK,
April, 2011
[18] Matthew Armstrong, "Auto-Calibrating DC Link Current Sensing

Technique for Transformerless, Grid Connected, H-Bridge Inverter
Systems," IEEE Transaction on power electronics Vol. 21 No. 5, 2006.
[4] Berba. F, Atkinson David, Armstrong. M, Minimisation of DC current

component in transformerless Grid-connected PV inverter application,
Environment and Electrical Engineering (EEEIC), 2011 10th
International Conference, pp.1-4 May 2011
[19] V. Salas, M. Alonso and F. Chenlo, "Overview of the legislation of DC

injection in the network for low voltage small grid-connected PV
systems in Spain and other countries", Renewable and Sustainable
Energy Reviews, vol. 12, pp. 575-583, 2008.
[5] V. Salas, E. Olas , M. Alonso , F. Chenlo and A. Barrado, DC current

injection into the network from PV grid inverters, Photovoltaic Energy
Conversion, Conference Record of the 2006 IEEE 4th World
Conference, pp. 2371 2374, May 2006
[20] Carrasco, J. M., Franquelo, L. G., and Alfonso, N. M., "Power Electronic
systems for the grid integration of renewable energy sources: A survey,"
IEEE Transactions on Industrial Electronics, Vol. 53, No. 4, pp. 10021016, 2006.
[6] Ashraf Ahmed, Ran Li, Precise Detection and Elimination of Grid
Injected DC from Single Phase Inverters, International Journal of
Precision Engineering and Manufacturing, Vol. 13, No. 8, pp. 13411347, August 2012
WWW.pvresources.com/balance
of
[21] Report on "An investigation of dc injection levels into low voltage ac

powersystems" Distributed generation co-ordinating group, june 2005
[22] Instruction book for 10-200kW Standalone Drivers, Vacon 8000 Solar
[7] H. Wilk, D. Ruoss, and P. Toggweiler, "Report - Innovative electrical

concepts," International Energy Agency Photovoltaic Power Systems,
IEA PVPS, www.iea-pvps.org, 2002
[23] Guidlines for measurement, data exchange and analysis of PV system

performance
[8] Soeren Baekhoej Kjaer, John K. Pedersen, Frede Blaabjerg, A Review of

Single-Phase Grid-Connected Inverters for Photovoltaic Modules IEEE
Trans. On Ind. Appl., Vol. 41, No. 5, Page(S): 1292-1306, SeptemberOctober 2005
[24] Frank Vignola, Fotis Mavromatakis and Jim Krumsick, "Performance of

PV inverter",www.solardat.uoregon.edu/download/papers/performance
of inverters.pdf
[25] S. Pless, M. Deru, P. Torcellini, and S. Hayter, "Procedure for Measuring
and Reporting the Performance of Photovoltaic Systems in Buildings,
Tech[25]nicalReport NREL/TP-550-38603, October 2005
[9] Claude Morris, Report on , Grid-connected Transformerless Single-phase

Photovoltaic Inverters: An Evaluation on DC Current Injection and PV
Array Voltage Fluctuation, Murdoch University perth Westen
Australia- School of Engineering and Energy, 2009
[26] G.Chicco, R.Napoli and F.Spertino, "Experimental evaluation of the

performance of grid-connected photovoltaic systems",
Proc. IEEE
Melecon 2004,Dubrovnik, Croatia 3, PP. 1011-1016 May 12-15, 2004.
[10] Guo Xiaoqiang,Wu weiyang, Gu Herong and San Guocheng, DC

injection control for grid connected inverter based on virtual capacitor
concept, International Conference on Electrical Machines and Systems,
2008. ICEMS 2008, Page(s):2327 2330, October 2008
[27] B. Marion, J. Adelstein, and K. Boyle, H. Hayden, B. Hammond, T.

Fletcher, B. Canada, and D. Narang, D. Shugar, H.Wenger, A. Kimber,
and L. Mitchell and G. Rich and T. Townsend (2005), "Performance
Parameters for Grid- Connected PV Systems, 31st IEEE Photovoltaics
Specialists Conference and Exhibition Lake Buena Vista, Florida,
January 3-7, 2005
[11] R Sharma, Removal Of Dc Offset Current from Transformerless Pv

Inverters Connected to Utility, Australasia Universities Power and
Control Engineering Conference Proceedings, page(s): 136-144,
October 1992
[12]
Photovoltaic
Inverter,
system/inverters.aspx
[28] Fluke 434-II/435-II/437-II Three Phase Energy and Power Quality

Analyzer User Manual, Fluke Corporation, January 2012.
Kitamura.
A, Yamamoto.
F, Matsuda.
H, Akhmad.
K,
Hamakawa,Yoshihiro,Test results on DC injection phenomenon of grid
connected PV system at Rokko test centerPhotovoltaic
Specialists
Conference, 1996, Conference Record of the Twenty Fifth IEEE,
Page(s): 1377 - 1379 , 1996
[29] IEC standards for solar photovoltaic system,http://www.pvresources.com
[13] H. Wilk, D. Ruoss, and P. Toggweiler, "Report - Innovative electrical

concepts," International Energy Agency Photovoltaic Power Systems,
IEA PVPS ,2002, www.iea-pvps.org
[14] Yogi Goswami, Frank Kreith, Jan F.Krieder , Principles of Solar
Engineering, Second edition, 1999.
[15] Singla and Vijay Kumar Garg, "Modeling of solar photovoltaic module
& effect of insolation variation using matlab/simulink," International
Journal of Advanced Engineering Technology, Vol IV Issue III Article 2
pp.05-09 July-Sept,2013
4
117
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Active Resource Provision in Cloud Computing

Through Virtualization
.
1
2
, .

Email:deepikatenepalli@gmail.com
Abstract Cloud Computing is an emerging technology which

provides effective services to the clients. It permits clients to
scale up and down their resources usage depending upon their
needs Because of this, under provision and over provision
problems may occur. To overcome this migration of service
utilization Our Paper focuses on overcoming this problem by
distributing the resource to multiple clients through
virtualization technology to enhance their returns. By using
virtualization, it allocates datacenter resources dynamically
based on applications demands and this technology also
supports green technology by optimizing the number of
servers in use.
We present a new approach called
Skewness, to calculate the unevenness in the Multi-tier
resource utilization of a server. By optimizing Skewness, we
can join different types of workloads adequately and we can
improve the whole consumption of server resources.
Keywords Cloud computing, over provision,
provision, virtualization, green computing, skewness.
Virtual machine monitors (VMMs) provide a mechanism

for mapping virtual Machines (VM) to physical resources
in Physical Machine (PM). But mapping is hidden from the
cloud. Cloud provider should ensure that physical machine
have sufficient resource to meet client need. When an
application is running on VM mapping between VMs and
PMs is done by migration technology. However policy
issue remains in every aspect to decide the mapping
adaptively so that the demands of VM were met and the
number of PM used is minimized. Though it is a
challenging one when the resource need of VM is
heterogeneous due to the different set of applications their
need might vary with time as the workloads goes ups and
down. The capacity of PM can also be Heterogeneous
because multiple generations of hardware coexist in a
datacenter.
under
Here we have two main goals to provide dynamic resource

allocation
1. INTRODUCTION
Many of the organizations show interest on cloud, because
with low cost we can access resources from cloud in a
flexible and secure manner. Cloud shares their resource to
multiple users. Cost of resources varies significantly
depending on configuration for using them. Hence efficient
management of resources is of prime interest to both Cloud
Providers and Cloud Users. The success of any cloud
management software critically depends on the flexibility,
scale and efficiency with which it can utilize the underlying
hardware resources while providing necessary performance
isolation. Successful resource management solution for
cloud environments needs to provide a rich set of resource
controls for better isolation. Here dynamic resource
allocation and load balancing is the challenging task to
provide effective service to clients. Due to peak demands
for a resource in the server, resource is over utilized by
clients through virtualization. This may degrade the
performance of the server. In under utilization usage of
resource is very poor when compare to over utilization, for
this we are migrate client processing from VM to other
VM.
1.
2.
Optimize burdens: PM should provide all the

necessary resources required to process
applications on VMs. It satisfies VM needs based
on its capacity.
Green Computing: optimize unnecessary usage
of PMs to save the energy
The work discussed below in our Paper makes discussions

of how to overcome these two problems in cloud.
First we have to share the work to servers in a balanced
way depending upon their capacity. By sharing server we
can perform their task effectively to optimize load on it.
Next, we have to optimize the usage of resource then only
we can give flexible and effective service to clients, for this
usage of resource Monitor is necessary. By monitoring, we
came to know underutilization and overutilization of
resources in PM through VMs. So to calculate the usage of
resource we introduce a new approach called Skewness.
With the help of previously used resource logs, we have to
forecast periodically for future resource needs. A client can
demand for highly resource provision. At the time there
may be a chance for insufficient resource, while providing

118
www.iaetsd.in
that service to the intended client, resource as well as

memory forecasting is necessary. For this we design
resource forecasting algorithm.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The Architecture represented in Fig. 1, Each PM runs with

xen hypervisor Processor with domain 0 and one or more
domain U in this system. In each domain U n no. of
resource are there to provide service to clients. All PMs
are connected to backend databases for storing
informations. Sharing of PMs resources to VMs is
2. SYSTEM OVERVIEW:
VM Scheduler
Predictor
Hotspot
Coldspot
Migration List
Usher CTRL
Dom 0
U
S
H
E
R
L
N
M
M
M
A
L
L
O
T
E
R
DomU
W
UU
DomU
E
B
S
E
R
V
E
R
WS
R
M
T
D
E
S
K
T
O
P
Dom 0
U
S
H
E
R
L
N
M
M
M
A
L
L
O
T
E
R
DomU
UM
DomU
UD
A
P
N
S
R
E
D
U
C
E
S
E
R
V
E
R
WS
Xen Hypervisor
Dom 0
U
S
H
E
R
L
N
M
M
M
A
L
L
O
T
E
R
DomU
M
A
I
L
DomU
UL
S
E
R
V
E
R
O
G
S
E
R
V
E
R
WS
Xen Hypervisor
Xen Hypervisor
PM2
PMn
PM1
Fig. 1: System Architecture

maintained by Usher center controller (Usher CTRL). Each
processing on usher local node Manager (LNM) in domain
0 which gathers the resource usage information like CPU
and network in each VM monitoring the action performing
in xen. Memory usage in VM is largely hidden to
hypervisor. Shortage of memory is indicated by swap
activities.
Threshold or Cold Threshold. We are shut downing

PMs to save the energy those are in under utilization list.
Migrate all the listed VM to Usher CTRL for execution.
3. FORECASTING FUTURE RESOURCE BY
CALCULATION:
Smart service maintenance has some parameter like
efficiency, security and flexibility. We have to take care by
monitoring and analyze the service periodically then only
we can provide effective services to clients. Depending
upon demands we require some changes in VM to maintain
it as effective service and demand for that service
increases. Based on previous usage history we can adapt
some services and make changes in hardware also. Here
our main aim to utilize present resource in VM effectively
by monitoring usage. This is possible by necessary
calculation. For this we proposed exponentially weighted
moving average (EWMA) in TCP.
VM scheduler gathers the usage of resources information

frequently from all PMs; send it to Usher Center Control
to schedule the VM. Predictor in VM scheduler predicts the
feature resource needs by resource forecasting algorithm.
Memory and CPU allocations are changing in xen, when a
new demands came for processing LMN has to satisfy
those requests by adjusting the old one.
Hotspot solver in VM Scheduler identifies the usage of
resources from PM. If its usage is high then we can call it
as Hot threshold. VM scheduler migrate those VM to
reduce the burden on PM. If the VM uses resources
averagely from PMs it is below the Green Computing
E (t) = * E (t - 1) + (1 - ) * O (t), 0 1.

119
www.iaetsd.in
Where E (t):
O (t):
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Estimate load at time t.

Observed load at time t.
Forecast the CPU weights on DNS server by using the

EWMA formula. We compute the weights periodically to
reduce burden and estimate next weight on it. We show the
CPU utilization in a graphical representation to adjust the
weights on it. In Fig. 2a show the results for = 0.7. Dot
represents the observed value and curve represents the
Predicted value in the Graph. Curve cuts the middle of the
dots which indicates a quite precise prediction. This is also
verified by table 1. Median errors are computed based on
observed value: | E (t) O (t)| / O (t).
Even though it seems that it is suitable, but it was not
getting resource usage fluctuation details. Unfortunately
when is between 0 and 1, the predicted value is always
between historic value and observed one. So we required
small changes to speed up we set value as negative (-1
0).
Fig. 2 (b) FUSD: = - 0.2, = 0.7, W = 1
We have to balance the observed O (t) and estimated E (t)

loads on time being. For example if observed resource
usage is going down. Here we can to decrease the
estimated load in some situations. Based on the situation
we have to take precaution to maintain the server. For this
we have two parameters and to balance the server.
We can call this as Fast Up and Slow down (FUSD)
algorithm. We can see in fig 2b show the effectiveness of
the FUSD algorithm for = -0.2 and = 0.7 these values
are obtained by doing experiment on online application.
We keep a window W recently observed value and take
O(t) as hight. We take W=8 and increase the percentage of
resource demand to peak usage that is 90%th show in the
Fig. 2c. Below
Fig. 2 (c) FUSD: = - 0.2, = 0.7, W = 8
Median
error
High error
Low error
Fig.2, CPU load prediction for the DNS server at our

university. W is the measurement window
ewma (0.7)
W=1
5.6%
fusd (-0.2, 0.7)

W=1
9.4%
fusd(-0.2, 0.7)
W=8
3.3%
56%
44%
77%
23%
58%
41%
Table 1: Load Prediction Algorithms

4. SKEWNESS ALGORITHM
Skewness can count underutilization and overutilization of
multiple resources on a server. Let n be the no of resources,
ri be the ith resource usage and p be the server.
Skewness (p) =
Where is the average usage of all resource for server p.
we apply this calculation specifically on inconsistent
servers to know the resource usage whether the resource is
overutilization or underutilization. Migrate the workloads
which is overly utilizes the resource from one server to
another server. If the resources are underutilized from a
server then we can joins some more workloads to improve
the overall utilization of server resources smartly.
Fig. 2 (a) EWMA = 0.7, W = 1

120
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
(source server) to another server (Destination server).

Source server has to check whether the destination server is
suitable, if it provides all his resource or not and after
accepting this VM it does not go to hotspot. While seeing
all these a aspect then we are migrating the VM to another
server. In this way we are optimizing the server
temperature as low as possible.
4.3 Green Computing
The main intension of Green computing algorithm is to
utilize the maximum level of resources on server and also it
optimize the number of active servers running with less
weight it does not sacrifice its performance now or in
future. Our aim is to optimize the server resources by
migrating VMs to another suitable server which are
underutilized its resources. By doing this we can save the
servers energy. To avoid this green computing algorithm
requests periodically to get the information of
underutilized resources which satisfies green computing
threshold from all servers in cloud also known as cold spot.
By collect this information we are migrating the VMs in
ascending order based on memory size.
Fig. 3, Comparison of SPAR and FUSD
4.1 Hot and Cold Spots

We have explained previously about Hotspot and cold spot
in section 2. Depending on the Load we are defining
temperature of a server. If the utilization of resources in
server is high then it is in hot threshold. This shows the
server is highly busy with overload on it. By reducing
burden on server, it performs its tasks nicely. We are
diverting some VMs to another PMs which is suitable to
fulfill their requirements. p is the temperature of hotspot.
CONCLUSION
We have presented an approach for implementation and
evaluation of a resource management system for cloud
computing services. We have also shown in our paper of
how we can multiplex virtual resource allocation to
physical resource allocation effectively based on the
fluctuating demand. We also make use the skewness metric
to determine different resource characteristics appropriately
so that the capacities of servers are well utilized. We can
apply our algorithm to achieve both overload avoidance
and green computing for systems which support multiresource constraints.
Temperature (p) =
Where R is the set of overloaded resources in server p and
rt is the hot threshold for resource r. if the temperature is
zero then the server is in cold spot. if temperature is one
server is in hot spot.
If the utilization of resource is below average to its actual
capacity then it is in cold threshold. Potentiality of server is
wastage due to the server running idly, so it was not
satisfying the green computing threshold, to save the
energy we are show downing it. The utilization of all
resources from server which satisfies the green computing
threshold but not in risk stage then we can call it as warm
threshold.
REFERENCES:
[1] Zhen Xiao, Senior Member, IEEE, Weijia Song, and Qi Chen,
Dynamic Resource Allocation Using Virtual Machines for Cloud
Computing Environment, VOL. 24, NO. 6, JUNE 2013
[2] L. Siegele, Let It Rise: A Special Report on Corporate IT,
The Economist, vol. 389, pp. 3-16, Oct. 2008.
4.2 Hot Spot Improvement
[3] P. Barham, B. Dragovic, K. Fraser, S. Hand, T. Harris, A. Ho,
Here our aim to remove hot spots in a server to provide

smooth accesses flexibility to client. A client has authority
to customize their service within his long run. While
providing these services, server has to allocate high level of
resources to satisfy their needs based on their demands. At
this time server is busy (server temperature is high or Hot
spot) while supplying those resources and give high
priority for new demands, while providing these service a
problem may arises for already using the same resource
going down. Overcome this problem by migrating VMs to
another servers. With the help of Skewness we are
collecting the list of VMs which are over utilizing the
resources from server, similarly for remaining servers. A
VM migration which depends on highest priority in hot
spot list that is in descending order. Responsibility of
server has to check before migrate the VM from one server
R. Neugebauer, I. Pratt, and A. Warfield, Xen and the Art of

Virtualization, Proc. ACM Symp. Operating Systems Principles
(SOSP 03), Oct. 2003.
[4] Amazon elastic compute cloud (Amazon EC2), http://aws.
amazon.com/ec2/, 2012.

121
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[5] C. Clark, K. Fraser, S. Hand, J.G. Hansen, E. Jul, C. Limpach,

I. Pratt, and A. Warfield, Live Migration of Virtual Machines,
Proc. Symp. Networked Systems Design and Implementation
(NSDI 05), May 2005.
[6] M. Nelson, B.-H. Lim, and G. Hutchins, Fast Transparent
Migration for Virtual Machines, Proc. USENIX Ann. Technical
Conf., 2005.
[7] M. McNett, D. Gupta, A. Vahdat, and G.M. Voelker, Usher:
An Extensible Framework for Managing Clusters of Virtual
Machines, Proc. Large Installation System Administration Conf.
(LISA 07), Nov. 2007.
[8] T. Wood, P. Shenoy, A. Venkataramani, and M. Yousif,
Black-Box and Gray-Box Strategies for Virtual Machine
Migration, Proc. Symp. Networked Systems Design and
Implementation (NSDI 07), Apr. 2007.
[9] C.A. Waldspurger, Memory Resource Management in
VMware ESX Server, Proc. Symp. Operating Systems Design
and Implementation (OSDI 02), Aug. 2002.

122
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
CPLM: Cloud Facilitated Privacy Shielding Leakage

Resilient Mobile Health Monitoring
R.Jasmine Anita
A.Narayana Rao
(M. Tech)Dept. of CSE

SITE
Tirupati, India
jasmineanitar@gmail.com
Asst. Professor, Dept. of CSE

SITE
Tirupati, India
Abstract Cloud-assisted mobile health (mHealth)

monitoring is a revolutionary approach to provide decision
support in the health care sector. It employs mobile
communications and cloud computing technologies to provide
timely feedback. Its main objective is to not only improve the
quality of healthcare service but also to decrease the healthcare
expenditure. In spite of the benefits it offers, needless to say the
acceptance of such a mobile health monitoring system is affected
as it doesnt shield the privacy of the patients data and also the
data of the health care service providers. As a result of which the
wide deployment of mHealth technology is hindered and the
patients willingness to get involved in such a mobile health care
monitoring program is abated. Cloud Facilitated Privacy
Shielding Leakage Resilient Mobile Health Monitoring addresses
the fore mentioned limitations by offering a privacy shield to the
involved parties and their data in addition to handling the side
channel attack. To take into consideration the resource
constraints of the parties involved, the outsourcing decryption
technique and a key private proxy re-encryption are
implemented to shift the computational complexity of the privacy
shielding scheme to the cloud without compromising the privacy
of the clients and that of the service providers. The side channel
attack is handled by implementing a Virtual machine policing
approach.
data could be then transferred to a central server. The server

in turn would then run various web medical applications on
these data to return timely feedback to the patient. With the
emergence and evolution of the cloud computing technologies,
the Software as a Service(SaaS) model and pay as you go
business model can be incorporated in cloud computing to
provide a feasible solution. This would allow small health care
service providers to perform well in the health care market.
Cloud facilitated mHealth monitoring promises
improved health care services and reduced health care costs.
In spite of the many promises offered, to make this technology
a reality one has to overcome a stumbling block. While
collecting, storing, diagnosing, communicating and
computing, there is a chance that the privacy of the patients is
breached. This calls for proper addressing of the data
management in a mHealth monitoring system. Statistics reveal
that around 75% of the Americans attach utmost significance
to the privacy of their personal health information [2]. A study
also reveals [3] that patients concern regarding the privacy
breach of their health data could deteriorate the willingness of
the patients to be involved in such health care monitoring
programs. This privacy apprehension will be inflamed owing
to the increase in the privacy breaches involving electronic
data.
Many organizations collect patients personal health
data [4] and the data is shared with insurance organizations,
research organizations or even other government institutions.
The activities of the health care service providers should be
restricted efficiently to achieve real protection to patients
personal data as a study reveals [5] that privacy laws could not
guarantee a privacy shield to the patients personal health data.
Conventional privacy protection techniques work by
detaching personal identity information such as names or
social security number or by using anonymization techniques.
Such conventional techniques are not an effective means to
deal with the privacy of mobile health care systems owing to
the increase in the amount and diversity of personally
identifiable information [6]. Personal Identifiable Information
(PII) can be defined as any piece of information related to a
uniquely identifiable individual [7]. In practice however any
piece of information can be transformed in to personal
identifiable information [6]. The mobile health monitoring
system offers a tremendous opportunity to intruders to lay
Keywords Key private proxy re-encryption, Privacy Shield,

Outsourcing decryption, Virtual Machine Policing.
I.
Introduction
Mobile devices especially smart phones attached with

low cost sensors have found their application in every field in
and around the world. Employing such smart phones improves
the health care service quality in terms of time and effort. One
of the successful examples of mobile health applications in the
developing countries is the Remote Mobile Health
Monitoring. MediNet is a successfully launched project which
has been designed to be used in the remote places of the
Caribbean countries. It was launched by Microsoft and has
been employed to monitor the health condition of the patients
suffering from diabetes and cardio vascular diseases [1].when
such a remote mHealth monitoring system is used, various
physiological data ranging from blood pressure to blood
glucose could be collected by deploying detachable sensors in
wireless body sensor networks. The collected physiological

123
www.iaetsd.in
their hands on a large quantity of information which could be

used to ultimately identify the corresponding individual. This
calls for the utmost attention as an intruder may be able to
identify the corresponding individual using such sensitive
information [8], [9]. Conventional anonymization techniques
have been used to handle the privacy issues. K-anonymity and
l-diversity are instances of such anonymization techniques. It
has been shown that such techniques are not sufficient to
completely prevent re-identification [6]. It is our ardent belief
that the proposed CPLM will not only serve as a feasible
solution to the privacy related problems in a mobile health
care system but also will serve as an alternative solution to the
privacy-sensitive users.
To address the security and the privacy, cryptography
is a viable solution. While using cryptographic techniques, one
significant problem that needs to be taken into consideration is
the increased computational complexity. In the cloud
computing environment, discretion calls for shifting intensive
computations to the cloud servers from the mobile devices
where resources are constrained. To successfully shift the
computations from the mobile devices to the cloud server
without compromising privacy and security is challenging and
calls for a thorough investigation.
The CPLM design emphasizes on the insider attacks.
Such attacks could be carried out by insiders either with a
malicious or a benign intent. It is very important to design a
privacy shielding mechanism to counteract the insider attacks
without failing to maintain equilibrium between implementing
privacy constraints and maintaining the normal operations of
the mobile health systems. The problem is aggravated in the
case of cloud facilitated mobile health systems as it is
extremely essential to not only ensure that the privacy of the
clients data is shielded but also to ensure that the results are
shielded from the cloud servers as well as the health care
service providers aka the companies.
The CPLM scheme enables the health care service
provider aka the company to be offline after the initial stage
and ensures that the data or programs delivered to the cloud is
done securely. Outsourcing decryption technique [10] is
incorporated in to the multi-dimensional range queries system
in order to shift the computational complexity from the client
to the cloud server. The proxy re-encryption scheme ensures
that the computational complexity is shifted to the cloud from
the company as the company has to perform encryption only
once.
II.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
devices. The data is then transformed into tokens. The

transformed tokens are delivered as inputs to the encrypted
monitoring program stored in the cloud server through a
mobile device. The responsibility of generating and
distributing tokens or private keys lies with a semi trusted
authority. The STA collects a service fee from the clients as
per a business model for instance pay-as-you-go business
model. The STA can be considered as a confederate or an ally
for a company or multiple companies. The company and the
STA can connive to obtain personal health data from the client
tokens or input vectors. In this CPLM design it is assumed that
the cloud server is neutral, in other words it is assumed that
the cloud does not connive with the company or a client to
cause damage to the other side. It is still possible for the cloud
to connive with the other entities of the CPLM such as the
STA and it is left for future consideration. It is also assumed
that an individual client doesnt connive with other clients.
CPLM involves four major phases- SecParam, Setup,
Store, TokenGen and Query. To start with, the cloud server
determines the rate at which the Police VM is scheduled based
on the inputs from the clients and the company. At the
initialization step, the STA runs the Setup phase which results
in the publishing of the system parameters. The next phase
corresponds to the Store algorithm in which the mobile health
monitoring program is expressed as a branching program. The
branching program is encrypted. The resulting cipher text and
the company index are delivered to the cloud by the company.
When a client wants to access the cloud for a mobile
health monitoring program, the j-th client in collaboration with
the STA runs the TokenGen algorithm. The j-th client sends
the company index and the private query input to the STA, the
STA in turn inputs its master secret key to the algorithm. This
results in the generation of tokens which are supplied to the
client. In this entire process, the STA doesnt obtain any nontrivial information about the submitted query.
During the final phase, the tokens are delivered by the
client to the cloud which in turn runs the Query phase. A
major chunk of the computationally intensive task of
decryption is performed by the client and the partially
decrypted text is returned to the client. The client decrypts the
partially decrypted text to obtain the decryption result. During
the entire process the cloud can deduce no significant
information in either the clients private query or the
decryption result. The CPLM also prevents the cloud from
obtaining significant information from either the clients
private query or from the received information from the client.
SYSTEM MODEL
III.
The Cloud facilitated Privacy Shielding Leakage Resilient

Mobile Health Monitoring system (CPLM) comprises of four
parties- the cloud server aka the cloud, the health care service
provider which provides the mobile health monitoring service
aka the company, the clients and a semi trusted authority
(STA). The monitoring data or program is encrypted prior to
its storage in the cloud server. The clients collect their
personal medical data and the data is stored in their mobile
SOME PRELIMINARIES AND

BUILDING BLOCKS
A. Bilinear Maps
Pairing is one of the building blocks of the CPLM design.
An efficiently computable, non-degenerate function e:
GGGT which satisfies the bilinearity property defines
pairing. The bilinearity property states that e(gp,gq) = e(g,g,)pq
for any p,q Z*q. Z*q is a finite field modulo q, G and GT are

124
www.iaetsd.in
multiplicative groups of prime order q generated by g and

e(g,g) respectively.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
original message. The STA deduces no useful information on

the clients identity id. The cloud also cannot deduce any
useful information regarding the client identity id.
B. Branching Program
A binary branching program is a triplet ({m1, , mk}, L,
R). The first element of the triplet is a set of nodes in the
binary branching tree. The internal nodes represent the
intermediate decision nodes while the leaf nodes represent the
label nodes. A decision node is represented as an attributethreshold pair (ai, t i), where ai represents the attribute index
and ti represents the threshold value. The attribute value
supplied by the client vai is compared with the threshold value
ti. At each decision node i, if vai ti then L(i) becomes the
index of the next node. If vai > ti then R(i) becomes the index
of the next node. The label nodes contain classification
information. The nodes are traversed starting from the root
node by comparing the value supplied by the client with the
threshold value until one of the label nodes is reached.
F. Proxy Re-Encryption (PRE)

The CPLM design also uses proxy re-encryption (PRE). It
was first proposed by Blaze et al. [15]. Ateniase et al
formalized it [16]. PRE enables a proxy server which cannot
be trusted, having a re-encryption key (rekey) rk AB to
convert a first level cipher text into a second level cipher text
without allowing the proxy to deduce any useful information
about the message. In the CPLM scheme two relevant
properties are emphasized: First is unidirectionality and the
second is key privateness. Unidirectionality implies that the
delegation from A B does not allow delegation from B A.
Key privateness means that given the re-encryption key rk
AB, the proxy obtains no information on either the delegator
identity or the delegatee identity. In CPLM, the company
delivers the health monitoring program which is encrypted
using MDRQs to the untrusted cloud. The company also
delivers many re-encryption key along with the cipher text to
the cloud. The key private property ensures that no useful
information about the underlying identities, corresponding to
the thresholds of the internal decision nodes, is leaked to the
cloud. PRE aids by reducing the encryption workload for the
company. It should be ensured that the computation of the rekey generation should be lesser than that of the first level
encryption in PRE.
C. Homomorphic Encryption
In CPLM, additive homomorphic public-key encryption
technique is used. In homomorphic encryption, if HE(p) and
HE(q) are two encrypted messages, then the encryption of the
addition of the two messages is obtained as follows HE(p+q) =
HE(p) * HE(q), where * is an operation in the cipher text
space. In CPLM homomorphic encryption is used to obtain
tokens corresponding to the client attribute vector.
G. Virtual Machine Policing

Sharing of resources among processes is a major
contributor to the side channel attacks. One of the major
objectives of using cloud computing is to share resources
which calls for co-residence of virtual machines in a cloud
computing environment. In the Virtual Machine Policing [17],
the cloud server creates special virtual machines which are
then launched by a physical host according to a police virtual
machine scheduling policy. The attacking VM is then
confused by the police VMs. This is done by running some
clean up or resource sharing instructions.
A police virtual machine is a VM which is launched by a
physical host. Its responsibilities are to prevent and to handle
the side channel attacks. A police VM consists of zero or more
counter attack (CA) units as shown in Fig. 1. Each CA unit is
a software component which handles the responsibility of
preventing and handling a specific category of side channel
attacks. Such CA units are installed dynamically depending on
the situational need. The number of Police VMs executing and
their scheduling policy is dictated by a number of factors such
as the cloud servers load, special security request of the client
and performance requirements of the cloud server.
D. MDRQs Based Anonymous IBE

Shi et al [12] first proposed Multi-Dimensional Range
Queries (MDRQs). In the MDRQ system the sender encrypts a
message using a range [er1, er2] or a C bit data v. A receiver
with a private key which corresponds to the range [er1, er2] or a
C bit data v can decrypt the message. The encrypted cipher
text protects not only the privacy of the message but also the
range or the data under which the message is encrypted.
In MDRQs, a C-level binary is constructed to
represent the C-bit data or the range. The root of the C-level
binary tree is labelled as . The left child node of an internal
node s is labelled as s0 and the right child node is labelled as
s1. The leaf nodes from the left to the right will be labelled
with a string 0, 0, , 0 to 1, 1, , 1, corresponding to all
the possible C-bit data.
E. Decryption Outsourcing
Pairing-based IBE systems [11] and attribute-based
encryption systems [13], [14] are well known for expensive
decryption workload. Decryption Outsourcing is used to
decrease the computational complexity. It allows a client to
convert his secret key to a transformation key. The
transformation key is then delegated to an untrusted server
which in turn uses it to convert the original cipher text to an el
gamal encryption of the original message. The advantage is
that the client only has to perform simple exponentiation
operations to obtain the decrypted message. CPLM applies the
outsourcing decryption technique with MDRQS based on the
BF-IBE scheme. The advantage of the above scheme is that
the client has to only perform one exponentiation to obtain the
Police VM
CA
unit1
CA
unit2
CA
unit3

125
www.iaetsd.in
H1 : {0, 1} G, H2 : G G Zq , H3 : MM Zq , H4 :
GT MM, and H5 : GMM G. The system parameter is
included in the following steps implicitly.
Store: This step is performed by the company. Let PRF(s0, i)
and PRF(s1, i) denote two pseudo-random functions. They
take as inputs a secret key sj , j {0, 1} and a i, defined by
PRF : {0, 1} [1,N k] {0, 1}C+C , where N represents the
maximum number of the clients accessing the companys
monitoring program in a particular time slot.
For j [1, k], the company computes the identity
representation sets S[0;tj+ ij ] and S[tj+ ij+1;Max]. (0)ij =
PRF(s0, (i1)k+j), (1)ij = PRF(s1, (i 1) k + j) and ij =
(1)ij + (0)ij , where j [1, k].
Let Q represent a random permutation of the set [1, k]
= (1, 2, , k) where Q[1] = 1. The company distributes
PRF(s0, ), {tj + ij , aj |i [1,N], j [1, k]} and the random
permutation Q to the STA. The STA computes the identity
representation set. For j [1, k], the STA runs the ReKey(id1,
id2, msk) algorithm on the identities id1 S[0;tj+ ij ] and id2
S[0;tj+ (i+1)j ], or the identities id1 S[tj+ ij+1;Max] and
id2 S[tj+ (i+1)j+1;Max]. The STA then delivers all the
generated re- encryption keys according to the permuted order
to the cloud.
The ReKey algorithm is as follows.
ReKey(id1, id2, msk): This algorithm is performed by the
STA. When a delegator D receives a request of re-encryption
from id1 to id2, it first executes the Ext algorithm on id2 to
produce skid2. Then it outputs the re-encryption key from id1 to
id2:
rkid1;id2 = (rk(1) id1;id2, rk(2) id1;id2)= (H1(id1)s gH2(skid2||Nid1;id2
)
,Nid1;id2 ) and Nid1;id2 is a random element from G.
The Ext algorithm works as follows.
Ext(id, msk): This algorithm is performed by the STA and a
client. Upon receiving an identity id as input, the client first
selects a random number z Zq, and computes the value u1
=H1(id)z and sends it to the STA. The STA outputs the
transformation key corresponding to the identity id: u2 = us1
where s = msk and delivers it back to the client. Then the
client calculates his private key skid =u1/z2 =H 1(id)zsz1=H1(id)s.
It is to be noted that the STA deduces no information on the
clients identity as H1(id)z is just a random group element
under a random oracle model.
Starting with the node p1, the company chooses two
symmetric keys kQ[L(j)] and kQ[R(j)] for each decision node pj
whose children are internal nodes. Then, it executes the
encryption algorithm Enc(id1, kQ[L(j)]||Q[L(j)]) and Enc(id2,
kQ[R(j)]||Q[R(j)]), where the identity id1 S[0;tj+ ij ] and the
identity id2 S[tj+ ij+1;Max], respectively, in order to produce
two cipher text sets CQ[L(j)] and CQ[R(j)]. Let TCj be represented
by {CQ[L(j)],CQ[R(j)]}. The cipher texts TCQ[L(j)] and TCQ[R(j)] are
encrypted using kQ[L(j)] and kQ[R(j)] for the two child nodes,
using a semantically secure symmetric key encryption scheme.
When pj represents the parent node of the leaf nodes, the
information attached to the two leaf nodes are encrypted using
the two symmetric keys.
Fig. 1 Police VM
IV.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
CPLM DESIGN
The system time is divided into time slots. Each time slot
can range from a week to a month. It is assumed that a
maximum of N users can access the monitoring program
during a given slot. Whenever a client tries to access a
monitoring program, it is assigned an index i by the STA,
where i [1,N].
CPLM with an efficient Privacy Shield reduces not
only the computational burden on the company but also the
communication overhead for the cloud. As shown in Fig. 2,
the high level idea is as follows. Key private re-encryption
scheme is employed as an underlying tool. The company
produces a single set of cipher text and delivers it to the cloud,
instead of generating a cipher text for each client. The
company then obliviously delivers the identity threshold
representation sets to the STA for the thresholds of the
decisional branching nodes and the indices of the concerned
attributes so that the STA can produce the re-encryption keys
corresponding to the rest of the clients in the system by
making use of the key private re-encryption scheme. The
produced re-encryption keys are then distributed to the cloud.
The cloud then runs the re-encryption scheme using the rekeys
and the single set of cipher text delivered by the company to
produce the cipher texts for the rest of the clients. The key
private re-encryption scheme assimilates the outsourcing
decryption to ensure that the CPLM scheme incorporates
security and efficiency characteristics. As a result of the
decryption algorithm of the proxy re-encryption scheme, the
interactions between clients and the cloud is also decreased.
CPLM with an efficient Privacy Shield consists of the
following five steps.
SecParam: This step is performed by the cloud server by
taking into consideration the security parameters provided by
the client. If the client opts for special security request, the
regular VM and the Police VM are scheduled alternatively. If
the performance of the VM is a priority and if the number of
clients accessing the monitoring program is less than 300, the
police VM is scheduled after ten regular VMs. If the number
of clients accessing is between 300 and 600, the police VM is
scheduled after 15 regular VMs else it is scheduled after 20
regular VMs. If the performance of the VM is not a priority,
then the police VM is scheduled after 15, 20, 30 regular VMs
for the above corresponding range of clients accessing the
monitoring program.
Setup: This step is performed by the STA. The STA takes as
input the security parameter 1 , and outputs the system
parameter SP = (G,GT , q, g,Hi, i = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5), the key pair
for the STA (pk, msk) = (y, s) = (gs, s). G and GT are bilinear
groups of prime order q, g represents a random primitive root
in G, Hi, (i {1, 2, 3, 4, 5}) represents cryptographic hash
functions.

126
www.iaetsd.in
The company then distributes the resulting cipher

texts and (1)ij to the cloud. The cipher texts for each node are
aligned to the permuted order Q[j] in the cloud.
The Enc algorithm works as follows.
Enc(id,m): This algorithm is run by the company. Upon the
input of a message m M, and an identity id, the company
outputs the ciphertext C = (c1, c2, c3), Where r = H3(m||), c1
= gr, c2 = (||m) H4(e(H1(id), y)r) and c3 = H5(c1||c2)r,
being a random element from M, the message space.
For i [1,N], the cloud produces the cipher texts
corresponding to the i-th client as follows: starting with the
node p1, the cloud executes the ReEnc(Cid1 , rkid1;id2 )
algorithm to re-encrypt the cipher texts by making use of the
rekey from the STA with identity id1 S[0;tj+ ij ] and the
identity id2 S[0;tj+ (i+1)j ], or the identity id1 S[tj+ ij+1;Max] and
the identity id2 S[tj+ (i+1)j+1;Max] here. The set of cipher text
sets for the i-th client are a concatenation of the resulting
public key cipher texts and the original symmetric key cipher
texts.
The ReEnc algorithm works as follows.
ReEnc(Cid1 , rkid1;id2 ): This algorithm is run by the proxy
server. It takes as inputs an original cipher text Cid1 = (c1, c2,
c3) under the identity id1, and a re-encryption key from id1 to
id2 rkid1;id2. If the equality e(c1,H5(c1||c2)) = e(g, c3) holds
good, then the algorithm outputs the re-encrypted cipher text
Cid2 =(c1, c2, c3, c4) where c1 = e(g, c1), c3 = e(c1, rk(1)id1;id2),
and c4 = rkid1;id2 . If the above equality doesnt hold good, it
outputs .
TokenGen: The process of generating a private key for the
attribute vector v=(v1, , vn) is initiated when the i-th client
first produces a public/ private key pair of a homomorphic
encryption scheme. The public key and the value HEnc(vj) are
then sent to the STA.
The STA computes the value HEnc(vaj + (0)ij ) from the
values HEnc((0)ij ) and HEnc(vaj ). Then the STA permutes
the resulting cipher text according to Q and sends the
permuted cipher text according to the order of Q[aj ] where j
[1, k] to the cloud. The cloud will then return the value
HEnc(vaj+(0) ij + (1) ij )=HEnc(vaj + ij) to the client. The
client then decrypts the returned cipher text and obtains vaj
+ij for j [1, k]. The client then computes the identity
representation set for each Svaj+ ij . For every identity id Svaj+
ij , the client executes the Ext(id, msk) algorithm with the
STA to produce the transformation key. The transformation
key is directly delivered to the cloud.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
entire process, the client needs to access the cloud multiple

times which is directly proportional to the length of the path.
The cloud need not make any computations during its
interaction with the client as the client is capable of
completing all the necessary decryption steps on its own. The
client does not have to generate any bilinear map as the
bilinear operation has already been done by the cloud owing to
the pre-processing step in the ReEnc(Cid1 , rkid1;id2 )
algorithm.
Randomness data
Attribute
STA
Tokens
Company
Re-Keys
Client
Encrypted
Branching
Program
Decrypted
Label
Outsourcing
Decryption
Algorithm
Cloud Server
Re-Encrypted
Branching Program
Fig. 2 CPLM with an efficient Privacy Shield
The Dec algorithm works as follows.

Dec(skid,C id): This algorithm is executed by a client. It takes as
inputs a cipher text Cid under id, along with a private key skid .
1) If C id represents an original cipher text (c1, c2, c3), calculate
the value c2 H4(e(skid, c1)) = (||m) H4(e(H1(id),
y)r)H4(e(H1(id)s, gr) = ||m
If c1 = gH3( ||m) and c3 = H5(c1||c2) H3( ||m) both hold good, it
outputs m; otherwise it outputs .
2) If Cid represents a re-encrypted cipher text (c1, c2, c 3, c4 ) ,
Calculate the value H4(c3/c1H2(skid ||c4)) c2 = H4(e(y,H1(id)r)
e(g, g)rH2(skid ||Nid;id )/(e(g, g)r)H2(skid ||Nid;id ))(||m)
H4(e(H1(id), y)r) = ||m
If c1 = e(g, g)H3( ||m) holds good, it outputs m; otherwise, it
outputs .
Query: The clients index i is delivered by the client to the

cloud. The cloud will then return the respective cipher text.
The client can either opt to download all the cipher texts and
the transformation key and perform the rest of the decryption
steps, or to start executing the Dec(skid ,Cid) algorithm, where
the identity id S[0;t1+ i1] or S[t1+ i1+1;Max] in order to decrypt
from the node p1 and then download the cipher text along with
the transformation key for the subsequent node based to the
decryption result. If the client chooses the latter approach, then
only the cipher text that corresponds to a path from the root
node to a leaf node needs to be accessed instead of cipher texts
for all nodes in the binary branching tree. However, in this
V.
Conclusion
CPLM is a cloud facilitated privacy shielding leakage

resilient mobile health monitoring system, which can
effectively not only shield the privacy of the clients but also
the intellectual property of the mobile health service providers.
In order to shield the privacy of the clients, the anonymous
Boneh-Franklin identity based encryption (BF-IBE) has been
applied in the medical diagnostic branching programs. As the
IBE comes in with a high decryption complexity, the
decryption outsourcing has been applied to shift the

127
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
computation complexity from the clients to the cloud server

thus resulting in a reduction in the decryption complexity.
The Branching program tree has been extended by using
random permutations and by randomizing the thresholds at the
branching nodes in order to shield the Heath service providers
monitoring programs. In order to enable and motivate small
health care service providers, for whom resource constraint is
a major problem, the CPLM design provides a way for shifting
the computational burden to the cloud server by applying the
key private proxy re-encryption technique. The side channel
attacks are effectively prevented and handled by using VM
policing. The CPLM scheme has been shown to achieve the
design goals.
References
[1] P. Mohan, D. Marin, S. Sultan, and A. Deen, Medinet: personalizing the
self-care process for patients with diabetes and cardiovascular disease using
mobile telephony. Conference Proceedings of the International Conference
of IEEE Engineering in Medicine and Biology Society, vol. 2008, no. 3, pp.
755758.
[Online].
Available:
http://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/19162765
[2] L. Ponemon Institute, Americans opinions on healthcare privacy,
available: http://tinyurl.com/4atsdlj, 2010.
[3] A. V. Dhukaram, C. Baber, L. Elloumi, B.-J. van Beijnum, and P. D.
Stefanis, End-user perception towards pervasive cardiac healthcare services:
Benefits, acceptance, adoption, risks, security, privacy and trust, in
PervasiveHealth, 2011, pp. 478484.
[4] N. Singer, When 2+ 2 equals a privacy question, New York Times,
2009.
[5] E. B. Fernandez, Security in data intensive computing systems, in
Handbook of Data Intensive Computing, 2011, pp. 447466.
[6] A. Narayanan and V. Shmatikov, Myths and fallacies of personally
identifiable information, Communications of the ACM, vol. 53, no. 6, pp. 24
26, 2010.
[7] A. Cavoukian, A. Fisher, S. Killen, and D. Hoffman, Remote home
health care technologies: how to ensure privacy? build it in: Privacy by
design, Identity in the Information Society, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 363378, 2010.
[8] X. Zhou, B. Peng, Y. Li, Y. Chen, H. Tang, and X. Wang, To release or
not to release: evaluating information leaks in aggregate human-genome
data, Computer SecurityESORICS 2011, pp. 607627, 2011.
[9] R. Wang, Y. Li, X. Wang, H. Tang, and X. Zhou, Learning your identity
and disease from research papers: information leaks in genome wide
association study, in Proceedings of the 16th ACM conference on Computer
and communications security. ACM, 2009, pp. 534544.
[10] M. Green, S. Hohenberger, and B. Waters, Outsourcing the decryption
of abe ciphertexts, in Usenix Security, 2011.
[11] D. Boneh and M. K. Franklin, Identity-based encryption from the weil
pairing, in CRYPTO, 2001, pp. 213229.
[12] E. Shi, J. Bethencourt, H. T.-H. Chan, D. X. Song, and A. Perrig,
Multidimensional range query over encrypted data, in IEEE Symposium on
Security and Privacy, 2007, pp. 350364.
[13] A. Sahai and B. Waters, Fuzzy identity-based encryption, in
EUROCRYPT, 2005, pp. 457473.
[14] V. Goyal, O. Pandey, A. Sahai, and B. Waters, Attribute-based
encryption for fine-grained access control of encrypted data, in ACM
Conference on Computer and Communications Security, 2006, pp. 89 98.
[15] M. Blaze, G. Bleumer, and M. Strauss, Divertible protocols and atomic
proxy cryptography, in EUROCRYPT, 1998, pp. 127144.
[16] G. Ateniese, K. Fu, M. Green, and S. Hohenberger, Improved proxy reencryption schemes with applications to secure distributed storage, ACM
Trans. Inf. Syst. Secur., vol. 9, no. 1, pp. 130, 2006.
[17] Tzong-An Su, A mechanism to prevent side channel attacks in cloud
computing environments.

128
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF

ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCERS USING
HV CLASS-F POWER AMPLIFIER
Jeyasree Tagore1,
M. E.Applied Electronics,
Sriram Engineering College,
Perumalpattu, Chennai,
Tamilnadu, India
jeyatag@gmail.com
V.Vidhya2,
M. E.Applied Electronics,
Sriram Engineering College,
Perumalpattu, Chennai,
Tamilnadu, India
vidhyasreeeee@gmail.com.
critical building blocks in low power SoC
integration.
ABSTRACT
This paper provides an integrated, high efficiency,
high voltage, class-F Power Amplifier (PA) for
increasing the efficiency of Ultrasonic Transducer. It
also provides harmonic termination technique for
high efficiency class F PAs. The effect of different
output harmonic terminations on the Power- Added
Efficiency (PAE) of the PA has also been analyzed.
Theoretically, high efficiency can be attained in classF operation by maximally flattening the current and
voltage waveforms at the drain of active device.
II.
DPD
TECHNIQUE
CPU
TRANSMITTER
OBJECT
Keywords: Ultrasound transmitter, Class-F PA, Power

Added Efficiency, Harmonic Termination Network.
RECEIVER
I.
BASIC BLOCK DIAGRAM
INTRODUCTION
THE ULTRASOUND transmitter, which generates

high voltage (HV) signals to excite the transducers,
is one of the most critical components in the entire
medical ultrasound imaging system. Most of
todays commercial medical ultrasound machines
use HV digital pulsers (unipolar or bipolar) as the
transmitters. These digital pulsers, in spites of
being simple, usually contain high harmonic
components with a second-order harmonic
distortion (HD2) between 30 and 40 dB. Real
time ultra-sound imaging systems have been
available for more than thirty years. Nonetheless,
considerable advancement in the function of ultrasound systems and output display is presently
underway. Integration and advanced electronics
play a key role in ultrasound imaging. The
advancement in deep sub-micron CMOS
technology is easily achievable for digital signal
and low-frequency signal processing. However, in
order to reach the final goal of System-on-a-Chip
(SoC) solution, the final piece of puzzle is still
missing the RF front end. In fact, being the most
power hungry component of the RF front end is the
RF power amplifier (PA). It is one of the most
POWER
AMPLIFIER
APPLICATION
Different PA classes can be divided into two major

groups: linear and non-linear PAs. Class A, AB, B
and C PA are some of the well-known linear PAs,
which are distinguished primarily by their bias
condition. Linear PAs have the advantage of high
linearity that is important for variable envelope
modulation schemes (e.g. p/4-QPSK). However,
linear amplifiers suffer from poor maximum power
efficiency which limits their applications in low
power devices. In practice, an efficiency of only
below 20% can be achieved in those systems. In
contrast, non-linear PAs (also known as switched
mode PAs) can achieve better efficiency. As
suggested by its name, non-linear PAs have poor
linearity performance. Nevertheless, it is still
acceptable for constant envelope modulation
schemes (e.g. FSK). To overcome the problem of
linearity to adapt to variable envelope systems,
many linearization techniques have been proposed

129
www.iaetsd.in
bands and provide terminations for up to three

harmonic.
A method for terminating higher number of
harmonics is shown in Fig. 1(a). The drain and gate
bias lines are embedded in the HTNs. This obviates
the need for the RF choke that commonly is
realized using a large inductor or a quarterwavelength transmission line (TL). Thus, the bias
lines are reused by the HTNs and the chip area is
reduced. The HTNs ideally provide open-circuit
impedance at the frequency of operation, o, while
the matching networks transform the load/source
resistance into the optimum load/source impedance
of the transistor ( ZL,opt and ZS,opt ) that maximizes
the output power or efficiency. At the harmonics of
o, the matching networks exhibit open circuit,
while the HTNs are designed to provide open
circuit at the odd-order harmonics and short circuit
at the even-order harmonics. The open-circuit
condition of impedance matching networks at
harmonics of can be achieved by using multiple
parallel LC networks inserted in series with each
other, each resonating at one of the harmonics.
However, this method requires a large number of
elements that their loss, especially at the output
matching network, degrades efficiency of the PA.
Another method is to adopt a series LC network
resonating at o. This network exhibits short
circuit impedance at frequency of operation, while
at the nth harmonic of o it provides reactive
impedance of (n-1/n) oL . The inductance should
be chosen large enough that this impedance can
approximately provide an open-circuit condition,
i.e., it should be much larger than other impedance
levels in the circuit. It should be noted that this
impedance increases with the order of harmonic,
indicating that it is enough to provide the opencircuit condition at the second harmonic. This
series LC network can also be reused in the
matching network for impedance transformation. In
practice, the impedance matching network at
harmonics of introduces large impedance in
parallel with parasitic capacitance of the transistor
that should also be absorbed into the HTN. The
effects of this impedance can be accounted for
using circuit simulations. The equivalent circuit of
the HTN is shown in Fig. 1(b), where Cp denotes
the output/input parasitic capacitance of the
transistor. The network order is n+1 , where n is an
odd number. Depending on frequency of operation
and the transistor physical layout and packaging,
the parasitic inductances in series with the gate and
drain terminals can also have sensible effect on the
PA performance. The output/input series parasitic
inductance of the transistor can be accounted for by
Ln.
for non-linear amplifiers. Therefore, due their high

efficiency and the development of linearization
techniques, non-linear PAs have received more
attention over linear topologies in mobile
communication in the last decade. Class E and F
are the most common classes of non-linear PAs. In
comparison, Class E PA requires fast switching
driver signal that is not required for Class-F PA.
Moreover, because of relatively large switch
stresses to active devices, Class E amplifiers do not
scale gracefully with the trend toward lower-power
technology with lower breakdown voltage. For
these reasons, Class-F PA has drawn more
attention for its easier implementation and better
integration with sub-micron CMOS technology.
This project proposes a clear cut idea of increasing
the efficiency and resolution of ultrasound images
by the use of Class F RF Power Amplifier.
III.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
HARMONIC TERMINATION OF CLASS

F POWER AMPLIFIER
Several design methods have been proposed to

enable multi-band operation of various circuits
such as impedance transformers low-noise
amplifiers (LNAs), mixers, and PAs. The design of
multi-band PAs is challenging as stringent
requirements on the efficiency, output power, and
linearity have to be satisfied. In modern
transmitters, harmonic-tuned PAs (e.g., class-F) are
preferred to their linear counterparts to achieve
higher efficiencies. The harmonic termination
network (HTN) should provide open-circuit
impedance in the drain of the transistors at oddorder harmonics and the short-circuit impedance at
the even-order harmonics for class-F operation.
Most of the proposed HTNs for class-F PAs are
limited to terminating up to three harmonics. Three
general approaches have been developed for multiband operation of PAs [9]. Several PA units can be
connected in parallel and optimized for each band,
while the band selection is performed using
switches or diplexers. Another approach is based
on using reconfigurable components, e.g.,
varactors, in the matching networks. The third
approach is based on employing multi-band
impedance matching networks. This approach
enables concurrent operation of the PA at multiple
frequency bands and also avoids the use of
switches or reconfigurable elements with control
voltages. Achieving multi-band operation for classF PAs is more challenging than linear PAs as the
HTN
should
provide
proper
impedance
terminations for fundamental frequencies as well as
their harmonics at several distinct frequency bands.
The HTNs reported for concurrent multi-band
class-F PAs are mostly limited to two frequency

130
www.iaetsd.in
V.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
IMPLEMENTATION AND
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS
Fig. 2. Schematic representation of a Class AB that

is modified to a Class- F power amplifier.
Fig. 1. (a) Proposed

technique for class-F PAs
(b) Equivalent HTN.
harmonic
The class-F amplifiers with the nonlinear capacitor

are investigated. To validate the voltage waveform
shaping by the nonlinear output capacitor and the
highly efficient operation of the saturated amplifier,
we designed and implemented the amplifier at
2.655 GHz using the Cree GaN HEMT CGH40010
packaged device containing a CGH60015 bare die.
Since the commercial device model includes the
package effects such as the bonding wires, package
leads, and parasitic, the simulation is carried out
using the bare-chip model to explore the inherent
operation of the saturated amplifier. In addition, the
saturated amplifier is compared with the class-F
amplifier using the bare-chip model. For the
implementation, the packaged device containing
the bare chip is employed for simulation and to
build the amplifier.
Fig.3 shows the simulated efficiencies and power
gains of the class-F and saturated amplifiers using
the bare-chip model. As expected, the saturated
amplifier delivers the improved gain and efficiency
characteristic compared to the class-F amplifier.
However, the gain compression is not that fast. The
efficiency curves for the two PAs are also similar
to the previous simulation result. Fig. 4 shows the
second harmonic loadpull contours and timedomain voltage and current waveforms of the
saturated amplifier using the bare-chip model.
During the simulation, the fundamental and third
harmonic loads are set to and, respectively. Due to
the harmonic generation of the nonlinear output
capacitor, the high efficiency is maintained across
the wide second harmonic impedance region.
Moreover, even if the input power is low, the half
sinusoidal voltage waveform is generated, proving
the harmonic generation by the nonlinear output
capacitor.
termination
IV.
DIGITAL PREDISTORTION
TECHNIQUE
To reduce the harmonic distortions from the
transmitter, a DPD linearization technique is
designed and implemented. The DPD system is
composed of a digital-to-analog converter (DAC),
an analog-to-digital converter, and a field
programmable gate array (FPGA) where the digital
components for the DPD algorithm, the delay
synchronization unit, and the lookup table memory
are implemented. The DPD linearization is divided
into two stages: calibration and evaluation. At the
beginning of the calibration stage t0, the DPD
FPGA and the DAC send an ideal input sinusoidal
calibration signal u(t) to the input, where the output
of the amplifier o(t) can be expressed as a Taylor
expansion in terms of u(t), i.e., o(t) = A1 u(t) +
A2 u(t)2 + A3 u(t)3 + where A1, A2, and
A3 are the first-, second-, and third order gains of
the amplifier. As discussed in [15], the output
signal of the amplifier is attenuated, fed back into
the DPD FPGA, delay adjusted, and then
subtracted into the ideal input signal to equalize the
input containing the inverse response of the power
amplifier nonlinearities. During the evaluation
stage, the equalized amplifier output signal
becomes
oeq(t + tD) =A1 eq(t)+A2 eq(2t)+A3
eq(3t)+ =A1 u(t) + residue, where tD is the
amplifier group delay, eq(t) is the equalized input
signal with being the angular frequency, and
residue is the remaining harmonic components
above the fourth order.

131
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
enhanced imaging quality is designed. A current

feedback technique, a DPD technique, and a
dynamic biasing current modulation technique are
used to improve the power amplifiers bandwidth,
output signal linearity, and power efficiency. The
HV power amplifier is fabricated using a 1-m HV
process. Measurement results indicate that the
linear power amplifier is capable of driving a load
of a 100- resistor in parallel with a 300-Pf
capacitor with a signal voltage swing up to 180 Vpp
and an HD2 as low as 50 dB. Measurement
results also show that the amplifier achieves a
maximum slew rate of 4 V/ns and a power
efficiency of 60%.
Fig.3. Simulated efficiencies and power gains of

the class-F and saturated amplifiers using a real
device.
REFERENCE
1.
2.
3.
Fig. 4. Simulated and measured output power,

drain efficiency, PAE and power gain.
VI.
Amplifier
4.
CONCLUSION
Pout
(dBm)
Gain (dB)
Efficiency
(%)
Class AB
33.89
17.89
40.09
Class F
34.66
17.86
65.17(appro
x)
5.
6.
7.
Table I. Comparison between Class AB and Class

F Power Amplifier.
8.
9.
Thus an integrated HV power amplifier for medical

ultrasound transmitters to be used in advanced
ultrasonic imaging modes such as THI for
An Integrated High-Voltage Low-Distortion CurrentFeedback Linear Power Amplifier for Ultrasound

Transmitters Using Digital Pre-distortion and
Dynamic Current Biasing Techniques Zheng Gao,
Ping Gui, Senior Member, IEEE, and Rick
Jordanger, IEEE Transactions on circuits and
systemsii: Express briefs, vol. 61, no. 6, June
2014.
Analysis and Design of a High Voltage Integrated
Class-B Amplifier for Ultra-Sound Transducers,
IEEE Transaction on Circuits and system, July, 2014.
A Harmonic Termination Technique for Single- and
Multi-Band High-Efficiency Class-F MMIC Power
Amplifiers,
IEEE
TRANSACTIONS
ON
MICROWAVE THEORY AND TECHNIQUES,
VOL. 62, NO. 5, MAY 2014.
Characterization of Class-F Power Amplifier With
Wide Amplitude and Phase Bandwidth for Outphasing Architecture, IEEE MICROWAVE AND
WIRELESS COMPONENTS LETTERS, VOL. 24,
NO. 3, MARCH 2014.
A Class F-1/F 24-to-31GHz Power Amplifier with
40.7% Peak PAE, 15dBm OP1dB, and 50mW Psat
in 0.13m SiGe BiCMOS, 2014 IEEE International
Solid-State Circuits Conference, 978-1-4799-09209/14/$31.00 c2014.
Digitally Modified Filter-less Receiver for 2D
Digital Pre-distortion Of Concurrent Dual-Band
Power Amplifiers, 9781-4799-3869-8/14/$31.00
2014.
Behaviors of class F and class F Amplifiers, IEEE
Transactions on Microwave Theory and Techniques,
June 2012.
Design of a Class F Power Amplifiers,
PIERSONLINE, VOL.6, NO.2, 2010.
High efficiency Class F Power Amplifier Design, 07803- 8246- 1/ 04/ $20.00 2004, IEEE.

132
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
STUDY AND IMPLEMENTATION OF 3

STAGE QUANTUM CRYPYOGRAPHY
IN OPTICAL NETWORKS
Lakshmi Narayanan1, Libi i2 and Srikrishnan3
2
PG Student- M.Tech. Communication system

1,3
Assitant Professor
libi.sudeep@rediffmail.com
Abstract
This paper presents a quantum protocol
based on public key cryptography for secure
transmission of data over a public channel. The
security of the protocol derives from the fact that
Alice and Bob each use secret keys in the multiple
exchange of the qubit. Unlike the BB84 protocol and
its many variants where the qubits are transmitted
in only one direction and classical information
exchanged thereafter, the communication in the
proposed protocol remains quantum in each stage. In
the BB84 protocol, each transmitted qubit is in one of
four different states; in the proposed protocol, the
transmitted qubit can be in any arbitrary state.
Disparate and heterogeneous networks will be a
growing reality in the future. Additionally, some of
the regulatory, national interest, and security
requirements might force a geographic boundary
between networks.
OBS is considered the most promising form of

optical switching technology. OBS can provide a cost
effective means of interconnecting heterogeneous
networks regardless of the lower-level protocols used in
these networks For example, an OBS network is able to
transport 10 Gigabit per second Ethernet traffic between
two sub-networks without the need to interpret lower
level protocols or to make two geographically distant
wireless networks to act as an integrated whole without
protocol translations. Unfortunately, OBS networks
suffer from security vulnerabilities . Although IPSec can
be used to secure IP networks, OBS networks can
provide security services to traffic that do not necessarily
have an IP layer, as illustrated in Figure 1.
Keywords: Optical Network, Quantum computing
I.
INTRODUCTION
The Internet is rapidly becoming a network of

networks as a logical outcome of the growth of a global
information economy where geographically or
functionally distinct networks owned by functionally
distinct networks owned by identities can cooperate to
provide high speed, high performance, and cost effective
service, on demand ,to their customers. We obtain the
highest level of interconnection at the optical level.
Optical switching technologies can be categorized into
optical circuit switching, optical packet switching, and
optical burst switching (OBS). Optical circuit switching,
also known as lambda switching, can only switch at the
wavelength level, and is not suitable for bursty Internet
traffic. Optical packet switching which can switch at the
packet level with a fine granularity is not practical in the
foreseeable future. The two main obstacles are the lack of
random access optical buffers, and optical
synchronization of the packet header and payload.
Fig.1 Illustration of OBS network

This will likely be the case for the majority of
traffic served by the OBS layer. For example, native
Ethernet traffic can be transported directly over OBS
networks. There is no single security measure that can
accommodate the security needs of different modalities
of traffic that interface with the OBS networks. It is clear
that the security of communication within the OBS
1
133
www.iaetsd.in
network has to be sufficiently addressed in order for OBS

to fulfil its promise. In addition, as computing power
increases in the future, classical cryptography and key
management schemes based on computational
complexity become increasingly susceptible to brute
force and cryptanalytic attacks.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
burst header. Data bursts can stay in the optical domain

and pass through OBS routers transparently. This
eliminates the need for optical buffers in such networks.
In addition, since burst headers and data bursts are sent
on separate WDM channels, there is no stringent
synchronization requirement. Figure 1 illustrates an OBS
network interconnecting heterogeneous networks. OBS
ingress edge routers are responsible for assembling
packets into data bursts according to the egress edge
router addresses and possibly quality-of-service (QoS)
levels. A burst is formed when it either reaches the predefined maximum burst size, or the burst assembly time
reaches the timeout value. Adaptive burst assembly
schemes can be used as well. Once a burst is formed, the
ingress edge router generates a burst header which is sent
on a separate control channel. The burst header specifies
the length of the burst, and the offset time between the
burst header and the data burst. The data burst is then
launched on one of the WDM data channels. When the
burst header reaches the OBS core router, it is converted
to electronic signal and processed electronically. Since
burst headers carry complete information about data
bursts, the OBS core router can make efficient
scheduling decisions in selecting the outgoing WDM
channels for data bursts by simply processing burst
headers. If at least one outgoing WDM channel is
available for the duration of the burst, a channel will be
selected to carry the data burst. Otherwise, the data burst
will be dropped. Before the data burst reaches the OBS
core router, the optical interconnects in the OBS core
router will be configured to route the optical data burst to
the desired output channel. The data burst can traverse
the OBS core network as an optical entity transparently
without encountering O/E/O conversion. When data
bursts reach the egress edge router, data bursts will be
disassembled back to packets and forwarded to proper
network interfaces.
Note that burst assembly/disassembly
functionality is only provided at OBS edge routers. There
is no burst reassembly in the OBS core network. There is
a one-to-one correspondence between the burst header
and its associated burst. Burst headers are responsible for
setting up optical data paths for their data bursts. Data
bursts will simply follow the light paths set up by burst
headers and are transparent to OBS core routers.
On the other hand, quantum cryptography

uses the quantum mechanism to provide security, which
is theoretically unbreakable. Given the optical modality
Fig. 1. Illustration of optical burst switching (OBS)
network.of all information within the OBS network,
introducing quantum cryptography in OBS networks
appears to be a natural choice. Since the OBS network
itself allows a one-to-one correspondence between a
header and its associated burst, the same relationship
could be exploited to tie the same key to the header and
the burst. The quantum-based methodology will allow a
secure distribution of keys which could be potentially
used to encrypt and decrypt each burst with a unique key.
However, it must be stressed that classical cryptography
and key distribution schemes will co-exist with quantumbased techniques for a long time. Therefore, we propose
an integrated security framework for OBS networks
which exploits the strengths of both classical and
quantum cryptography schemes, and allows a seamless
migration to quantum techniques as as the technology
evolves. In addition, by embedding security components
in the OBS native router architecture and incorporating
quantum techniques for key distribution, the proposed
approach can achieve a robust level of security while
combining the strengths of both quantum and classical
technologies. The integrated framework will make it
possible to offer different levels of security for different
applications.
The proposed security architecture is also
consistent with the potential use of quantum data
encryption in the future, as one can envisage the
possibility of using a quantum technique to encrypt such
as by using a Vernam cipher to make the encryption
theoretically unbreakable. The rest of the paper is
organized as follows. Section 2 provides the background
of OBS networks. In Section 3, we describe security
vulnerabilities in OBS networks, discuss the embedded
security services to secure the OBS network.
III.
PROPOSED EMBEDDED
SECURITY SERVICES AND INTEGRATED
SECURE OBS ROUTER ARCHITECTURE
The rest of the paper is organized as follows.

Section 2 provides the background of OBS networks. In
Section 3, we describe security vulnerabilities in OBS
networks, discuss the embedded security services to
secure the OBS networks, and propose the integrated
secure OBS router architecture which allows both
classical and quantum cryptography techniques..
3.1.Security vulnerabilities in OBS networks

OBS networks show great promise in providing cost
effective interconnection solutions to the ever growing
Internet. However, OBS network is not free of security
concerns . In this section, the need to bring security
measures to OBS networks is discussed.
II.
OPTICAL BURST
SWITCHING (OBS)BACKGROUND
Orphan Bursts: The burst header is responsible for

making the WDM channel reservation for its
corresponding burst. If the scheduling request is rejected
at one of the OBS core routers, there will be no valid
optical path set up for the arriving burst. Since the burst
has been launched, it is going to arrive at the input of the
core router in any case. At this point, the burst is no
longer connected with its header and becomes an orphan
In OBS networks, data are aggregated into

variable size data bursts, and are transported directly over
wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) links. A burst
header is generated for each data burst, and is sent on a
separate control channel ahead of the data burst. The
OBS routers will set up a light path for the duration of
the data burst according to the information carried in the
2
134
www.iaetsd.in
burst as shown in Figure 2(a). As a result, orphan data

bursts can be tapped off by some undesirable party,
compromising its security.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
channel can be found for the upcoming burst, the burst is

discarded. Note that all scheduling decisions are made by
processing burst information carried in burst headers onthe-fly. The OBS core routers have no ability to verify if
indeed the scheduled optical burst arrived at the
designated time. This can be used to launch a denial-ofservice attack by simply injecting malicious burst
headers, causing the core routers to mark WDM channels
busy and thus blocking real traffic passing through the
OBS network. As we can see, an OBS network is under
severe security threats. Effective security measures must
be implemented in order to make the OBS network a
viable solution for the future Internet.
FIG2(a)
3.2 Embedded Security Services

In the section, we propose to embed security
services which integrate classical and quantum
cryptography in the OBS network architecture, as
opposed to a layer on top of it.
End-to-end data burst confidentiality: In OBS networks,
data bursts assembled at the ingress edge router stay in
the optical domain in the OBS core network, and are only
disassembled at egress edge router. Since data bursts
switch transparently across the OBS core routers, the
end-to-end confidentiality of data bursts within the OBS
domain can be provided by encrypting data bursts at the
ingress edge router
and decrypting at the egress edge router. An effective
encryption scheme for securing data bursts can be
implemented using the advanced encryption standard
(AES) since it can function at high speed while also
providing a high degree of cryptographic strength. The
keys can be transferred using either classical techniques,
or quantum-based key distribution schemes.
Redirection of Data Bursts: The one-to-one

correspondence between the burst header and its
associated burst is implied by the offset time carried in
the burst header. Such one-to-one correspondence can be
violated by injecting a malicious header corresponding to
the same burst, as shown in Figure 2(b). As a result, the
route and the destination for the burst can be altered by
the malicious header, even though a legitimate path has
been set up by the authentic header.
FIG:2(b)
Per-hop burst header authentication: Unlike data bursts,

which retain optical modality in the core OBS network,
burst headers are converted back to an electronic form
and are processed at every OBS core
router along the path. Therefore, per hop burst header
authentication is needed to ensure that no malicious
headers are injected into the network. Authenticating
burst headers at each hop can mitigate several active
attacks such as misdirection of data bursts, replay, and
denial of service.
Burst integrity with burst retransmission: In OBS
networks, when there is no outgoing WDM channel
available, the burst will be dropped. In order to ensure
the integrity of burst transmission, we propose to
implement the following mechanism. In case a burst
is dropped due to lack of WDM resources, the burst
integrity service will trigger burst drop notification with
optional burst retransmission at the ingress edge router.
Burst integrity service also ensures that no injection or
replay occurs during burst transportation. Such service is
dependent upon direct access to the burst transmission
control, and can only be implemented as an embedded
service.
Replay: Replay attack can be launched by capturing a

legitimate but expired burst and transmitting at a later
time, or by injecting a expired burst header to cause the
optical burst to circulate in the OBS network, delaying its
delivery to the final destination.
Fig. 2. (a) Example of an orphan burst, (b)
example of violation of one-to-one correspondence in
redirected burst.
Denial of Service: OBS core routers make scheduling
decisions based on the availability of their outgoing
WDM channels. When a burst is scheduled, the core
router will mark the WDM channel busy for the
duration of the burst. In the case where no idle WDM
Integrated classical and quantum cryptography:

Classical cryptography relies on the assumption that
performing certain mathematical functions is intrinsically
hard using available computing resources. However, as
computing power will inevitably increase in the future,
3
135
www.iaetsd.in
such an assumption is increasingly questionable. In

contrast, quantum cryptography, or quantum key
distribution (QKD) built upon the principles of quantum
mechanics is theoretically unbreakable since observing
the state of a transmitted photon will corrupt its state.
However, quantum cryptography still faces technical
challenges and will not completely replace classical
cryptography in the near future. Therefore, we propose to
provide a security framework which entails both classical
and quantum components.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Fig 3
Secure edge router architecture:
The OBS edge router aggregates traffic into
bursts based on destination edge router addresses, and
possibly QoS parameters. The basic operation of an edge
router can be found in Reference [10]. We extend the
basic OBS edge router architecture to support embedded
OBS security services as shown in Figure 4. At the point
of ingress direction, the assembled bursts and their
corresponding headers are encrypted before transmission
onto the optical link. At the point of egress direction, the
received burst headers are authenticated before their
corresponding bursts are decrypted and disassembled.
The key management functions include both classical
and quantum components. The classical key distribution
protocol uses the control channel, while the QKD is via
Q-channels. The burst integrity control interacts with the
burst assembly process in the burst transmitter and
retransmits bursts as necessary.
3.3 INTEGRATED CLASSICAL AND QUANTUM

CRYPTOGRAPHY SERVICES
Supervisory security protocol: The supervisory protocol
manages security in the OBS network on a per user basis.
Specifically, it assigns keys to users and stores their hash
values and sets up the sequence that needs to be followed
to authenticate the users by password authenticated key
exchange (PAKE) or some other procedure. Once the
users have identified themselves for a session, a session
key is generated either by a classical or QKD techniques
for different levels of security guarantees. Such a service
will affect the burst assembly process, and has to be
implemented as an embedded service in the OBS
network architecture. The supervisory security protocol
is essential for the prevention of man-in-the middle
attacks.
Secure core router architecture:

OBS core routers electronically process the
burst headers sent on the control channel while allowing
optical bursts to pass transparently [10]. The integrated
secure OBS core router architecture shown in Figure 5
supports Q channels for QKD, as well as classical key
distribution protocols. The key manager in the core
router architecture is for burst header authentication, and
is transparent to the burst encryption key exchanged on
an end-to-end basis. The burst scheduling process is only
executed when the burst header is authenticated. When
bursts cannot be scheduled due to lack of available
outgoing WDM channels, the burst scheduling process
interacts with the burst integrity control unit to inform
the ingress router, and trigger burst retransmission.
3.3 Integrated Secure OBS Router Architecture

In this section, we show how to embed the
proposed security services as part of the native OBS
network architecture. The integrated router architecture
to support both classical and quantum cryptography is
also presented.
sQ-channel for quantum key distribution: The proposed
realization of QKD in OBS networks is as follows. As
mentioned earlier, OBS preserves the photonic modality
of information within its domain. We additionally
introduce the constraint of optical passivity within the
OBS boundary, specifically, so far as the channel that
carries the quantum key Fig. 3. Creating a Q-channel
between edge routers. information (called the Q-channel
in this paper) is the photon on the Q-channel on an endto-end basis. Since WDM technology is used for
interconnecting the edge and the core routers, one (or
several) of these channels (wavelengths) would carry the
photon whose polarization would convey information
regarding the key. Figure 3 shows the creation of a Qchannel between a pair of edge routers. The support for
Q-channels in OBS routers is further explained below.
High performance electronics such as field

programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) can be used to
implement the proposed embedded security services in
the secure edge and core routers, in much the same way
as the burst assembly and burst scheduling blocks are
implemented
4
136
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
We first describe how BB84 quantum

cryptography protocol works. Unlike classical states, a
quantum state is a superposition of several mutually
exclusive component states. The weights of the
component states are complex and their squared
magnitude represents the probability of obtaining that
specific component state. The quantum state X, if it is a
two component state, or a qubit, will be written as: |X_ =
a |0_ + b |1_ where |a|2 + |b|2 =1. Suppose, Alice and
Bob each has two polarizers, with 0/90 degrees and with
45/135 degrees. If Alice and Bob use the same basis
frames, then they can communicate different binary
states with each transmission. The two bases may be
represented two bases may be represented graphically as
+ and x, respectively.
We assume that Alice sends the string 0101100
using the two bases. Since Bob does not know the bases
used by Alice, he chooses random bases as shown in
Figure 6(b) and makes measurements. Bob sends the
chosen basis vectors to Alice who can now estimate as to
which measurement bases chosen by Bob were correct;
this is communicated by Alice to Bob through a classical
communication channel. Bob discards un-matched bits,
and the resultant bits . Since only the polarizers at
locations 1, 3, 4, 6, 7 correspond to the choices made by
Alice, Bob obtains the raw key of sub-string 00100. The
steps of BB84 protocol are summarized as follows:
Fig 4.Integrated secure OBS edge router architecture

IV.
QUANTUM
CRYPTOGRAPHY
FOR
ENHANCED SECURITY
4.1.Quantum Cryptography Background

Step 1: Alice randomly chooses polarizers to generate
photons and sends them to Bob.
Step 2: Bob receives those photons with randomly
chosen polarizers.
Step 3: Alice and Bob match their bases and discard the
data for un-matched polarizers.
It is proven that should the length of a random

key equal the length of the message (in other words, if
the rate at which the key can be transported equals the
data speed), the encryption performed on the message
through a simple technique such as the exclusive OR
operation will lead to a theoretically unbreakable cipher
Since there is no secure way of sending the random key
over a public channel, the use of quantum cryptography
can be envisaged as matching the performance of the
theoretically unbreakable cipher.The first quantum-based
scheme for exchanging secure keys was made by Bennett
and Brassard in 1984 and it is called the BB84 protocol ,
which is the most popular QKD method. QKD is
effective because of the no-cloning theorem that identical
copies of an arbitrary unknown quantum state cannot be
created. The BB84 protocol and its variants use qubits
(quantum bits) in one pass and this is followed by two
additional passes of classical data transmission. If Eve
tries to differentiate between two non-orthogonal states,
it is not possible to achieve information gain without
collapsing the state of at least one of them . Proofs of the
security of quantum cryptography are given variously in
References pactical issues have been considered in
References, and optical implementations are discussed in
References . The issue of using attenuated lasers rather
than single photon sources is considered .. In short,
quantum cryptography is ideally suited for OBS since it
is fundamentally based on the quantum properties of a
photon. Besides leading to a theoretically unbreakable
encryption scheme, the quantum-based encryption
technology is well matched for use in an end-to-end
photonic environment, which the OBS environment
typifies.
4.2. BB84 Quantum Cryptography Protocol and
Siphoning Attacks
However, BB84 is susceptible to siphoning

attacks. The unconditional security of BB84 and its
variants can only be guaranteed if ones light source
emits nothing but single photons. Since this is not
possible with current light sources, eavesdropping attacks
are possible.
In particular, the eavesdropper siphons off individual
photons and measures them to determine what the
legitimate receiver has obtained. To reduce the
probability that pulses will contain multiple photons,
current implementations of BB84 and its variants limit
the intensity of each pulse and reduce the bit rate at
which they are sent. But the weaker a pulse is, the less
distance it can travel, and a slower bit rate reduces the
speed at which keys can be distributed. The problem of
siphoning attack plagues all variants of the BB84
protocol and, therefore, it is essential to have a new
quantum cryptography protocol where the siphoned
photons do not reveal any information about the
transmitted bit.
4.3. 3-Stage Quantum Cryptography
Protocol for Secure Optical Burst Switching
Quantum cryptography allows one to go beyond the
classical paradigm and, therefore, overcome the
fundamental limitations that the classical techniques
suffer from. However, it also faces new challenges
related to performance in the presence of noise and
certain limitations of the single-photon generators. Our
5
137
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
sin
cos
is clear from the relation
R() R() = (cos
sin )
(sin
cos )
x
(cos
sin )
( sin
cos )
proposed integrated secure OBS architecture is fully

compatible with the well-known BB84 protocol.
However, to deal with the technical challenge of
siphoning attack on the practical multi-photon sources in
the BB84 protocol, we propose to use a new 3-stage
quantum cryptography protocol for the secure OBS
framework. Unlike BB84 and its variants, the 3-stage
quantum cryptography protocol is immune to siphoning
attacks and therefore, multiple photons can be safely
used in the quantum key communication.
3-stage quantum cryptography protocol is
based on random rotations which can better protect
duplicate copies of the photons than in non-single qubit
transmissions of the BB84 protocol. This also means that
the new protocol can use attenuated pulse lasers
rather than single-photon sources in the quantum key
exchange, which will potentially extend the transmission
distance. The 3-stage quantum cryptography protocol for
security services in OBS is described as follows.
Consider transferring state X from Alice to
Bob. The state X is one of two orthogonal states and it
may represent 0 and 1 by prior agreement of the parties.
To transmit the quantum cryptographic key, Alice and
Bob apply secret transformations UA and UB that are
commutative. The protocol can be summarized as
follows:
cos ( + )
sin( + )
sin( + )
cos ( + )
unlike the BB84 protocol which is vulnerable to

siphoning of photons in an attenuated pulsed laser
system, the proposed 3-stage protocol is immune to such
an attack since the actual quantum state of the key is
never revealed in the communication. This property is of
significant importance in terms of using quantum
cryptography in a practical network environment where
an optical path can potentially be extended beyond
trusted routers.
V.
IMPLEMENTATION:
In this section, we discuss the

implementation aspects of the protocol and practical
realization of the rotation operators, which are crucial to
providing secure data transfers. The section also
highlights the use of transformations that apply on
multiple qubits simultaneously.
One
possible
implementation is to apply Pauli transformations. They
are convenient to use, and entail less precision
requirements. The only condition for applying any new
transformation in the operation of the three-stage
protocol is that the transformations should map into the
|0> and |1> states with equal probability so that the
requirement for cryptographic security remains intact.
The simplest group consist of the basic single-qubit
operators X, Y, Z.
Step 1: Alice applies a unitary transformation UA on

quantum information X and sends the qubits to Bob.
Step 2: Bob applies UB on the received qubits UA(X),
which gives UBUA(X) and sends it back to Alice.
Step 3: Alice applies UA (transpose of the complex
conjugate of UA) on the received qubits to get
UAUBUA(X) = UAUAUB(X) = UB(X) (since UA& UB
are commutative)
Fig. 7. Illustration of recommended quantum
cryptography protocol for security services in OBS
networks .and UB commutate, UBUA(X) = UAUB(X))
X= 0
1
1
Z=
0
Y
1
0 -i
i
0
0 -1
QCAD is a windows-based environment for quantum
computing simulation which helps in designing circuits
and simulating them. QCAD can simulate the designed
the circuits and show results (states Of qubits).
Fig 7.Illustration of
cryptography protocol .
recommended
Here Alice is sending four qubits 0110 to

Bob.Alice is sending 0 bit in 0 degree polarization & 1
bit in 90 degree polarization. After that each bit
undergoes Pauli transformation(x) .Then the status is
measured. Bob will use the same polarization &
transformation on each bit. After measuring the status it
is found that both the measured
values are same.
quantum
and sends it back to Bob. Bob then applies UB on

UB(X) to get the quantum information X. The use of
random transformations, which Alice and Bob can
change from one qubit to another, guarantees that from
the perspective of the eavesdropper, the probability of
collapsing into |0_ and |1_ states has equal probability,
which is desirable for cryptographic security. An
example of the proposed new protocol is illustrated in
Figure 7. As we can see, while the actual quantum state
of X is never exposed on the link, Bob is able to restore X
and receives key 0 successfully.
The commutative of the rotation operator
R() =
cos
sin
The output obtained after doing this in QCAD is shown

below.
For the same qubits with different polarization
for each bit has done and measured the qubits status .The
output is shown below.The measured values is different
in both the cases.
6
138
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
communication
followed
by
two
hops
of
communications through classical channels, all three
hops of communication in the new protocol are quantum,
providing more security; (3) the newprotocol never
reveals the actual quantum state of the key on the
communication link, allowing the protocol to be
extended beyond trusted routers.
REFERENCES:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
VI.
Conclusion
7.
Practical implementations of BB84 protocol are not

secure with the presence of Eve. In contrast, the proposed
implementation of the three-stage protocol allows
multiple photons to be used in the secure communication,
even with the presence of Eve.This paper has proposed
an approach to embed a security framework in the native
OBS network architecture, providing a means to secure
the future Internet from the ground up. The proposed
embedded security architecture allows the most suited
classical and quantum cryptography techniques to be
deployed, making it possible to offer robust security.
While the proposed integrated security framework is
fully compatible with the well-known BB84 quantum
cryptography protocol, we recommend a new 3-stage
quantum cryptography protocol based on random
rotations of the polarization vector for the OBS security
framework. Compared to the BB84 protocol, the 3-stage
quantum cryptography protocol for security services in
OBS networks has the following advantages: (1) it does
not require single photon sources as required in the BB84
protocol (since practical photon sources produce many
photons some of which may be siphoned off to break the
protocol). Instead, multiple photons can be used in
communication, increasing potential transmission
distances, and reducing the protocols sensitivity to
noise; (2) while the BB84 protocol has one hop quantum
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Farahmand F, Jue J. Supporting QoS with

look-ahead window contention resolution in
optical
burst
switched
networks.ProceedingsoftheIEEEGlobalTeleco
mmunications (GLOBECOM), San Francisco,
CA, December 2003; 2699-- 2703.
Qiao C, Wei W, Liu X. Extending generalized
multiprotocol label switching (GMPLS) for
polymorphous, agile, and transparent optical
networks (PATON). IEEE Communications
Magazine 2006; 44(12): 104--114.
Phuritatkul J, Ji Y, Zhang Y. Blocking
probability of a preemption-based bandwidthallocation scheme for service differentiation in
OBS networks. IEEE/OSA Journal of
Lightwave Technology 2006.
Chen Y, Turner J, Mo P. Optimal burst
scheduling in optical burst switched networks.
IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology
2007.
OMahony MJ, Politi C, Klonidis D, Nejabati
R, Simeonidou D. Future optical networks.
IEEE/OSA Journal of Lightwave Technology
2006; 24: 4684--4696.
Chen Y, Verma PK. Secure optical burst
switching (S-OBS)- --framework and research
directions. IEEE Communications Magazine
2008; 46(8): 40--45.
Stallings W. Cryptography and Network
Security: Principles and Practice (4th edn),
Prentice Hall: NJ, 2006,
ChenY,TurnerJ,ZhaiZ.Designandimplementatio
nofanultra fast pipelined wavelength scheduler
for optical burst switching. Photonic Network
Communications 2007; 14: 317--326.
Wang L, Chen Y, Thaker M. Virtual burst
assembly at ingress edge routers---a solution
to out-of-order delivery in optical burst
switching (OBS) networks. Proceedings of the
IEEE
Devetak I, Winter A. Relating quantum privacy
and quantum coherence: an operational
approach. Physical Review Letters 2004;.
Kak S. A three-stage quantum cryptography
protocol. Foundations of Physics Letters 2006;
19: 293--296.
Yuhua Chen,Pramode K Verma. Embedded
security frame work for integrated classical &
quantum cryptography services in optical burst
switching
networks
Security
and
communication networks -2009
Sayonha
Mandal
,James Sluss.
Implementation of secure quantum protocol
using multiple photons for communication2012.
7
139
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Detection, Recognition and Localization of Partial Discharge

Sources Using Acoustic Emission Method
1
DEETI SREEKANTH.
Department of Electrical and Electronic Engineering-JNTUH college of engineering,Jagityal, Karimnagar
investment of the power system. As Partial Discharges
(PD) measurement is an efficient tool for diagnosis
purposes, there have been extensive efforts to analyze
various aspects of PD such as measurement, recognition
and localization. PD measurement on transformer in
operation is very difficult because it is necessary to
make the discrimination between PD and different
sources of noise. PD are usually detected acoustically or
electrically. The system for acoustic measurement
cannot be calibrated because in its way the acoustic
wave passes through different barriers with various
acoustic impedances and is exposed to the reflection
phenomenon. The acoustic method is used only for
monitoring and localization. In contrast, the electric
methods offer both a determination of the apparent
charge and PD localization.
The acoustic emission method, which is widely used in:
(i) diagnostics of cutting tools and machine cutting
process, (ii) machinery and civil structures condition
assessment, (iii) fatigue and fracture materials research,
(iv) detection of material defects, (v) orogenic and
earthquake prediction research, (vi) rockbursts
prediction in deep mines and (vii) in chemical reactions
and phase transitions research.
At present, there are a few methods, which allow to
monitor the development of partial discharges, such as:
DGA - Dissolved Gas in oil Analysis, UHF - Ultra High
Frequency and AE -Acoustic Emission. Each method is
characterized by certain advantages and disadvantages,
which were summarized in Table 1. From the listed
methods, the most applicable and least expensive seems
to be the AE method.
The main advantages of the AE method are: (i) tests can
be taken when the transformer is online (during applied
voltage or induced voltage tests), (ii) simple test
procedure, (iii) susceptibility to external electrical
disturbances is relatively low, and (iv) possibility of
partial discharge recognition, location and on-line
monitoring (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers [IEEE], 2007; Kuffel et al., 2000; Lundgaard,
1992a, 1992b; Markalous et al., 2003).
In order to develop and optimize the acoustic emission
for power transformer diagnostics, the author followed
the approach outlined below:
selection of optimal AE signal processing methods
and parameters for efficient PD detection and
recognition,
laboratory research of PDs parameters generated in
properly prepared models of oil/paper insulating
systems (imitating real
PD sources in power
transformers),
Abstract-Partial discharge (PD) can be detected using

acoustic emission (AE) method to increase the detection
threshold and to improve the performance of on-line
measurement of PD in noise environment. The PD
emitted energy as electromagnetic emission, acoustic
emission and ozone and nitrous oxide gases. PD source
localization supports a better diagnosis and the decrease
of the repair time. The acoustic emission (AE) is a
group of phenomena involving generation of transient
elastic (acoustic or vibro-acoustic) waves, resulting from
liberation of intermolecular bond energy (deformation,
cracking, phase transitions). This method is also applied
in electrical power engineering for detection and
location of partial discharge (PD) sources in
insulationsystem of large power transformers
andGIS/GIL(Gas insulated substation).The systematic
evaluation of transformer insulation systems has
become a necessity in order to avoid the sudden outages
of the power transformers that generate great financial
losses. Partial discharge (PD) measurement brings
objective information on the nature and risk degree of
transformer faults.The goal of this research work is the
location of the source in order to assess the condition of
paper-oil insulation systems. The PD is measured with
at least one acoustic sensor (ultrasonic PZT) and one
electric sensor . The paper presents a PD source
localization method that combines the results of the PD
electrical measurement with the ones of the PD acoustic
measurement.
Index TermsPartial discharges(PD), electrical and

acoustic combined detection, pattern recognition,
power transformers, diagnosis.
1.INTRODUCTION
artial discharges (PD) are stochastic electric

phenomena that cause a large amount of small
shortcoming of the isolation. These discharges are
generated inside the isolation system and are of small
magnitude (pC) [1]-[3]. PD are present in the
transformers due to the gas dissolved in the oil, the
humidity and other faults inside the equipment. PD
cannot be avoided since the transformer is in service,
but the problem appears when PD are generated by a
localized fault in the isolation or are very frequent.
These are signs of an imminent failure of the power
equipment. Thus, the detection and location of the PD is
an important tool of diagnosis. Power transformers are
very expensive and form a high percentage of the

140
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
completion and developing of PD-patterns database

Possibilities
METHODS
UHF
DGA
AE
Detection
yes
yes
yes
Detection
sensitivity
High(~10p
C,
depending
on time of
PD
activity)
No
High(~1-10pC,
depending on distance
and location of the PD
source )
Moderate(>300
pC, depending
on location of
the PD source
)
Limited
Limited
No
yes
yes
Location
Limited
Limited
yes
Installation
difficulty
Moderate
(transform
er must
be turned
off)
Moderate(through oil
valve,transformer
under load/ through
dielectric window,
transformer must be
turned off and opened)
Low(
transformer
under load)
Limited by number of
valves or dielectric
windows
Open
structure,
typically 1-16
Intensity
measurement
Identification
sensors
1
(due to
high
costs)
based on laboratory results and selected parameters,

verification tests on real power transformers.
Table 1. The comparison of the PD monitoring methods for
large power transformers
2. AE measurement system for partial discharge

detection
A typical measurement system for partial discharges
detection based on acoustic emission method is
composed of: (i) piezoelectric sensors, (ii) preamplifiers,
(iii) signal conditioning unit, (iv) signal acquisition unit
and (v) specialized software for digital signal
processing. The most advanced systems dedicated for
power transformer on-line monitoring are additionally
adjusted to work in difficult weather conditions
(embedded
climate
control
unit,
waterproof
chassis/enclosure) and they are equipped with an expert
system software for automatic PD detection and
recognition. The system for power transformer online
monitoring, which was in detail described in
(Sikorski&Walczak, 2010), was presented in Fig 1.
Fig.1. system for large power transformer online

monitoring based on AE method.
The choice of the optimal type of acoustic emission

sensor for PD detection is difficult, because it involves
the need for finding a compromise between the required
sensitivity and bandwidth. Some experts recommend the
use of narrowband sensors, emphasizing their high
sensitivity in the lower frequencies (20-100 kHz)
(Bengtsson&Jnsson, 1997). These sensors provide high
efficiency of detection of surface discharges (generating
acoustic emission signals with frequencies from 20 to
110 kHz), which generally have high energy and can
cause accelerated degradation of the insulation system.
In turn, other experts suggest the choice of broadband
transducers (up to 1 MHz) with the resonance frequency
in the range from 60 kHz to 150 kHz .Theoretically,
they enable the detection of all types of partial
discharges that may occur in transformers with oil/paper

141
www.iaetsd.in
insulation. The only disadvantage of this solution is

smaller sensitivity of surface discharge detection.
A fundamental importance in the detection of partial
discharges in a power transformer is a proper acoustic
coupling between the sensor and the surface of the tank
(American Society for Testing and Materials [ASTM],
2007). For this purpose one can use silicone grease or
gel dedicated for ultrasonic applications. A lack of
direct contact of acoustic sensor with the tank causes a
strong attenuation of the AE amplitude signal, and thus
a strong decrease in sensitivity of partial discharges
detection. A practical solution facilitating the mounting
of AE sensor to the tank wall with a constant force is the
use of special handles equipped with permanent
magnets (Fig. 2).
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
discharge source and AE sensor (Sikorski et al., 2007c).

The acoustic field inside the tank is very complex due to
wave reflection and diffraction in different
materials(pressboard, copper, pressboard, paper, oil).
The acoustic wave propagates in materials, from which
the transformer is made, with different velocity: 1413
m/s in transformer oil, 1500 m/s in impregnated
pressboard, 3570 m/s in copper and 5100 m/s in steel.
The velocity of the AE wave propagation in oil strongly
depends on its temperature. When the oil temperature
equals 20C the velocity of wave propagation amounts
to 1413 m/s. For higher oil temperatures the velocity
falls and equals: 1300 m/s by 50C, 1200 m/s by 80C
and 1100 m/s by 110C. The velocity in metal is greater
than in oil, therefore very often the wave, which most of
its way travels in tank wall (structure-borne path),
arrives at the sensor first. Afterwards the sensor
registers the wave, which propagated in oil slowly
(direct acoustic path). The problem of structure-borne
waves may be minimized by placing the acoustic sensor
inside the tank. In order to achieve this goal,
hydrophones or optical fibre sensors are used (IEEE,
2007; Lundgaard, 1992a, 1992b). The model of AE
waves propagation in power transformer tank and its
influence on signal acquisition outcomes was presented
in Fig. 3.
(a)
Fig.3. The propagation of AE waves in power

transformer tank.
The correct interpretation of measurement results may

be made difficult by disturbances during on-site PD
detection. The main sources of the disturbances are:
switching of on-load tap changer,
thermal faults of transformer's active part,
high-voltage switchgear operations near the
investigated transformer,
environmental noises (thunderstorms, rain, wind),
coremagnetostriction noise (Barkhausen effect),
loose shielding connection in transformer tank.
In order to interpret the results of the AE method
correctly, mostly the comparative analysis with
additional parameters of the transformer during the test,
(b)
Fig.2. General view of the AE sensors water proof
enclosure with permanent magnets (a); typical AE
sensors placement on transformer tank (b).
3. Possibilities and limits of acoustic emission in

power transformer diagnostics
In case of large power transformers the main problem is
an environmental heterogeneity between partial

142
www.iaetsd.in
such as: load, voltage, oil/windings temperature,

information on time and number of switching operations
of onloadtap changer and cooling fans etc., is
conducted. However the best results are achieved by
simultaneous use of the AE and electrical method. The
conventional electrical PD detectors conformable with
IEC-60270 standard are not suitable for on-site
measurement (due to corona discharges and other
electrical disturbances), but it is possible to use the UHF
probe inside the transformer tank installed through a
drain valve or Rogowski coil (HFCT/RFCT sensors as
well) installed on the transformer tank ground wire
(IEEE, 2007).
4. Selected methods of AE signals processing
The first stage of the research was related to the
selection of signal processing methods which would
support both the detection and recognition of PDs. The
parameters used for software selection included
immunity to disturbances and wide- and narrow-band
noises, minimum computing time, and overall
efficiency. Based on results of numerous computer
simulations anda widespread literature study,
highresolutionspectral analysis (HRSA) and joint timefrequency analysis (JTFA) were chosen as the optimum
methods for establishing the AE-based PD-patterns
(Antoniadis & Oppenheim,1995; Holschneider, 1998;
Kia et al., 2007; Lobos et al., 2000, 2001; Ma et al.,
2002; Shim et al., 2000; Yang & Judd, 2003; Zhang et
al., 2003).
4.1 High-resolution spectral analysis (HRSA)
High-resolution spectral analysis methods, also known
as subspace methods, generate the frequency component
estimates for a signal based on eigenanalysis or
eigendecomposition of the correlation matrix (Hayes,
1996; Marple, 1987). These methods exploit the noise
subspace to estimate unknown frequency parameters of
a random process and are very effective in the detection
of sinusoids (a PD signal can be approximated as an
exponentially attenuated sinusoidal oscillation) buried in
noise, especially when the signal-to-noise ratios (SNR)
are low. This property makes the analysis method
particularly attractive for efficient detection of PD
signals recorded under conditions of strong external
disturbances. Due to this fact, the detection of internal
discharges occurring in power transformer in which the
acoustic signal is damped by pressboard barriers is also
possible. It is worth mentioning that such efficient
detection with the use of classic Fast Fourier Transform
(FFT) is not possible. Among available subspace
methods Multiple Signal Classification (MUSIC) was
chosen (Schmidt, 1986). The MUSIC method very
precisely identifies harmonic components .This property
is illustrated below by the results of simulation in which
two waveforms were used (Fig. 4). The first waveform
analysed (Fig. 4a) was registered in an electrode system,
which enabled the generation of different types of multisource discharges. In this case PD in an internal gas
void and surface discharges were generated
simultaneously (at ~30 mV noise level). The second
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
waveform analysed (Fig. 4b) has the same PD signal,

but it is buried in additive white Gaussian noise. One
can see that the MUSIC method, independent of the
noise level, efficiently detects all the dominant harmonic
components (in this case ~100 kHz and ~280 kHz). Fast
Fourier Transform allows detection of PD signals only
in the absence of other noise sources, because all the
noise components are also visible in the spectrum.
Therefore, in a case of measurements under industrial
conditions (e.g. in power substation), it is advantageous
to replace the classic FFT analysis with the MUSIC
algorithm, or similar highresolution spectral method.
This results in enhanced PD detection sensitivity and
fault recognition efficiency.
(a)
(b)
Fig.4.Time waveform, Continuous Wavelet transform

(CWT)spectrogram, normalized FFT spectrum and normalized
MUSIC spectrum, determined for:a) PD pulses b) PD pulses buried in
additive with Gaussian noise.
4.2 Joint Time-Frequency Analysis (JTFA)

Joint Time-Frequency Analysis is also an effective tool
for
acoustic
emission
signal
processing
(Boczar&Zmarzly, 2004). The application of JTFA
allows one not only to observe the changes in amplitude
spectrum, but also makes possible detecting in
investigated
signal
narrow-band
noises
and
disturbances. A given type of PD can be described as a
three dimensional image (time-frequency-amplitude).
For joint time-frequency analysis of acoustic emission
signals originating from partial discharges, the
Continuous Wavelet Transform (CWT) was chosen.
5. Partial discharges recorded in oil-paper insulation
models
Properly planed and performed investigations conducted
on models are important sources of information on

143
www.iaetsd.in
electrical withstand of parts of transformer insulation,

such as coil-to-coil insulation, clearance to core, space
at the bushings etc. But if the conducted investigations
should have a cognitive and scientific value, it is
necessary to fulfil some basic postulates, such as:
the construction of models should have the same
material structure, shape and
proportional geometrical dimensions as the part of the
insulation that is modelled; it
should reproduce the same mechanism of initiation and
development of partial discharges,
the construction of models should reproduce real
distribution of electric field,
the oil in the model should have similar composition
as the real one content of water, dissolved gases and
solid impurities.The model investigations performed
with utilizing the above mentioned conditions, allowed
to register the waveforms of AE signals generated by
partial discharges typical for oil/paper insulation system
of a power transformer (Bengtsson&Jnsson, 1997;
Boczar, 2002; Lundgaard, 2000; Elborki et al., 2002;
Harrold, 1975; Massingue et al., 2006) (Table 2).
PD1
PD2
Surface discharges in non-uniform electric field with large

normal component of
field strength vector
PD4
Partial discharges in internal gas void
PD5
PD6
Partial discharges in gas bubbles in oil

Pressboard penetrating discharges (puncture)
PD7
Partial discharges from a needle in oil (point-to-plane

electrode system)
PD8
Partial discharges from a needle on free potential in oil
PD9
Partial discharges in oil wedge at the oil-pressboardelectrode triple junction

Turn-to-turn insulation discharges (interturn)
PD10
The location of partial discharges with the use of

acoustic emission method may be conducted by: (i)
measurement of AE pulses amplitude in different
distances from PD source (auscultatory method), or (ii)
AE pulses arrival timings at sensors fixed in various
places of the transformer tank (triangulation method)
(Markalous et al., 2008). The auscultatory method
applied in this investigation is the easiest way to locate
the PD sources (IEEE, 2007). Despite the fact that its
accuracy is lower than that of triangulation methods, it
may be very efficient and useful in cases, when (i) the
measurement time is limited by the time of voltage tests,
(ii) during the voltage test the phase with PD source has
been detected with the use of wideband electrical
method, (iii) acoustic measurement is
conducted with one-channel-setup, (iv) the detail
construction of the investigated transformer is known,
(v) the investigated transformer is relatively small.To
avoid the measurement errors and increase the PD
amplitude measurement accuracy, the measurement
channel calibration was conducted each time after fixing
the sensor on the tank wall.
7. Conclusions
The example of efficient detection and recognition of
partial discharge sources using acoustic emission
method with advanced signal processing was presented
in the chapter. High-resolution Multiple Signal
Classification (MUSIC) method, chosen for the
frequency analysis, effectively detects in registered AE
signal (also buried in noise) frequency components
corresponding to partial discharges. In turn, joint timefrequency analysis using Continuous Wavelet
Transform (CWT) allows to detect multi-source
discharges of different types, as well as narrowband
noises. On the basis of selected digital signal processing
methods and complex model research, the database with
PD-Patterns was prepared. An important conclusion of
this model research is that each of the investigated
insulation defects (PD sources) generates repeatable and
characteristic (unique) acoustic emission signals.
Moreover, it was shown that the shape of PD-Patterns
strongly depends on the type of the applied sensor.
Due to that, a high sensitivity of measurement with a
possibility of detecting all PD types is combined.The
measurements performed in the power transformer
factory showed that PD-patterns acquired during a
laboratory research can be successfully employed in
detection and recognition of discharges occurring in real
power transformers.PD source localization is of main
concern in the application of acoustic emission.
8. References
1.Antoniadis, A. & Oppenheim, G. (1995). Wavelets and
Statistics, Springer-Verlag, ISBN 9780387945644, New
York, USA
2.ASTM E650-97 (2007). Standard Guide for Mounting
Piezoelectric Acoustic Emission Sensors, American
Society for Testing and Materials, 2007
3.Bengtsson, T. &Jnsson, B. (1997). Transformer PD
diagnosis using acoustic emission technique, 10th
Surface discharges in uniform electric field, where the

normal component of
field strength vector is insignificant
Surface discharges in moderate non-uniform electric field
with small normal
component of field strength vector
PD3
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Table.2. The investigated types of partial discharges.

During the laboratory research the influence of some
factors on AE signals frequencyparameters was
investigated. The factors, among other things, were: (i)
moisture content, (ii) aging degree of pressboard/paper
samples, (iii) test voltage polarity, (iv) electrode and
insulation samples geometry, as well as (v) type of
applied AE sensor (narrow/wideband) (Sikorski, 2006).
Furthermore, the pressboard barriers influence on AE
attenuation effects and their frequency parameters was
examined (Sikorski et al., 2007b).
6. Partial discharge detection, recognition and
location acoustic emission method

144
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420

7-6

145
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Evasive Security Using ACLs on Threads

Using firewall-like rules to prevent malware
Saifur Rahman Mohsin
Executive
Raaj Construction
Trichy, Tamil Nadu, India
mohsin92@me.com
Abstract This document describes a new architecture for

security systems, which greatly improves system performance
and at the same time enforces veritable security to it.
Conventional anti-virus systems that exist in the market today
consume massive amount of memory (both physical as well as
permanent) and cannot be relied upon by power users who need
to tap into the full potential of their devices. Also, these systems
cannot be employed in thin clients, which have limitations in
quality and capacity of hardware. The document describes a
better architecture for the detection and prevention of malware
with an escalated improvement in overall performance of the
system. It also discusses new concepts that may be ported into
existing security systems to improve the efficiency of those
systems.
!!
!
confidentiality, integrity or availability of a system.

Regardless of whether a given malware is a virus, worm, or
Trojan, it always requires a thread to execute. Like any
program, it consists of several code statements and also has a
single point of entry to execute. This means that like any
program, a virus requests the operating system for memory
and processor cycles (as shown in Fig. 1) to execute. It also
contains a process table and is associated with a Process ID
(pid) and handle ID.
Index TermsComputer Security, Just-in-time Detection,

Malware Prevention, Security Architecture
I.
INTRODUCTION
Antivirus systems have been in use for a long time now
since the numbers of virus has been increasing in the past few
years. Different anti-virus systems provide a variety of
distinctive features that offer to make systems highly secure
from malware. However, the fundamental way they function is
always consistent. Conventional anti-viruses scan recursively
burrowing into file systems as well as connected peripherals
identifying files that contain malware signatures either in plain
text or obfuscated formats. The problem is that this process is
a high energy consuming process and also requires a bulk of
memory in order to function. These systems also require to be
updated frequently to update the malware definitions (i.e. the
signatures) of new malware that are created every hour.
This paper describes a more efficient architecture to
overcome the problems of the existing conventional systems.
This is done by looking at malware in their most primitive
form to understand the basic process that any malware involves
itself in--from hooking itself into the operating system to
executing stealthily. We also look at as how anti-virus systems
detect these malicious files so that we can create a more
intuitive and real-time system that handles malware effectively
before it attacks the system.
Fig. 1. How a process begins to execute
Most viruses are targeted towards a certain kind of resource.

The intended resource may range from private information,
confidential data, illegal use of computational power, or even
to serve ads (in case of adware). The code that is written in a
virus program must be well hidden from the anti-virus system
as well as other programmers who might reverse engineer the
code for their own deeds. A good virus therefore is encrypted
in a format that makes it hard for anti-virus systems to neither
detect nor reverse engineering to be feasible. This process is
known as obfuscation and most good viruses that are existent
today are well obfuscated.
In addition to obfuscation, most viruses are attached to

legitimate files so that they are more concealed. There is a
higher chance of a virus being installed as a sub component of
an infected program rather than as an individual program
itself. This ensures that the virus program does not appear to
be malicious thereby preventing anti-virus (AV) systems to
flag it. Such a program that is highly invisible to an AV is
considered to be Fully UnDetectable (FUD). There are several
FUD viruses in existence today. These are no longer just
II.
HOW VIRUSES WORK
Malware come in many different forms. It ranges from
commons viruses, to malicious scripts, worms, Trojans,
rootkits, etc. A virus is anything that can cause havoc to the

146
www.iaetsd.in
targeted towards computers but are aimed towards national

infrastructure like power grids, nuclear plants, automation
plants, etc. Therefore, the conventional AV systems do not
provide the necessary security that is required and hence we
must look for better solutions.
Our goal is to develop such a system and which detects and
informs the end user about the existence of these new threads
(or processes) which the user never intended to execute. A
user may decide whether he really wants to execute a given
process and the system can mark these choices as trusted
processes (in a similar fashion as websites are marked as
trusted by firewalls and browsers). Everything else can be
blocked (these will include the threads created by malicious
programs), as it seems as an unnecessary overhead for the
system to execute these processes regardless of whether these
are malicious or not.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
website / hostname must be blocked or allowed. Such a list

specifies the limitation of the access and is known as an
Access Control List (ACL). We implement this concept into
anti-virus detection systems to realize a more effective
architecture.
The efficiency of this lies in the fact that there is no
scanning mechanism to search for viruses. Instead, the
detection is done just at the moment a program requests the
OS (As shown in Fig. 2) to provide resources for it. This
means that we are performing a Just-In-Time Detection (JITD) and that is why this architecture is more effective
compared to the existing ones that are in use today.
III.
HOW ANTI-VIRUS SOFTWARE WORKS
There are several AVs available in the market today. A lot of
them offer special features, which have a certain edge over
other systems. Regardless of these features, a typical AV
system consists of few common components A database of
virus signatures, a scanner and few auxiliary modules to make
it easy for the user to customize the way the AV system
behaves. A definition repository (a file or database) contains
several code signatures that may be used to identify if a file is
infected / infectious. These signatures need to be frequently
updated as time progresses and new viruses are manufactured
every hour. This becomes an overhead to the user to update
the system every now and then. Also, the AV system tends to
become larger and larger as time progresses due to the
vastness of the definition file and the enormity of the new
signatures that keep getting added. To complicate this further,
the AV system itself contains a scanner module, which sweeps
through the file system, testing each file if it may contain plain
text or obfuscated forms of the virus signature. The entire
search process requires a substantial amount of memory and
slows down the overall performance of the system. It has been
observed that a system is much faster when an AV system is
not present than otherwise.
Thus, it is possible to conclude that an anti-virus system,
which uses the conventional architecture, cannot be a realtime system and the success rate and efficiency depends on the
number of virus signatures present as well as the kind of
obfuscation algorithms that it can detect. Our goal is to
describe a better architecture that prevents this overhead and
also serves a higher success rate. Such a system is described in
the next section.
Fig. 2. How the proposed system intervenes process startup
In order to increase the efficiency much further, we need

not rescan a process if it has already been scanned. However,
this causes a risk because a user may decide to update the clean
file with a malicious one. For this reason, we take the hash of
the file contents and store it in the ACL along with the process
name. There is no need to store the path as the hash ensures
that a particular file is always uniquely identified. Every time
the process starts our system will ensure that the present hash is
identical to the stored hash in ACL. If so, it will not scan the
file. If not, it should scan the file as it has been altered. This
technique is highly effective because it is extremely difficult
even for any skilled programmer to write a malware program
whose hash value exactly coincides with an existing program.
V.
ACCESS CONTROL LISTS
ACLs have been in use in operating systems for decades.
They are generally used to specify file rights to provide
authority for who has access to a particular file. An ACL may
be a simple text file that contains mappings of process names
along with their permissions and hashes.
Processes that start are first checked as to whether an entry
for the process exists in the ACL. If it does, then it is checked
whether it has been modified using the computed hash. If it
does not match, the anti-malware system is invoked to process
the initiated process and determine whether it is safe to
execute or not.
We use a standard hash like MD5 or SHA-1 to uniquely
identify the file. The reason being that some files tend to
change when a user updates the file by replacing it. The
architecture explained her strongly enforces that files /
IV.
THE IMPROVED ARCHITECTURE
It has already been described in Section II that any malware
requires a space in the process table in order to run and
therefore has an entry point. Exploiting this fact, we can
design an architecture that ensures that each process that starts
must be filtered using a set of rules that can be pre-defined as
well as user-defined. This is very much alike to the system
used by firewalls--where a list is used to decide whether a

147
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
programs need not be processed unless its data has been

modified. Hence, by using a computed hash we can easily
detect changes.
Fig. 4. Memory usage statistics of the proposed system against other

applicationsbrowser and another AV system
initiation. By suspending the thread until the process

completes, it was possible to prevent the system to get
infected in processing time itself. Also, it was identified that
this architecture is self-preserving as it prevented even the
ACLs to be directly modified by a process. The
implementation was targeted towards the Windows operating
system, as it is the most widely used system and has more
viruses when compared to other systems. An analysis was also
taken (As shown in Fig. 4) which determined that our system
was highly efficient in memory consumption as it was
comparatively nothing to other AV systems or even other
programs. Hence, it was determined that this architecture is
the best approach for malware prevention as it saves a lot of
resources.
Fig. 3. How the proposed system blocks malicious processes
An ACL therefore contains program names, their computed

hashes and the access levels. If upon execution of a new
process, the process exists in ACL and is marked as a blocked
process then the system prevents the execution of the process
(See Fig. 3) and this prevents malicious code from infecting the
system.
VI.
JUST-IN-TIME DETECTION
It has already been well explained in Section III that most
AVs are pretty slow. They not only take a lot of time to run but
also consumes a large amount of physical memory. This
causes a lot of lag in other programs and slows down the
overall performance of the system.
By detecting the processes exactly at the time of their
execution, we remove the need for a scanner to traverse
through the hard drives as well as connected peripherals. It
enables the program to run at a very low memory cost and high
efficiency with momentary bursts of memory usage when a
process is caught. We call this technique as Just-in-time
detection simply because it detects just before the time of
execution. This means that it is absolutely allowed for a
malicious file to sit in a hard drive as long as its not harmful.
The moment it is executed, our system kicks in to prevent it
from causing harm to the system.
REFERENCES
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
VII.
IMPLEMENTATION
Using C# an implementation was made using the Diagnosis
namespace in the .NET framework to intercept process
Fred B. Schneider, Cornell University Least Privilege and

More [IEEE Computer Society 1540-7993/03, 2003].
"Managing Authorization and Access Control". Microsoft
Technet. 2005-11-03. Retrieved 2013-04-08.
Cynthia E. Irvine, Naval Postgraduate School Teaching
Constructive Security [IEEE Computer Society 1540-7993/03,
2003 under Security & Privacy].
"Access Control Lists". MSDN Library. 2012-10-26. Retrieved
2013-04-08.
Elias Levy, Architect & former CTO, Symantec Approaching
Zero [IEEE Computer Society 1540-7993, 2003 under Attack
Trends, 2004].

148
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
BONE QUALITY ASSESSMENT USING MEMS ACCELEROMETER

MR.G.MANIKANDAN 1 , MR. M. SURESH 2, K.ANURADHA3 , SIJO MATHEW4
1,2
Assistant Professor, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering,

3
Assistant Professor, Department of Computer science and Engineering,
4
Student, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering,
mrg.manikandan@gmail.com,2suresh.bnec@gmail.com,3akadarkarai@yahoo.com,
4
sijomathew@hotmail.com
ABSTRACT
Bone Mineral Density (BMD) is the
collected the data from ten subjects with
amount of mineral per square centimeter of
two different age groups and sex and
bone.
found that the acceleration value obtained
Osteoporosis is defined
as a
systemic skeletal disease characterized by
in
low bone mass and micro architectural
accelerometer of above 35 age is higher
deterioration of bone tissue, with a
compared with the subjects below 35 years
consequent increase in bone fragility and
old. From the acquired and analyzed data,
susceptibility to fracture The prime motive
we found there is a significant change
of our work is to produce a cost effective
exists among the different age groups.
medical instrument of the Bone Mineral

Density
(BMD).The
the
y-axis
of
second
MEMS
1. INTRODUCTION
developed
Bone quality is a
instrumentation for assessing bone quality
composite of
utilizes the principle of impulse response
properties that make bone resist fracture
method.
such as its micro architecture accumulated
Our device
consists of an
automated hammer which knocks in the
microscopic
damage
the
quality
of
medial side of the proximal tibia. The
collagen mineral crystal size and bone
stress wave is propagated through the bone
turnover. The most prevalent sequence is
and it is picked up by two triaxial MEMS
compression fractures of the vertebral
accelerometers. Using this setup
the
bodies and fractures of the ribs, proximal
acceleration magnitude has been measured
femur (hip), humerus and distal radius.
for various subjects and the corresponding
These fractures lead to deformity, loss of
signals were obtained. The acquired
mobility, independence and even death.
signals are fed into the computer. We have
With increasing population of elderly

149
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
women, the assessment and treatment of
switches. When the hammer hits the
osteoporosis has become an important
Medialisis Condolosis region, the impulse
problem in clinical gynecology. Bone
response travels through the bone of the
mineral
aging,
leg. The MEMS accelerometers are placed
menopause, and disuse. The decrease in
below the lower portion of the leg. The
biomechanical strength of bone with age is
experiment has been carried out for 10
much more pronounced than the loss of
women and men (age 40-50 years) and
bone mass due to perforations during the
from men under the age group of 15-20
remodelling process [3].
years.
loss
occurs
with
BMD measurements in conjunction
Informed consent was obtained from
with information about the structure and
all the subjects and they were found to be
elastic properties of bone will result in a
in good health from clinical evaluation and
good
mechanical
based on the answers to questionnaire. The
condition and susceptibility to fracture.
subjects were excluded from the study if
Moreover, during accidental impact, our
any of the mechanical strength of the
bones arc subjected to high strain rate
following
loading. Since bone is a viscoelastic
inactivity or bed rest longer than 4 weeks
material [4], its response to this type of
within the past 12 months, subjects with
loading cannot be assumed to be the same
fragility and atraumatic fractures, medical
as predicted by a static analysis. Therefore,
conditions
it
dynamic
metabolism, and the subjects who are
characteristics of bone under normal and
taking oral contraceptives or undergoing
diseased state in order to understand its
hormone replacement therapy. The stress
response
to
waves are generated by the impact of
condition
[5].
indication
is
of
important
its
to
study
more
realistic
The
change
loading
in
conditions
affecting
were
normal
present:
bone
Peak
hammer on the medial side of the proximal
acceleration magnitude with age is also
tibia at a distance of 4 cm from medial
evaluated.
condoyle.
The
impact
force
applied
through impulse hammer is standardized
2. MATERIALS AND METHOD
between 2-2.5N for each impact which is

The automated hammer that runs by
the
DC
motor
hits
the
Medialisis
in
the
leg.
Condolosis
region
automated
hammer
is
controlled
automatically done. The data is acquired

into a computer after digitization using
The
ADC through software
by
at a sampling
frequency of 100 KHZ per channel. The

150
www.iaetsd.in
data is sampled for 5 seconds in which 4
acquiring
impulses are applied and corresponding
generating signals
response
data
are
and
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
displaying
data
and
acquired.USB-1208
Series modules are low-cost, PC-based

analog
and
TracerDAQ
digital
I/O
software
devices.
included
for
Schematic block diagram of the hardware setup
Camera view of the hardware setup

151
www.iaetsd.in
3. RESULTS
In
this
study,
ten
subjects
Sl.n
o
Subjects
Details
Accelero
meter-1
output
(Max)
3.0986
Accelero
meter-2
output
(Max)
1.4351
1.
Men
(15-20)
2.
Women
(15-20)
1.7428
0.9744
3.
Men
(45-50)
2.5747
1.0590
4.
Men
(Dia.-4550)
Women
(45-50)
1.6174
1.5279
2.0781
1.1746
Women
(Dia.4550)
3.2633
0.5723
had
participated with different age group such

as below 35 and above 35 age group. The
following parameters are made constant
for all the subjects at the time of
acquisition of reading.
Sampling rate: 0.15
Sampling count: 230
Sampling interval: 0.01
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
5.
Tabulation
A typical impulse response of tibia of
It was found that the variation is observed
normal subject
more clearly in the Y-axis than X-axis
From the results obtained, we can

conclude
that the
acceleration
since the vibration from the automated
value
hammer is transmitted vertically through
obtained in terms of mille volts in channel
the bone than in horizontal direction.
2 (Y-Axis of second accelerometer) is
This data obtained from ten
found to be high in Case of the above 35
subjects is a preliminary work where for
age group compared to the below 35 age
the determination of the abnormality, more
group. In general, four channels of the
number of data has to be collected from
DAQ card are used to acquire the X, Y
subjects. As a future work, the samples
axes
need to be obtained from around 50
reading
accelerometer.
from
The
the
Channel
MEMS
0,
and
subjects of varying age group and the
Channel 1 acquires X, Y axis of first
statistical analysis to be done. Then the
MEMS accelerometer and Channel 2 and
output will highly reliable and can be used
Channel 3 acquires the X, Y axis reading
also as a diagnosing tool for bone quality
of the second accelerometer.

152
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Biological Evolution, Plenum Press, New
4. CONCLUSION
The impulse response technique for
York, 1991
monitoring the stress wave propagation in

tibia bone has been effectively used in the
[4] R.S. Lakes and S. Saha, Long term
assessment of bone quality. The technique
torsional creep in compact bone. Biomech.
gives a better understanding of the
Engng. 102, 178- 180, 1980.
dynamic behaviour of bone under impact

force. The study is non-invasive, reliable,
[5I R.R. Pelker and S. Saha, Stress wave
easy to operate, inexpensive and has
propagation in bone. Biomechanics, 18,
diagnostic potential in the assessment of
745-753, 1983.
bone quality. For this careful analysis and

comparison of the data obtained from the
[6] Evaluation and Assessment of
subjects has to be done for distinguishing
Osteoporosis by Quantitative Ultrasound
osteoporotic and diabetic conditions. If
(Kaufman and Einhorn, 1993
this is achieved, our novel diagnostic tool

[7] S. Cheng, J. Timonen and H.
will be a multi-purpose diagnosing tool
Suomincn Elastic wave propagation in
which will be capable of diagnosing bone
bone
quality as well as diabetes non-invasively.\
in
vivo:
methodology
of
Biomechanics 28,471-478, 1995

6. REFERENCES
[8] P.D. Delinas, A. Schlemmer, E.
[1]
World
International
Health
Gineyts, B. Riis and C.Christiansen (1991)
Organization:
Classification
Urinary excretion of pyridinoline cross
of
links correlates with b tic turnover
Impairments, Disabilities and Handicaps.
measured on iliac crest biopsy in patients
WHO, Geneva, Switzerland, 1980.
with vertebral osteoporosis, J. of Bone

Min. Res., 6,639-644, 1991
[2] N. Dorothy, R. Molloy and M.

Kleerekoper, Prevalence of osteoporosis
[9] J. A. McGowan Osteoporosis:
in women referred for bone density testing,
assessment of bone loss and remodeling,
J. Clin. Densitometer, 1, 5- 11, 1998.
Aging
Clinical
and
Experimental
Research, 5, 81-93, 1993.
[3] Li. Mosekilde, Bone remodeling,

pp.343-356, in Le Mosekilde and Li
Mosekilde (Ed.) Complexity Chaos and

153
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[10] M.S. Holi and S. Radhakrishnan,

Comparison of ultrasound and dual
energy x-ray absorptiometry (DEXA)
methods in estimation of low bone mass
for the assessment of osteoporosis fracture
risk in Indian men and women, Acta of
Bioeng. And Biomech. 4, 396-397, 2002.
[11] In vivo Assessment of Osteoporosis

by Impulse Response and Stress Wave
Propagation Technique (M.S.Holi, 2003)
.

154
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
ALTERNATE ENERGY IN THE TRACTIONS

L.SARAVANAN#, P.SIVA SANKARI*, J.P.ANISH JABIN@
#*@
Department of Electrical and Electronics Jayaram College of Engineering and Technology, Trichy, India
#
lrsnpng@gmail.com
*tulasi.vt@gmail.com
@
jobin899anish@gmail.com
Abstract The fuel requirements of the world are

increasing at an alarming rate and the source demand has been
running ahead of supply. Due to the population and development
activities increases, the requirement of the fuel will also increase.
So we need to look for the alternative of conventional sources
and the best alternative of conventional sources are the nonconventional sources of energy which are also called renewable
source of energy. In this paper, the alternate potential in
tractions AET is investigated. The innovative method of
generating wind energy in a fast moving traction is one of the
best methods and it eliminate lot of problems facing in railways
today.
Keywords Fuel demand, Population growth, Conventional
sources, Non-conventional sources, AET, Wind energy in
traction.
I. INTRODUCTION
The wind is a free, clean, and inexhaustible energy
source. By generating wind energy in a fast moving traction in
one of the new innovation in wind power production and also
alternate energy to traction. By placing the wind turbine on
the traction it will very efficient method to produce the energy
which has been used for inter purpose also. The main aim of
this innovation is to provide a method and a system for
generating electricity by using high wind pressure generated
in moving vehicles, using free renewable input namely air.
Wind energy is cheap, non-polluting, and capable of providing
enough electricity.
II. WIND ENERGY
The wind has been used to power sailing ships for
many centuries. many countries owed their prosperity to their
skill in sailing. the new world was explored by wind powered
ships. indeed, wind was almost the only source of power for
ships until watt invented the steam engine in the 18th century.
denmark was the first country to use the wind for generation
of electricity. the danes were using a 23 m diameter wind
turbine in 1890 to generate electricity. by 1910, several
hundred units with capacities of 5 to 25 kw were in operation
in denmark. other countries also continued wind research for a
longer period of time. the worldwide wind capacity reached
282275 megawatt, out of which 44609 megawatt were added
in 2012, more than ever before. wind power showed a growth
rate of 19, 2%, the lowest rate in more than a decade.
Altogether, 100 countries and regions used wind power for
electricity generation. Since many years, the wind industry has
been driven by the Big Five markets: China, USA, Germany,
Spain, and India.
Table.1 Top Wind generation countries

These countries have represented the largest share of
wind power during the last few decades. The available
potential of wind energy in India is 45000 megawatt out of
which 1367mw has been exploited till august 2012. Table
provides the top five wind energy generator countries in the
world. Wind power is one of the most efficient alternate
energy sources. There has been good deal of development in
wind turbine technology over the last decade with many new
companies joining the fray. Wind turbines have become
larger, efficiencies and availabilities have improved and wind
farm concept has become popular. The economics of wind
energy is already strong, despite the relative immaturity of the
industry. The downward trend in wind energy costs is
predicted to continue.
As the world market in wind turbines continues to
boom, wind turbine prices will continue to fall. India now
ranks as a "wind superpower" having a net potential of about
45000 MW only from 13 identified states.
III. WIND ENERGY IN TRACTION
In this method the wind turbine has been placed on
the sides of the traction. By this way we can eliminate the aero
dynamical problems cause in traction. When train runs above
the rail wind turbine starts to rotate due to kinetic energy of
the wind. The speed of rotation of wind turbine depends on
the speed of train. When train moves at high speed the wind
flow also cross the turbine blades at high speed, hence it
makes the large power output. But if very high speed flows of
train danger to wind turbines because it damage the wind
turbines. The wind turbines are covered by protection shield,
the speed of wind also continuously measured by Propellertype wind-speed sensor or Cup-type wind-speed sensor.

155
www.iaetsd.in
The opposing force produced in this method is more

than normal diesel engine train. It has been eliminated by
made some modification in the traction design.
Fig. 1 Wind Turbine position on sides of the traction

By using a limited number of blocks for passengers,
by using a light weight metals for construction. The amount of
power production depends on wind turbine capacity, train
speed and other some factors. Because of the method we also
want to done some modification around the area near to train
roots. The size of system depends on how plan to use the
power that is generated. Small wind turbines can range in size
from 20 watts to 100 kilowatts (kw) with a 20-500 watt
system being used to charge batteries 5 to 15 kw. Normally
wind systems consist of a rotor or blades, a generator mounted
on a frame, a tower, the necessary wiring and the balance of
system components: controllers, inverters, and possibly
batteries. Through the spinning Blades, the rotor trap the
kinetic energy of the wind and convert it into rotary motion to
drive the generator, which produces electricity. But in this
method the tower has been not necessary. The diameter of the
rotor and the maximum wind speed determine the amount of
power that can be produced.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
IV.AERODYNAMICS
Aerodynamics is the science and study of the
physical laws of the behaviour of objects in an air flow and
the forces that are produced by air flows. The shape of the
aerodynamic profile is decisive for blade performance. Even
minor alterations in the shape of the profile can greatly alter
the power curve and noise level. Therefore a blade designer
does not merely sit down and outline the shape when
designing a new blade. The aerodynamic profile is formed
with a rear side, is much more curved than the front side
facing the wind.
Two portions of air molecules side by side in the air
flow moving towards the profile at point A will separate and
pass around the profile and will once again be side by side at
point B after passing the profiles trailing edge.
Fig. 3 Wind flow across blade

As the rear side is more curved than the front side on
a wind turbine blade, this means that the air flowing over the
rear side has to travel a longer distance from point A to B than
the air flowing over the front side.
Therefore this air flow over the rear side must have a
higher velocity if these two different portions of air shall be
reunited at point B. Greater velocity produces a pressure drop
on the rear side of the blade, and it is this pressure drop that
produces the lift. The highest speed is obtained at the rounded
front edge of the blade.
V. POWER PRODUCTION
A. Wind Energy in electric power
Fig 2: Windmill position above roof of the traction

In above specified figure 2, the windmills are placed
above the traction. This is another method of producing wind
energy in traction. The small size windmills are placed above
the traction. The electric train run over railroad tracks, the
alternative form of wind energy produced by train is very
unique. If the wind is properly directed towards the wind
turbine blades, optimum electricity may be generated. The
desired direction of wind is obtained by a means for
channelling wind, in the direction of the wind turbine.
Atmospheric pressure is differences accelerate and impart

kinetic energy into the air. Wind energy conversion machines
(WEC) convert wind energy into electrical or mechanical
forms.
K.E. 1 2 (mass) (velocity) 2

Power
time
time
mass
density area velocity
time
AV 3
Power 2 (density ) area (velocity )
2
1

156
www.iaetsd.in
Example:
V = 10 m/s
A = (2 m)2 = 4 m2
= 1.2 kg/m3
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The wind turbine is position above the traction

reduce the speed of train and it over come by placing it on the
sides traction.
P=2400 w Theoretical solution.
VII. GROWTH OF WIND ENERGY
B. Power production
A train moving at 125mph would generate a wind speed
equivalent to 60 feet/second. Wind blowing with such speed
will let a normal wind power generator harness about 3500w
of power.
If a train is about 656 feet long, running at the pace
of 187mph, and it moves along a 0.62 mile railway track in
about 18 seconds, the power generated in this small period by
the turbine laid on the tracks will be 2.6kW.
The kinetic energy of the wind is the source of the
driving force of a wind turbine. That kinetic energy can be
depicted by the formula
E = f. mspec .v3
E = the kinetic energy
mspec =the specific mass (weight) of air
v = the velocity of the moving air (the wind)
f = a calculating factor without any physic meaning
The power in the wind is proportional to:
a) The area of windmill being swept by the wind
b) The cube of the wind speed
c) The air density - which varies with altitude.
The formula used for calculating the power in the wind is
shown below:
Power = (density of air x swept area x velocity cubed)/2
P = . (A) (V)3
Where,
P is power in watts (W)
is the air density in kilograms per cubic meter (kg/m3)
A is the swept rotor area in square meters (m2) & V is the
wind speed in meters per second (m/s).
IV. PROBLEMS TO FACE
The major problem occurring in this system is some
alternation has want to made in train design the train not able
to move on the overflows or bridges, because mass of
Windmill producing opposing force toward the train. Similar
the train subjected to meet some problems related to
aerodynamically.
These methods are implementing to produce energy

and induced new way for producing clean energy in train.
There are 14,300 trains operating daily on 63,000 route
kilometers of railway in India. This technique would be
capable of producing 1,481,000 megawatt (MW) of power in
India alone. But some changes are needed in Indian rail roots,
in tractions.
It required long time to achieve above specified
range of power production.
Fig 5: Growth of wind power production

VIII.
CONCLUSIONS
The process of implementing AET we are able to
produce an alternate fuel, thus we are not only finding up a
new way of energy but also the way to protect the natural
world from fossil fuel (pollution). Thus using this new
concept and project we can expect a greener and pollution free
tomorrow. The whole project demands to call wind energy not
only used from supplying power to consumer but also
alternative fuel in transportation also. This project is still in
research stages but if it well implemented, it goes to very big
milestone in the engineering history.
REFERENCES
[1]
[2]
[3]
Stephane Sanquer, Christian Barre, Marc Dufresne de Virel and

Louis-Marie Cleon (2004), Effect of cross winds on high-speed
trains: development of new experimental methodology, Journal
of Wind Engineering and Industrial Aerodynamics, 92(2004),
535-545.
Wilson, R.E. and Lissaman, P.B.S. (1974), Applied
Aerodynamics of Wind Power Machines, Oregon State
University, NTIS PB 238594.
Friends of Earth, Briefing Anaerobic Digestion (2004)
Retrieved 17.08.07. Anaerobic digestion Briefing Paper,
www.foe.co.uk.
Fig 4: Traction facing aerodynamic problems

157
www.iaetsd.in
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
E. Muljadi and C.P. Butterfield, Pitch-Controlled VariableSpeed Wind Turbine Generation, 1999 IEEE Industry
Applications Society Annual Meeting, Phoenix, Arizona, October
3-7, 1999.
Grauers, A., Direct driven generators .Technology and
development trends, Proceedings of the Nordic Wind Power
Conference 2000 (NWPC 2000), Trondheim, Norway, Mars 1314, 2000.
Shyam Lal Verma, Ajay Bangar, Ankit Soni, Shravan
Gajendragadkar-2012 Renewable and Non-Conventional Energy
Sources and Engineering System ISSN No. 2231 6477,
Volume-1, Issue-3.
BJ Furman, K Youssefi - Wind Power and Wind Turbines
WWW/K-12/airplane/short.html.
Emrah Kulunk- Aerodynamics of Wind Turbines, New Mexico
Institute of Mining and Technology USA.
Ramler, J. R. and R. M. Donovan: Wind Turbines for Electric
Utilities: Development Status and Economics, Report
DOE/NASA/1028-79/23, NASA TM-79170, AIAA-79-0965,
June 1979.
WWW.world wind energy association report 2012.
Www.wwindea.org.
http://www.grc.nasa.gov/WWW/K-12/airplane/short.html.
http://ww2010.atmos.uiuc.edu/(Gh)/guides/mtr/prs/hghdef.rxml.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Wind_turbine_design.

158
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
ADS-B Technology With GPS Aided Geo

Augmented Navigation
Tanmay Senapati [1], Mahesh Ramachandran [2], Shivam Sharma[3]
Kalimuthu.K [4]
*Department of Electronics and Communication, SRM University

[1]
Intra College Rd, Potheri, Guduvancheri, Tamil Nadu-603203

senapatitanmay@gmail.com,[2]mahesh.ramachandran.9@gmail.com, [3]shvmsharma017@gmail.com
kalimuthu.k@ktr.srmuniv.ac.in[4]
Abstract: - Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast

(ADS-B) is being rolled out as the next generation air
transportation systems for communication protocol. The ADSB will play an essential role in protecting the two billion
people travelling across by 2015 as estimated by the Federal
Aviation Administration (FAA). With the emergence of proven
concept attacks, there is an exigent need for its mandatory
implementation in the airspace.
The main focus of this paper is on the critical need for
practical implementation of the ADS-B technology and how it
can be used to monitor the air traffic over Indian Air Space.
The launch of the GAGAN Satellite (INDIAs Satellite Based
Air Traffic Management System) by ISRO and Airport
Authority of India (AAI) is the first step towards fully
incorporating this technology. In this paper, the authors seek
to emphasize the urgent need for transition from the currently
used radar based navigation system to ADS-B technology
using GAGAN for making air travel safer and efficient.
towards 2020. Developed and certified as a viable low-cost

replacement of conventional radar, ADS-B allows ATC to
control and monitor airplanes with greater precision over a
larger percentage of earths surface than has ever been
possible before. For example, large expanses of Australia,
Hudson Bay in Canada, currently without any radar
coverage are now visible on ATC screens due to strategic
replacement by low cost ADS-B receiving stations. ADS-B
is one of the most important underlying concepts in the
plan to transform ATC from the current radar- based
surveillance to satellite- based global positioning system
(GPS) surveillance. The acronym can be broken as,
Automatic- always ON and requires no operator
intervention, Dependent - it depends on an accurate GNSS
signal for position data, Surveillance- It provides Radarlike surveillance services. ADS-B allows aircrafts to
determine their exact location through GPS Satellite. That
information is broadcast to other nearby ground stations
and ADS-B ground stations which relay the information
back to the Air Traffic Controllers. Additionally, a signal
with flight, weather and data is broadcast to the plane.
Keywords:- ADS-B,GNSS, GAGAN, Radar, FAA, NextGen.
I. INTRODUCTION
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) estimates that
the rising number of flights and passengers will overwhelm
the current Air Traffic Control (ATC) by 2015 leading to
increase in delays, higher costs and greater environmental
impact. With increased traffic, very light jets, unmanned
aerial vehicles and commercial space flight in the near
future, the national airspace system must be upgraded to
function efficiently. To meet this challenge the FAA is
rolling out the NextGen- Air Traffic Control system called
the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADSB). ADS-B enables the widespread use of Satellite Based
GPS technology. It provides air traffic controllers
information that will facilitate the efficient navigation of an
air craft through the congested airspace.
The increase in number of passengers, air-accidents,

delays and fuel consumption necessitates the shift from
Radar-Based Navigation to Satellite Based Navigation.
ADS-B provides an update 12 times faster than that of
radar. Hence, there is an dire need to bring Satellite Based
navigation technology and ADS-B helps us in achieving
this. There are clear benefits of using ADS-B technology
over Radar Based Navigation. It includes surveillance in
non-radar areas, more direct routes which save fuel, better
coordinated take-offs and landings.
The 1978 crash of Air India Flight 855, 1996 CharkhiDadri midair collision, 2010 Mangalore crash, disappearance of MH370 are some of the incidents which
further demands the usage of a GPS-based navigation
system . The first step towards incorporating this type of
surveillance in India is the GAGAN (GPS aided GEOAugmented Navigation system) by ISRO (Indian Space
Research Organization) along with AAI (Airport Authority
of India). GAGAN is Indias first GPS satellite, which puts
India on the 4th position globally after USA, Russia and
The backbone to the Automatic Dependent

Surveillance Broadcast (ADS-B) system lies in
communications between aircrafts and also between the
aircraft and ground. Both are vital in terms of ensuring safe
flights, efficient fuel usage, time of travel and emissions.
ADS-B is an integral part of the planned efficiency drive

159
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Source:- Aero_Q2-10_article02.pdf
Europe. GAGAN will provide air traffic management over

the Indian Air Space stretching from Australia to South
Africa.
A. WORKING OF ADS-B
This paper gives an overview of using GAGAN along with

ADS-B technology to manage the Indian Air Space. This
will make the expanding aviation industry more efficient
and safer .Since ADS-B technology is already being
adopted in some countries, it is thus feasible and practical
to employ ADS-B technology in India, along with its first
GPS satellite-GAGAN.
ADS-B uses a combination of satellites, transmitters, and

receivers to provide both flight crews and ground control
personnel with very specific information about the location
and speed of airplanes in the area. From the airplane
perspective, there are two aspects to ADS-B. ADS-B Out
signals are sent from the transmitting airplanes to receivers
located on the ground or in other airplanes. The ADS-B
Out signals travel line-of-sight from transmitter to receiver
ADS-B Out signals are received by ATC ground stations
for display of traffic to air traffic controllers. ADS-B Out
signals are also received by other airplanes in the vicinity
of the transmitting airplanes. After Reception of the ADS-B
signals by the receiving airplane, the lateral position
(latitude and longitude), altitude, velocity, and flight
number of the transmitting airplane are presented to the
receiving airplane pilot on a Cockpit Display of Traffic
Information (CDTI). The received ADS-B Signal is called
ADS-B In. The maximum range between the transmitting
Andre planes is greater than 100 nautical miles (nmi),
allowing the CDTI to display traffic both near and far.
Navigation satellites send precise timing information that
allows airplanes equipped with global navigation satellite
system (GNSS) or GPS receivers to determine their own
position and velocity. Airplanes equipped with ADS-B Out
broadcast precise position and velocity to ground ADS-B
receivers and to other airplanes via a digital data link (1090
megahertz) along with other data, such as the airplanes
flight number and emergency status. ADS-B Receivers that
are integrated into the ATC systems on the ground or
installed aboard other airplanes (i.e., ADS-B In) provide
users with an accurate depiction of real time aviation
traffic. Unlike conventional radar, ADS-B works at low
altitudes and on the ground so that it can be used to
monitor traffic on the taxiways and runways of an airport.
ADS-B is also effective in remote areas where there is no
radar coverage or where radar coverage is limited.
II.ADS-B
The Federal Aviation Administration and the European

Administration EUROCONTROL has named ADS-B as
the successor of radar. ADS-B is a new surveillance
technology designed to help modernize the air
transportation system. It provides foundational technology
for improvements related to the Next Generation Air
Transportation System (or NextGen). NextGen refers to the
effort of the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to
transform the air traffic control (ATC) system to support a
larger volume of airplanes more efficiently. Every aircraft
projects its velocity and position using the on-board GPS.
The information is broadcasted in message form
periodically by the ADS-B OUT. The message broadcasted
will be received by the Air Traffic Control Systems on the
ground level and other aircrafts by ADS-B IN.
ADS-B uses two data links, a 978 MHz UAT (Universal

Access Transmitter) and a 1090 MHz extended Squitter.
UAT involves installation of a hardware, therefore, general
aviation in EUROCONTROL and Federal Aviation
Administration use this whereas commercial aircrafts use
1090 MHz
There are three modes currently in use in the civil aviation
i.e. Mode (A, C and S).
Parameters
Message
Length
MODE A
12 Bit
MODE C
12 Bit
MODE S
56/112 Bit
ADS-B
112 Bit
Fig.1 Working of ADS-B

160
www.iaetsd.in
Frequency
Uses
1030/1090
MHz
Identifying
1030/1090 MHz 1030/1090

MHz
Altitude
Multiple
Determination
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
1090
MHz
Multiple
Table 1
Comparison of different modes
Aircraft localisation has been relying on radar based

systems. There are two conventional methods for the radars
i.e. primary surveillance radars and secondary surveillance
radars.
Primary Surveillance Radars (PSRs) are independent and
work without the cooperation from the aircrafts with high
frequency signals. In contrast to PSRs secondary
Surveillance Radars were used in the Air Traffic Control
before ADS-There are three modes in case of SSR i.e.
Mode A, Mode C and Mode S. Table 1 compares the
characteristics of the three modes with the ADS-B.
Fig. 2 Architecture of ADS-B
In case of Mode S, there are two message lengths 56 bit

and 112 bit whereas ADS-B uses only 112 bit message
length, surveillance of Mode S is priced at $5.5 million and
the cost of ADS-B is around $3 million.
B. ARCHITECTURE
ADS-B OUT needs:
In case of ADS-B, every aircraft collects their own data

such as velocity and position using the measurement
devices. The ADS-B infrastructure is very cost effective
when compared to the conventional Primary Surveillance
Radar (PSR) which is currently being used.
ATC transponders AT D0-260 standards.

Additional wiring associated with peripheral
equipment,
MMR in hybrid architecture with GPS capability.
CURRENT STATUS: - Aircraft currently flying in Europe

are generally well equipped for the transition to ADS-B
OUT as the prerequisite ATC transponders Mode S (DO260) are already required to meet the former enhanced
surveillance mandate. Aircraft greater than five years of
age and operating outside of Europe are more likely to
need a new transponder in order to
Achieve ADS-B capability.
There are three benefits of ADS-B. Firstly, the GPS

positions reported by ADS-B are more accurate than the
current radar positions and more consistent. This means
that in the Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) closer aircraft
spacing can be used than the present, which provides much
needed capacity improvements in congested spaces.
Secondly, ADS-B surveillance is much easier and less
expensive to deploy than the ground radar. This means that
the airspace which previously had no radar and only
procedural services can now have the benefits of ATC
services.And finally, since ADS-B is a broadcast service
and can be received by other aircrafts as well as the ATC
on the ground, it offers the aircraft to have an accurate and
inexpensive traffic awareness of other nearby aircrafts.
ADS-B IN:
TCAS capable
Additional wiring
Traffic selector in cockpit
EIS2 capable
On-Board Airport Navigation System.
C.APPLICATIONS OF ADS-B

161
www.iaetsd.in
ADS-B GROUND APPLICATION:- ADS-B Out offers

several benefits to ground-based ATC. In radar areas, it can
be used by ATC to supplement 5- and 3-nmi en-route
separation services. Where no other radar or surveillance is
available, it can be used by ATC to provide that separation
services .For airport surface surveillance, ADS-B Out
provides ground control with a picture of all airplanes and
vehicles on the ground. In the terminal area, ADS-B Out
could enable 2.5-nmi separation in-trail approaches, 2-nmi
separation for dependent parallel approaches, and
separation during independent parallel approaches for
runways spaced more than 4,300 feet apart.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the help of MODE C transponder the controllers could

assign a four digit code to the dot on the screen allowing
them to identify each dot as a particular aircraft. This was
known as Secondary Surveillance Radar (SSR). Adding
MODE S transponder gave each dot an aircraft-specific
identifier tied to the aircraft registration number as well its
altitude.
All of this technology was to locate the aircraft from the
point of the Air Traffic Controllers, who could then manage
the traffic. This approach worked well for areas under air
traffic control but did nothing for areas without radars. As
the skies are becoming more congested, a system for real
traffic awareness for the pilots became a necessity. Hence
there a need to shift from the present radar based
navigation to a new system. Hence it leads to the advent of
new technology which is satellite - based navigation which
is ADS-B technology.
ADS-B IN BORNE APPLICATION:- ADS-B In offers

potential benefits across all domains of flight, from
departure to arrival (see ADS-B in various domains of
flight on this page). It provides situational awareness of
other airplanes and vehicles on the airport surface and
situational awareness of other airborne traffic, such as
assistance in finding targets outside the cockpit window
using the CDTI. ADS-B In could also enhance situational
awareness on approach, allowing continued approaches
using the CDTI after initial visual acquisition. Airborne
spacing applications facilitate increased capacity and
efficiency in a number of ways. Enhanced sequencing and
merging enable precise delivery of airplanes to the meter
fix for subsequent continuous descent approaches; in trail
procedures assist airplanes in moving to optimal
operational altitudes in remote areas; and enhanced
crossing and passing operations assist airplanes in flying
optimal flight routes and speeds. ADS-B In also enables
airplane crews to assume responsibility for separation from
up to two other airplanes through delegated enroute
separation. In this scenario, the controller retains
responsibility for separation from other airplanes beyond
the two the crew has assumed responsibility for.
TYPE
Independent
Cooperative
Primary
Surveillance data Does not depend on
Surveillance received by radar
aircraft equipment
Radar
Secondary
Surveillance data Requires aircrafts to
Surveillance
received by
have a working a
Radar
aircraft
ATCRBS transponder
Automatic
Surveillance data Requires aircrafts to
Dependent
received by
have a working ADS-B
Surveillance(AD
aircraft
function
S-B)
TABLE II
Analysis of Radar and ADS-B technology
ADS-B AROUND THE WORLD: - ADS-B activity is

increasing around the world. ADS-B benefits the aviation
industry by means of the decreasing the cost of providing
services and increasing the operational efficiency and
capacity of the regional air transportation system. It also
reduces the risk of lives of billions of people flying across
the world daily.
Primary surveillance radar does not require any

cooperation from the aircraft. It is robust in the sense that
surveillance outage failure modes are limited to those
associated with the ground radar system. Secondary
surveillance radar depends on active replies from the
aircraft. Its failure modes include the transponder aboard
the aircraft. Typical ADS-B aircraft installations use the
output of the navigation unit for navigation and for
cooperative surveillance, introducing a common failure
mode that must be accommodated in air traffic surveillance
systems.
III. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN RADAR and ADS-B

SURVEILLANCE.
Before the widespread use of radar for air traffic control in
the 1950s, an aircrafts position was calculated by the crew
and the information was relayed to ATC by radio. As radar
technology came into existence it gave controllers a picture
of the airspace around them. The Primary Surveillance
Radar (PSR) showed the aircrafts as dots on screen. With

162
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
regions which increases the efficiency of the aviation

industry. The cost of setting up a ADS-B ground station is
much lesser than any of the existing radar technology. With
ADS-B technology, we can have more direct routes that
shorten flight times and fewer delays. The technology
provides more information in the hands of the pilots who
will have air traffic control data on their display screen
right in the cockpit and the pilots will only guide them
whereas in radar the information is in the hands of the
controllers which then again have to send this information
to pilots through data links. This leaves a lot of work to be
done by the controllers and also leads to confusion between
the pilots and controllers.
IV. GAGAN (GPS AIDED GEO AUGMENTED

NAVIGATION)
To Provide Satellite Based Augmentation System Services

over India and neighbouring regions the GPS Aided Geo
Augmented Navigation (GAGAN) - a Satellite Based
Navigation System (SBNS) is being launched by the Union
Ministry for Civil Aviation. This system is expected to
provide enhanced navigation performance for critical
applications like Civil Aviation, Marine Navigation, Train
& Road Transport, Precision Farming, Search and Rescue
(SAR) operations, Surveying and Mapping (Geodetic and
Geodynamic), Mining etc.
GAGAN is a planned implementation of a Satellite Based
Navigation System developed by Airports Authority of
India (AAI) and Indian Space Research Organisation
(ISRO), to deploy and certify an operational SBAS for the
Indian Flight Information Region, with expansion
capability to neighbouring Flight Information Regions
(FIRs). When commissioned for service, GAGAN is
expected to provide a civil aeronautical navigation signal
consistent with International Civil Aviation Organization
(ICAO) Standards and Recommended Practices (SARPs)
as established by the Global Navigation Satellite System
Panel (GNSSP). ICAO has endorsed Global Navigation
Satellite System as Future Air Navigation System (FANS)
for civil aviation.
The project involves establishment of a full complement of
Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) consisting of
15 Indian Reference Stations (INRES), 3 Indian Navigation
Land Uplink Stations (INLUS), 3 Indian Mission Control
Centres (INMCC), 3 Geo-stationary Navigation in C and L
bands and with all the associated Software and
Communication links.
Fig. 3 Difference between ADS-B and RADAR

Far different from radar, which works by bouncing radio
waves from fixed terrestrial antennas off of airborne targets
and then interpreting the reflected signals, ADS-B uses
conventional Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS)
technology and uses a relatively simple broadcast
communication link. Also unlike radar, ADS-B accuracy
does not degrade with range, atmospheric condition or
target altitude and update intervals do not depend upon the
rotational speed or the reliability of mechanical antennas.
The time taken by these mechanical antennas to accept and
send the signals from the transponders is approximately 12
sec which leads to loss of real time information. With ADSB technology, the information from the GNSS about its
position and other data is constantly broadcasted to the air
traffic controllers and the nearby aircrafts which leads to
real time awareness for the pilots and the controllers. The
ADS-B technology also provides coverage in non- radar
A. NEED FOR AUGMENTATION:-

163
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Mid-air collisions are one of the deadliest disasters that can

happen in the aviation industry. The 1996 Charkhi Dadri
Mid-Air Collision is one such incident. It occurred on the
12th November 1966 over the village of Chakri Dadri to the
west of New Delhi, India. The aircraft involved were a
Saudi Arabian Airlines Boeing 747-100B en route from
New Delhi to Dhahran, Saudi Arabia and Kazakhstan
Airlines IIyushin II-76 en route from Shymkent
Kazakhstan, to New Delhi. The collision took place at
14,000 feet over the Indian Air space which claimed the
lives of 349 people on board which included 289
passengers and 23 crew members in all. Both the aircrafts
were being guided by the Delhi ATC.
Current GPS constellation cannot support

requirements for all phases of flight.
Accuracy is not sufficient (even with Selective
Availability off, vertical accuracy>10m).
Availability and continuity must be met.
There are a series of events which lead to such this

disaster. The Kazakhstan Airlines was flying into New
Delhi at an altitude of 23,000 feet initially whereas the
Saudi Arabian Airlines was flying at an altitude of 10,000
feet over the same airspace. The Delhi ATC asked the
Kazakhstan airlines to descend to an altitude of 15,000 feet
and maintain it till any further notice whereas the SaudiArabian airlines was asked to climb to 14,000 feet and
maintain it. But the Kazakhstan Airlines kept descending
below 15,000 feet to 14,500 feet, 14,000 feet and lower.
This leaves us with two aircrafts which are at the same
altitude and heading in the opposite direction over the same
airspace. The radio operator of the Kazakhstan Airlines
realized then that they had flown much below their
assigned altitude of 15,000 feet and hence asked the pilot to
climb to climb to 15,000 feet. Had the radio operator not
asked the pilot to climb up, the Kazakhstan Airlines would
have flown below the Saudi Arabian airlines. But it was
rather too late and then the left wing of Kazakhstan
Airlines crashed into the two engines of Saudi Arabian
Airlines which lead to third- deadliest air disaster ever.
The flight data recorders of Kazakhstan
Airlines and Saudi Arabia Airlines were decoded by
investigators in Moscow and Farnborough, England
respectively. The investigators cite many reasons for such a
fatal accident. The ultimate cause was held to be the failure
of Kazakhstan Airlines pilot to follow ATC instructions,
cloud turbulence and communication problems. The report
also suggested a serious breach in operating procedure to
the lack of English language skills on the part of
Kazakhstan pilots. This lead to communication problems
between the ATC and the pilots. Furthermore, Indira
Gandhi International Airport did not have a Secondary
Surveillance Radar which provides additional information
regarding aircrafts identity and altitude by reading
transponder signals. The aircrafts were also not equipped
with the Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS) which
alerts the pilot of a possible collision.
Fig.4 Operations of GAGAN.
B. Working of GAGAN
The Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) data is
received and processed at widely dispersed INRES which
are strategically located to provide coverage over the
required service volume. Data is forwarded to the INMCC,
which process the data from multiple INRES to determine
the differential corrections and residual errors for each
monitored satellite and for each predetermined ionosphere
grid point (IGP). Information from the INMCC is sent to
the INLUS and uplinked along with the GEO navigation
message to the GAGAN GEO satellite. The GAGAN GEO
satellite downlinks this data to the users via two L-band
ranging signal frequencies (L1 and L5), with GPS type
modulation, to improve the accuracy and availability and
provide integrity. GAGAN will provide augmentation
service for GPS over India, Bay of Bengal, South-East
Asia, and Middle East expanding into Africa. GAGAN
will be compatible and interoperable with other SBAS
systems such as the Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) of USA, the European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service (EGNOS) of European Union (EU) and
the Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System
(MSAS) of Japan. It will fill the gap between the European
EGNOS and the Japanese MSAS to provide seamless air
navigation service across regional boundaries.
V. 1996 CHARKHI DADRI MID-AIR COLLISION

164
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Radar system. The limitation is that the frequency is shared

with all Mode A, Mode C and Mode S transponders as well
as TCAS and other users. The frequency is already near
saturation in the busiest airspaces, yet the "Extended
Squitter" message is twice the length (112 bits) of a
standard 1090 response (56 bits), and it can take up to 5
transmissions per second to send a fully populated 1090ES
ADS-B Message. 1090 ES is not bidirectional and
therefore cannot support Flight Information Services (FIS)
or aircraft-to-aircraft TCAS-like services. Furthermore, the
978 MHz which is used in ADS-B technology is the least
profitable technology for manufactures. UAT requires a
dedicated transceiver in each aircraft, while 1090ES only
requires software modification to existing Mode-S
transponders. Line of sight (LOS) is also one of the major
drawbacks in the ADS-B technology. For this ADS-B
Link Augmentation System (ALAS) is being introduced
which is alternative flight path for the ADS-B.
Fig. 5 1996 Dadri-Chakri incident could have been avoided

with ADS-B technology.
VIII.CONCLUSIONS
As we reflect upon that fateful day18 years ago, we need a
new technology which does not lead to such accidents in
the future. The technology that can be adopted is ADS-B
with GAGAN satellite. This incident could have been
avoided by using this technology. Both the flights could
have known their position from the GAGAN satellite and
with the help of ADS-B technology and information
regarding its position, altitude and velocity could have been
broadcasted to both the aircrafts and the Delhi ATC.Hence
this would have led to avoidance of collision as both the
aircrafts could have about each others altitude, position
and altitude and hence pilots could have easily adjusted
their altitude. This could eliminate the problem of the
language of English which was cited one of the major
reasons of collision as the pilot of Kazakhstan airlines
would have known about the approaching Saudi-Arabian
airlines by the GAGAN satellite in its Cockpit Display
System(CDS) and would have conveniently adjusted its
position say for example, to 16000 feet. The reason of
cloud disturbance being a factor could be easily avoided as
the aircraft would know about it and all its nearby position,
altitude by GAGAN satellite and hence acted accordingly.
Hence with see that, by adopting ADS-B technologies with
GAGAN satellite the lives of 349 passengers could have
been saved. Thus, the usage of ADSB technology with
GAGAN has been substantiated with ample proof.
The paper suggests the ADS-B technology is intended to

transform ATC by providing more accurate and reliable
tracking of airplanes in flight and on the ground. The ADSB technology will make air travel safer, efficient and
greener for the environment. ADS-B is in the upstages of a
roadmap vision up until 2020 and has been updated by
NextGen.It is clearly seen that ADS-B technology is much
better than the currently used Secondary Surveillance
Radar (SSR) as it provides better accuracy, cheaper cost
and give a more up to date picture of the airspace. The
launch of the GAGAN satellite by ISRO along with AAI
adds benefits to this technology as it can be used be
together to reduce the conjunction over the Indian airspace.
The paper highlights the urgent need of incorporating all
the flights operating over the Indian airspace and elsewhere
to equip their fleets with the ADS-B technology which
along with the GAGAN will make the skies a lot safer to
travel. The authors have made an attempt to point out the
benefits of this technology by describing the 1996 Charkhi
Dadri Mid-Air Collision which could have been avoided by
the ADS-B technology along with the GAGAN satellite.
Hence we can say that with the increasing number of
passengers travelling by flights it is required to make our
air travel more efficient and safer and at the same time ecofriendly. ADS-B technology provides us with this and
hence it necessary to upgrade to this technology so that no
other air disaster occurs and lives of billions of people are
safe. Countries like Australia have already adopted this.
Many Accidents can be avoided if India uses it in the future
and it also reduces fuel which helps in having a greener
environment.
VII.LIMITATIONS
ADS-B provides a lot more beneifts than the presently used

165
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[4]. A. Daskalakis and P. Martone, A technical assessment of ADS-B

and
Multilateration technology in the Gulf of Mexico, in Proceedings of
The 2003 IEEE Radar Conference. IEEE, 2003, pp. 370378.
[5].K. Samuelson, E. Valovage, and D. Hall, Enhanced ADS-B
Research,
In 2006 IEEE Aerospace Conference. IEEE, 2006, pp. 17.
[6].The(ISRO)website.
[Online].Available:http://www.isro.org/pressrelease/scripts/pressrelea
sein.aspx?Jan03_2014
[7] The-just-the80website.
[Online].Available:http://isp.justthe80.com/space-applications/gagan
[8] The-Air-Service-Australia-website.[Online].Available:
http://www.airservicesaustralia.com/projects/ads-b/how-ads-b-works/
[9].The-wikipedia-website.
[Online].Available:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Charkhi_Dadri_midair_collision
[10].The-Indiatoday-website.
[Online].Available:http://indiatoday.intoday.in/story/saudi-kazakh-aircollision-boeing-747-crashes-into-il-76-over-indian-skies-killing-351people/1/282693.html [11] The-NextGen-website.
[Online].Available:https://www.faa.gov/nextgen/implementation/prog
rams/adsb/
[12]The-ADS-B-website.[Online].Available:http://www.ads-b.com
[13].The-independent-website.
[Online].Available:http://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/theindian-air-crash-tapes-point-blame-at-kazakh-pilot-1352266.html
[14].The-wikipedia-website.
[Online].Available:http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Automatic_dependent
_surveillance-broadcast
[15]The-aopa-website.
[Online].Available:http://www.aopa.org/Advocacy/Air-TrafficServices-,-a-,-Technology/Air-Traffic-Services-Brief-AutomaticDependent-Surveillance-Broadcast-ADSB
[16]The-trig-avionics-website.[Online].Available: http://www.trigavionics.com/adsb.html
[17]Dennis Roddy, Satellite Communication,3rd Ed.
[18]Anil Kumar, satellite Communication, 1st Ed.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT
We would like to express our sincere gratitude to the
Department
of
Electronics
and Communication
Engineering and all the Faculty Mentors of SRM
University for their constant motivation and guidance in
this project. We also wish to thank Prof. Shanti Prince and
Prof. Kalimuthu of Electronics Department for reviewing
our progress and their constructive feedback. Finally, we
are grateful to Prof. Samita Kher, Sinhgad University for
his/her continued support and encouragement for the
project.
REFERENCES
[1]. C. Rekkas and M. Rees, Towards ADS-B
implementation in Europe, in 2008 Tyrrhenian International
Workshop on Digital Communications
- Enhanced Surveillance of Aircraft and Vehicles. IEEE, Sep. 2008,
pp. 14.
[2]. K. Sampigethaya and R. Poovendran, Security and privacy of
future
Aircraft wireless communications with off board systems, in 2011
Third
International Conference on Communication Systems and Networks
(COMSNETS 2011). IEEE, Jan. 2011, pp. 16.
[3]. W. Y. Ochieng, K. Sauer, D. Walsh, G. Brodin, S. Griffin, and
M. Denney, GPS Integrity and Potential Impact on Aviation Safety,
Journal of Navigation, vol. 56, no. 1, pp. 5165, Jan. 2003.

166
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
NETWORK SECURITY BASED ON TRACEBACK APPROACH

BY USING TRACER
Mr.K.Sanjai, Mr.K.Sowbarani
SSM College of Engineering,
ABSTRACT :
Namakkal.
and such activity tends to cause a great

problem.
At present, the number of unauthorized

access incidents on the Internet is
At present, the access control
growing, and the current access control
technologies including firewalls are
technologies cannot stop specific way
commonly
of access. We had proposed a hop-by-
unauthorized access, but some specific
hop IP traceback method that can be
way of access cannot be stopped by the
used to trace a source of an attack.
access control technologies. Nowadays
In this paper, we are going to propose
installing Intrusion Detection Systems
a prototype system. The main features
(IDS) coupled with firewalls, and
of our proposed method are the packet
monitoring networks enables us to
feature, which is composed of specific
quickly
packet information contained in a
unauthorized access. The following
packet
an
figure shows a current dealing with
the
unauthorized access.
for
unauthorized
identification
packet,
of
and
algorithm using datalink identifier to
Server
identify a routing of a packet. We are

also
proposing
distributed
used
detect
to
and
prevent
react
to
Attacker
Internet
management approach that controls

the tracing process and information
within a particular group of networks.
INTRODUCTION :
While the Internet as a business
LAN
Firewall
infrastructure increases its importance,

the number of unauthorized access
incidents on the Internet is growing,

167
www.iaetsd.in
However, even if these tools can
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Proactive tracing:
detect unauthorized activities, their
This prepares information for
sources cannot be identified. The
tracing when packets are in transit. In a
reason is that denial of service (DoS)
case where packet tracing is required,
attacks, which have recently increased
the
in number, can easily hide their
information and identifies the source
sources and forge their IP addresses.
of the packets.
Thus, it is not possible for the access
Reactive Tracing:
control alone to be a factor of
the
attack
refers
tracing when required. Here, we have
unauthorized access, it is necessary to
selected reactive tracing that does not
pinpoint the source in order to prevent
increase network traffic at normal
the unauthorized activity. For this
times and generates traffic for tracing
reason, we are proposing a prototype
only when actual tracing is required.
system.
The Trend of the Reactive
TRACEBACK METHOD :
ability
required
to
Tracing Methods:
perform
The majority of reactive tracing
traceback is to identify the true IP
methods trace the attack path from the
address of the terminal originating
target back to the source. The

challenges involved in this type of
attack packets. If we can identify the
method are traceback algorithm and
true IP address of the attackers
packet matching technique.
terminal, we can also get information

about the organization (e.g. name or
(1)Hop-by-Hop Tracing :
telephone number) involved in the
This method is to trace an IP
attack or the attacking terminal. As the
packet from the target back to the
method of the source pursuit of
source hop-by-hop, and trace the
unauthorized access, some researches

using
of
This reactive tracing starts
unauthorized access. As the measure of
The
target
IP
(Internet
Protocol)
source based on the incoming
are
packets
performed. The source pursuit using IP
that
arrive
one
after
another during a flood type attack.
is called IP traceback. IP traceback
The following figure shows a flow
methods can be divided into two
of trace to detect the source hop-
groups.
by-hop.

168
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Another proposed technique is

that when unauthorized access is
detected, a Security association (SA)
Attacker
of the IPsec is created dynamically,
IP N/W
and authenticating the packet with

IPsec identifies the travel path and the
source of the packet. Since this
technique uses existing IPsec protocol,
it has an advantage that it is not
Target
(2) Hop-by-Hop
Tracing with
necessary
Overlay Network :
to
implement
new
protocol.
(4) Traffic Pattern Matching :
The particular problems involved in

tracing routers hop-by-hop are that if
Another proposed technique
there are too many hops, the number of
traces the forwarding path of the traffic
necessary processing for tracing will
by comparing traffic patterns observed
be increased. As the result, it will take
at the entry and exit point of the
a longer time to trace, and information
network based on the network map.
for tracing can be lost before trace

processing is completed. Therefore, a
Traceback Approaches:
method to build the overlay network
In the field of reactive tracing
for tracing purposes that involves a
study, several methods that identify a
less number of hops is proposed. With
source of a packet with forged source
this method, IP tunnels between the
IP
edge routers and the special tracking
address
Although
routers are created, and the IP packets
have
most
been
of
proposed.
the
existing
techniques deal with flood type DoS
are rerouted to the tracking router via
attacks, there are more attacks using
IP tunnel. Hop-by-hop tracing is
only one or a few IP packets such as
performed over the overlay network
attacks exploiting IP fragment. It is
that consists of IP tunnels and tracking
important
routers.
to
unauthorized
be
access
able
to
using
trace
single
packet. Based on the above, we have

proposed
hop-by-hop
traceback
method. We are developing a system
(3) IPsec Authentication :

169
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
implementing our method even if the
forwarded packet that corresponds to
attacker forges its source IP address.
an attack packet.
Our system performs real-time tracing
Beginning with the forwarding
and exactly identifies the source of the
unit closest to the sensor that has
specific packet along the attack path.
detected
unauthorized
access,
we
identify each adjacent forwarding unit

along the attack path, and ultimately
Our Traceback Architecture:
reach the source of the attack packet
In general, the source IP address of
even if a forged source IP address is
a packet can easily be forged at the
used.
source of the packet. On the other
Our Traceback Model:
hand, it is difficult for a sender of a
In this section, we describe our
packet to forge the datalink-level

packets,
trace back architecture that identifies
because, in the event of frame or cell
the source of a packet with forged
transfer, forwarding unit (such as
source IP address. The architecture
router) in turn converts the datalink-
consists
level
components:
identifier
when
identifier
sending
to
the
interface
of
the
following
three
(1)Sensor :
identifier of the unit. Therefore, at each

forwarding unit, we can identify its
This component is deployed at
adjacent unit having forwarded a
target site has two functions. One is to
particular packet based on the datalink-
detect unauthorized access from the
level identifier of the adjacent unit and
network another is to request a
the
manager to start tracing.
datalink-level
identifier
corresponding to the packet.

(2)Tracer :
In our approach, forwarding
This component implements a
nodes, or tracers, keep data about an

incoming packet and its datalink-level
function
identifier such as source MAC Address
maintain information about forwarded
in
address
IP packets as well as a function to trace
corresponding to their datalink-level
the source of the forwarded packet
identifier in each forwarding unit and
along the attack path on forwarding
identify the adjacent unit by searching
unit.
buffer
memory
in
forwarding
nodes
to
for the datalink-level identifier of the

170
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
the packet. The propose architecture
(3)Monitoring Manager :
In response to a request from a
of our traceback model is shown
sensor, this component controls tracers
below. In which all the monitoring
and manages the entire tracing process.
managers are coupled with the tracer in
We can install a tracer and a
order to trace the source of the
manager on each unit or install a single
forwarded packet. And a sensor is
manager as a central manager of the
coupled with the monitoring manager
entire network.
and target network in order to detect

the unauthorized access and also for
the purpose of requesting the tracer to
Process Method:
start the process of tracing.
Process Flow:
Basic model of our traceback

method in practical terms, particularly
Our traceback approach involves
network policy may restrict tracing a
several Steps, from attack detection to
packet with certain limitation. We
source identification,
cannot trace a packet beyond our own

network
boundary
if
neighboring
Step 1: Sensors are deployed at each
networks impose different policy.

We
therefore
suggest
target network. When a sensor detects

a
an
attack, it creates data containing
distributed management approach that
features of the attack packet and sends
controls
a tracing request to the monitoring
the
tracing
process
and
information within a particular group
manager deployed in its AMN.
of networks. This control section is

called as Autonomous Management
Step 2: The monitoring manager
Network (AMN).
The
order the AMNs tracer to trace the
monitoring
manager,
attack packet. The tracer identifies
which is deployed in each AMN,
the adjacent node and returns the
executes a tracing process within its

tracing process goes beyond
AMNs
boundary,
the
result to the monitoring manager.
the
monitoring
Step 3: Based on the result
manager of the AMN that initiated the
returned, the process described above
tracing process asks the monitoring
continues until the tracer identifies
manager in the adjacent AMN to trace
the attack packets source.

171
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The image cannot be display ed. Your computer may not hav e enough memory to open the image, or the image may hav e been corrupted. Restart y our computer, and then open the
file again. If the red x still appears, y ou may hav e to delete the image and then insert it again.
Step 4: If a tracing process goes

beyond
the
AMNs
boundary,
processing is handed over to the

relevant monitoring manager that
controls that AMN.
Step 5: The monitoring managers

in each AMN traces the packet in
their AMN and sends the tracing
result to the monitoring manager that
Packet Feature :
initiated the traceback request.
Our traceback method uses a
Step 6: The requester monitoring
packet feature as a parameter for Trace
manager sends the final results to the
Request and Trace Order. In order to
sensor that requested the trace.
uniquely identify the individual packet,

we extract several fields of the IP
packet that are not altered by tracers
Traceback Protocol:
and create a packet feature. The
The basic functions of the traceback
extracted fields are as follows:
protocol define the following tasks:
Version
A trace request from a sensor
Header Length
and a notice of the tracing
Identification
result to the sensor.

A
trace
order
from
Protocol
Source and Destination
monitoring manager to a tracer
A part of IP data
and a notice of the processing

result
to
the
IP addresses
monitoring
manager.
A trace request and a notice of
the tracing result exchanged
between monitoring managers.

172
www.iaetsd.in
If we create a packet feature consisting
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Versi
Header
Type of
on
Length
Service
of only IP header fields, identical
Total Length
Identification
packets may exist. Therefore, in order
TTL
Flags
Protocol
to improve the precision of packet
Fragment
Header Checksums
Source IP Address
identification, we decide to include a
Destination IP Address
part of IP data field (maximum 20
Options
bytes).The following figure shows the
Padding
IP Data Part ---- MAX( 20 Bytes)
structure of the packet feature.
Trace and Search process has

two modules: Packet Search module
Implementation
of
Our
and
Upstream
Network
Interface
Traceback System:
Decision
The heart of our trace back approach is
module accepts Trace Order and
the tracer. The following section
searches for the specified packet
describes how to implement a tracer,
feature from Packet Information Area.
which is one of the major functions in
If a record matching with the trace
tracing tasks.
packet is found, Upstream Network
Implementation of Tracer:
Interface Decision module decides the
module.
Packet
Search
upstream network interface and notices
The tracing function consists of
this trace result to the monitoring
2 modules.
manager
(1) Packet Conversion and Store
using
Notification
of
Processing Result.
process
After routing process,
Packet Conversion and Store process
gets a packet to forward and creates a
record containing the address of the
Routing
Process
Packet
store
Packet
Info
Area
Trace
Informa
tion
upstream unit (MAC address) and a

packet feature extracted from the
packet. This record is stored into
Packet Information Area in the tracer.
Every incoming packet is processed
through this procedure.
Packet
Search
module
(2) Trace and Search process
N/w
interface
Decision
module

173
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Information Management:
Protocol process
There are two types of information

used in tracers. One is the packet
Structure of tracer
information that converts traversed

packets
Trace algorithm:
information
into
packet
features and stores them, and the other

is the network interface information
We have developed the algorithm that
that
processes Trace Order reception, trace
information
execution for upstream path decision
connected each other.
stores
network
between
interface
two
units
and trace report. Below we describe

our algorithm.
(1) Packet Information Area

Packet Information Area contains
Step 1: Start the Tracing process.
packet
Step 2: Receive the packet feature
network interface information and
and passed it to packet search module.
forwarding
Step 3:
necessary information for tracing. On
Check Packet Information
features
time
which
of
includes
the
packet
Area with packet feature received.
our implementation, records are stored
Step 4: If any match found then let
in the memory area of the tracer for the
matched record as target record.
purpose of real-time processing. If the
Step
volume of Packet Information Area
5:
Compares
the
Address
exceeds the memory capacity, the
Information (i.e. MAC address) in

target record
oldest record will be deleted and the
with the address
latest one will be stored in turn.
Information (i.e. MAC address &IP

address) of the connected tracer stored
(2) Network interface Information
in trace information.
We are having three methods for
Step 6: If match found decide IP
obtaining
address and return to the monitoring
network
interface
information from the unit connected
manager as trace result.
with the tracer.
Step 7: Repeat step 3 to step 6 until
Method 1: Trace table method
source of the attack is detected.
Checking
Step 8: Stop the Tracing Process.
the
network
interface
number, IP addresses and physical

174
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
addresses (e.g. MAC address on LAN)
Conclusion :
of the connected tracers in advance,
We proposed a traceback system that
and storing them in the unit.
can pursue the source even if an IP

address
Method 2: ARP table method
is
forged,
and
have
demonstrated the effectiveness of the
Using the ARP table stored in the unit
traceback processing. We will consider
to look up the IP address and physical
the relationship among the network
address of the connected tracer when
load, and the number of tracers. In the
Trace Order is received.
viewpoint of the introduction of the

traceback, we have 2 subjects. First
Method
3:
Order-driven
query
subject is the method to identify
method
matching packets and identify the
Without providing a
obtaining
fixed
network
table,
sources under DOS attack where
interface
identical
packets
are
sent
from
information using the lower layer
different sources. Second subject is to
protocols (e.g. RARP protocol) in
introduce
response to Trace Order.
However, in the mean time we will
the
tracer
function.
implement our proposed model in

The above methods leads to the
future to assure security in network
following conclusion, As network
communications.
interface information is temporarily

stored
in
the
ARP
table,
some
Authors :
information may be changed when
1.K.Sanjai, IV-CSE, SSM college of
searching the table; Although the
Engineering
order-driven query method is suitable

for
obtaining
the
latest
2.K.Sowbarani, IV-CSE,SSM college
network
of Engineering
interface information, the process is

complicated and takes longer time
REFERENCES :
because the query task to the adjacent
1.Mr.Ragav,
node is called every time a trace order
Technical
Lead-
NIIT,Chennai
is issued. Therefore, we select the trace
2.Mr.D.Namachivayam,
table method that provides real-time,
Assistant
Professor SSM college of engineering.
reliable, and efficient tracing.

175
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

176
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
EVALUATION: OFDMA & SC-OFDMA PERFORMANCE ON

WIRELESS COMMUNICATION
G. MANIKANDAN1, T. JENISH2, S. PRASHANTHY3
1
Research Scholar
St. Peters University
St. Peters Institute of Higher Education and Research
Avadi, Chennai-600 054
2
Assistant Professor, Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering,

3
UG Student , Department of Computer Science & Engineering,

Keywords- Single carrier frequency division Multiple
Access (SC-FDMA); Orthogonal Frequency Division
Multiple Access (OFDMA); Multiple input multiple
output(MIMO); Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR); (UMB)
Ultra-Mobile Broadband; Long Term Evolution(LTE)
Abstract This paper investigates OFDMA and SCFDMA techniques combined with the Orthogonal
Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). Single
carrier frequency Division Multiple Access(SC-FDMA)
is a notable application of Multiple Input Multiple
Output(MIMO) system. SC-FDMA is one of the most
promising techniques aiming at solving the capacity
problem of wireless communication systems and
achieving higher spectral efficiency, depending on
multiplexing signals based on their spatial signature.
On the other hand most third generation mobile phone
systems are using Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA) as their modulation technique. CDMA is not
so complicated to implement as OFDM based systems.
As CDMA has a wide bandwidth, it is difficult to
equalize the overall spectrum - significant levels of
processing would be needed for this as it consists of a
continuous signal and not discrete carriers. Not as easy
to aggregate spectrum as for OFDM. For this reason,
CDMA is also investigating so that the performance of
OFDM-SC-FDMA can be compared. Various OFDMA
techniques are investigated including LTE or Long
Term Evolution is the brand name given to the efforts
of 3GPP 4th Generation technology development efforts
mostly in Europe and UMB (Ultra-Mobile Broadband)
is the brand name for similar efforts by 3GPP2, linear
detection schemes, minimum mean square error,
ordered successive cancellation, and maximum
likelihood methods. Promising results are obtained to
enhance spectral efficiency on the expense of
computational complexity which needs to be addressed.
I.
Wireless Technology Overview
Wireless technologies enable one or more

devices to communicate without an actual wired
connection. Radio frequency is used to transmit
the data. Such technologies are rapidly evolving
to meet a variety of communications needs, from
simple to complex wireless communications
needs can all be classified in one of three ways,
based on the distance they are meant to cover.
These include: wireless personal area networks
(WPAN), wireless local area networks (WLAN),
and wireless wide area networks (WWAN). The
evolution is stated in figure: 1.1 [9]
Figure: 1.1 Evolution of wireless technology

177
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Figure: 3.1 LTE frame structure[1]

II.
Verizon Wireless and LTE Mobile

Broadband Technology
Wireless carriers are keenly interested in

choosing the best technology for their
customersfor both today and tomorrow. For
Verizon Wireless, selecting the right technology
is imperative. As a leader in the wireless
industry, Verizon Wireless is committed to the
potential technology advances offered by LTE.
Verizon Wireless is currently conducting
laboratory and field tests using LTE technology
and plans to launch its 4G mobile network in
2010. This deployment will help the company
realize its goal of delivering improved wireless
Internet connectivity and mobility to its
customers. For the mobile user, connectivity
means an un tethered experience and true
mobility.[7] Users can work and communicate
almost whenever and wherever they want.
LTEs improved speeds will allow wireless
carriers to offer a number of business-specific
applications and services, such as video
conferencing, direct connectivity, and mobile
applications that bring the desktop experience to
mobile devices.[8]
III.
Figure: 3.2 LTE frame structure [2]
IV.
Evolution of LTE
As mentioned previously in this paper, LTE is a

4G wireless technology that Verizon Wireless
and numerous leading wireless carriers have
chosen as their upgrade path beyond 3G
technologies. Verizon Wireless will operate LTE
in the 700 MHz spectrum, which translates to
unprecedented performance and data access.[8]
The 3GPP body began its initial investigation of
the LTE standard as a viable technology in 2004.
In March 2005, 3GPP began a feasibility study
whose key goals were to agree on network
architecture and a multiple access method, in
terms of the functional split between the radio
access and the core network[5]. The 3GPP
decided to use OFDMA in the downlink
direction and use SC-FDMA in the uplink
direction. The specifications for the LTE
standard were approved by 3GPP in January
2007. The specifications are now under change
control, leading to their inclusion in 3GPP
Release 8. While the LTE requirements are
finalized, the standard is not fully completed.
LTE Release 8 was completed by late 2008 as
shown
in
figure
4.1[8]
LTE frame structure
As mentioned previously in this paper, LTE is a

4G wireless technology that Verizon Wireless
and numerous leading wireless carriers have
chosen as their upgrade path beyond 3G
technologies. Verizon Wireless will operate LTE
in the 700 MHz spectrum, which translates to
unprecedented performance and data access is
shown in figure 3.1 and 3.2[8]
Figure: 4.1 Evolution of LTE

178
www.iaetsd.in
V.
quality, variable rates of information transfer can

be used to maximize system resource utilization
with high quality of user experience.
MIMO-OFDMA
Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) is one

of the most popular Advanced Antenna
Technologies which is supported both by LTE
and UMB. The salient features of MIMO is that
it offers higher throughput for a given bandwidth
and higher link range for a given power value. A
detailed discussion of the MIMO technology is
beyond the scope of this survey and we provide
a cursory glance at the key features of the
technology. In MIMO the transceiver and
receiver have multiple antennas giving MIMO
multiple flavors based on the number of
antennas present on each side. However, the key
idea is that a transmitter sends multiple streams
on multiple transmit antennas 9 of 15 and each
transmitted stream goes through different paths
to reach each receiver antenna .The different
paths taken by the same stream to reach multiple
receivers allow canceling errors using superior
signal processing techniques. MIMO also
achieves spatial multiplexing to distinguish
among different symbols on the samefrequency.
MIMO thus helps in achieving higher spectral
efficiency and Link reliability.[9]
VI.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
One particular interest for SNR estimation is to

use it for Adaptive Orthogonal Frequency
Division Multiplexing (AOFDM) based wireless
communication systems. Adaptive modulation
that employs different level of modulation for
each (or a group) of sub-carriers depends
strongly on accurate estimation of SNR value
[1]-[3]. There are many other applications that
can exploit SNR information, like channel
estimation through interpolation and optimal soft
information generation for high performance
decoding algorithms[4],[ 5].
In previous SNR estimation techniques, the SNR
measurement is considered as an indication of
long-term fading statistics due to shadowing and
log-normal fading. This long-term SNR estimate
is often calculated using regularly. Transmitted
training (or pilot) sequences. Instead of using
training sequences, the data symbols can also be
used for this purpose. For example,
Balachandran, who uses SNR information as a
channel quality indicator for rate adaptation,
exploits the cumulative Euclidean metric
corresponding to the decoded trellis path for
channel quality information [6]. Jacobsmeyer
describes another method for channel quality
measurement. He proposes the use of the
difference between the maximum likelihood
decoder metrics for the best path and the second
best path [7]. In a sense, he uses some sort of
soft information for channel quality indication.
But, this approach does not provide any
information about the strength of the interferer
or the desired signal. There are several other
SNR measurement techniques which can be
found in [8] and reference listed therein.[12]
SNR-OFDMA
Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is broadly defined as

the ratio of the desired signal power to the noise
power. SNR estimation indicates the reliability
of the link between the transmitter and receiver.
In adaptive system design, SNR estimation is
commonly used for measuring the quality of the
channel. Then, the system parameters are change
adaptively based on this measurement. For
example, if the measured channel quality is low,
the transmitter adds some redundancy or
complexity to the information bits (more
powerful coding), or reduces the modulation
level (better Euclidean distance), or increases the
spreading rate (longer spreading code) for lower
data rate transmission. Therefore, instead of
fixed information rate for all levels of channel

179
www.iaetsd.in
VII.
subcarriers are allowed in OFDM since

orthogonality will ensure the subcarrier
separation at the receiver, providing better
spectral efficiency and the use of steep band
pass filter was eliminated. OFDM transmission
system offers possibilities for alleviating many
of the problems encountered with single carrier
systems. It has the advantage of spreading out a
frequency selective fade over many symbols.
This effectively randomizes burst errors caused
by fading or impulse interference so that instead
of several adjacent symbols being Completely
destroyed, many symbols are only slightly
distorted. This allows successful reconstruction
of majority of them even without forward error
correction. Because of dividing an entire signal
bandwidth into many narrow sub-bands, the
frequency response over individual sub-bands is
relatively flat due to sub-band are smaller than
coherence bandwidth of the channel. Thus,
equalization is potentially simpler than in a
single carrier system and even equalization may
be avoided altogether if Differential encoding is
implemented.[3]
Comparison of parameters of UMTS,

HSPA, HSPA+ and LTE
Figure:4.1 Comparison of UMTS, HSPA,

HSPA+ and LTE
VIII.
What is OFDM?
Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing

(OFDM) is a widely used modulation and
multiplexing technology, which has become the
basis of many telecommunications standards
including wireless local area networks (LANs),
digital terrestrial television (DTT) and digital
radio broadcasting in much of the world.[3]
In the past, as well as in the present, the OFDM
is referred in the literature as Multi-carrier,
Multi-tone and Fourier Transform. The OFDM
concept is based on spreading the data to be
transmitted over a large number of carriers, each
being modulated at a low rate. The carriers are
made orthogonal to each other by appropriately
choosing the frequency spacing between them.
A multicarrier system, such as FDM (aka:
Frequency Division Multiplexing), divides the
total available bandwidth in the spectrum into
sub-bands for multiple carriers to transmit in
parallel.[15] It combines a large number of low
data rate carriers to construct a composite high
data rate communication system. Orthogonality
gives the carriers a valid reason to be closely
spaced with overlapping without ICI. [16]
IX.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
X.
Principle of OFDM
In digital communications, information is

expressed in the form of bits. The term symbol
refers to a collection, in various sizes, of bits
[17]. OFDM data are generated by taking
symbols in the spectral space using M-PSK,
QAM, etc, and convert the spectra to time
domain by taking the Inverse Discrete Fourier
Transform (IDFT). Since Inverse Fast Fourier
Transform (IFFT) is more cost effective to
implement, it is usually used instead [16]. The
main features of a practical OFDM system are as
follows:
Why OFDM?
In contrast to conventional Frequency Division

Multiplexing, the spectral overlapping among
Some processing is done on the source

data, such as coding for correcting
errors, interleaving and mapping of bits
onto symbols. An example of mapping
used is QAM.

180
www.iaetsd.in
XI.
The symbols are modulated onto

orthogonal sub-carriers. This is done by
using IFFT.
Orthogonality is maintained during
channel transmission. This can be
achieved by adding a cyclic prefix to the
OFDM frame to be sent. The cyclic
prefix consists of the L last samples of
the frame, which are copied and placed
in the beginning of the frame. It must be
longer than the channel impulse
response.
Synchronization: cyclic prefix can be
used to detect the start of each frame.
This is done by using the fact that the L
first and last samples are the same and
therefore correlated.
Demodulation of the received signal by
using FFT.
Channel equalization: the channel can
be estimated either by using a training
sequence or sending known so-called
pilot symbols at predefined sub-carriers.
Decoding and de-interleaving.
Basic OFDM system
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
The basic principle of OFDM is to split a highrate data stream into a number of lower rate
streams that are transmitted simultaneously over
a number of subcarriers. The block diagram
showing a simplified configuration for an
OFDM transmitter and receiver is given in Fig.1
& Fig. 2. [3]
XII.
Orthogonality
The main aspect in OFDM is maintaining

orthogonality of the carriers. If the integral of
the product of two signals is zero over a time
period, then these two signals are said to be
orthogonal to each other. Two sinusoid with
frequencies that are integer multiples of a
common frequency can satisfy this criterion.
The OFDM signal generated by the system in

Fig 1 & 2 is at baseband ; in order to generate a
radio frequency (RF) signal at the desired
transmit frequency filtering and mixing is
required. OFDM allows for a high spectral
efficiency as the carrier power and modulation
scheme can be individually controlled for each
carrier. However in broadcast systems these are
fixed due to the one-way communication.
Therefore, orthogonality is defined by: Where n

and m are two unequal integers; fo is the
fundamental frequency; T is the period over
which the integration is taken. For OFDM, T is
one symbol period and fo set to 1/T for optimal
effectiveness [15][16].
XIII.
OFDM Applications:
OFDM technique is the most prominent

technique of this era .Some of its applications is
given below.
DAB: DAB - OFDM forms the basis for

the Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB)

181
www.iaetsd.in
XIV.
standard in the European market [18].

Digital Audio Broadcasting (DAB)
using OFDM has been standardized in
Europe [19] and is the next step in
evolution beyond FM radio broadcasting
providing interference free transmission.
HDTV
Wireless LAN Networks
5.3.1 HIPERLAN/2
IEEE 802.11g
IEEE 802.16 Broadband Wireless
Access System.
Wireless ATM transmission system
IEEE 802.11a
SC-FDMA
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
and thereby ensure power-efficient transmission.

This approach is often referred to as blocked or
localized SC-FDMA.[9]
XV.
SC-FCDMA & OF-DMA in LTE

Physical Layer
The multiple access scheme in LTE downlink

uses Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple
Access and uplink uses Single Carrier
Frequency. These multiple access solutions
provide orthogonality between the users,
reducing the interference and improving the
network capacity. The multiple access schemes
are illustrated in Figure 15.1.
Single-carrier FDMA (SC-FDMA) was chosen

to reduce Peak to Average Ratio (PAR), which
has been identified as a critical issue for use of
OFDMA in the uplink where power-efficient
amplifiers are required in mobile devices.
Another important requirement was to maximize
the coverage. For each time interval, the base
station scheduler assigns a unique timefrequency interval to a terminal for the
transmission of user data, thereby ensuring
intracell orthogonality. Slow power control, for
compensating path loss and shadow fading, is
sufficient as no near-far problem is present due
to the orthogonal uplink transmissions.
Transmission
parameters,
coding,
and
modulation are similar to the downlink
transmission.
Figure:15.1 Physical layer in LTE
Date Rate: For 20 MHz spectrum, the target for

peak data rate is 50 Mbps (for uplink) and 100
Mbps (for downlink). Bandwidth: In 3GPP
technology family, there were considered both
the wide band(WCDMA with 5MHz) and the
narrowband (GSM with 200 kHz). Therefore,
the new system is now required to facilitate
frequency allocation flexibility with 1.25/2.5, 5,
10, 15 and 20 MHz allocations [7].
The chosen SC-FDMA solution is based on

using a cyclic prefix to allow high-performance
and low-complexity receiver implementation in
the e-Node B. As such, the receiver
requirements are more complex than in the case
of OFDMA for similar link performance, but
this is not considered to be a problem in the base
station. The terminal is only assigned with
contiguous spectrum blocks in the frequency
domain to maintain the single-carrier properties
Peak Spectral Efficiency: The peak spectral

efficiency requirement for downlink Is 5 bps/Hz
or higher, and for uplink is 2.5 bps/Hz or higher.
Spectral Efficiency of Cell Edge: The
requirement for spectral efficiency of cell edge
is 0.04-0.06 bps/Hz/user for downlink and 0.02-

182
www.iaetsd.in
0.03 bps/Hz/user for uplink, with assumption of

10 users/cell.
XVII.
Average Cell Spectral Efficiency: The average

cell spectral efficiency required for downlink is
1.6-2.1 bps/Hz/cell and for uplink it is 0.66-1.0
bps/Hz/cell.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
BER vs SNR of OFDMA and SCFDMA
The BER vs SNR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA

are shown in Figures 17.1 & 17.2 and the
corresponding values in Tables 4.2 and 4.3
respectively. In Tables 18.1 and 18.2, the
observations are taken for a specific value of
BER (1e-3). In both OFDMA and SCInternational
Latency: The LTE control-plane latency

(transition time to active state) is less than 100
ms (for idle to active), and is less than 50 ms
(for dormant to active). The user plane latency is
less than 10 ms from UE (user end) to server.
FDMA, the BPSK and QPSK have same SNR

values of 6.8 and 6.5 respectively, but a sudden
change occur in 16 (16.4) which shows that 64
Security & Mobility: Security and mobility in

3GPP technology is used at good level with the
earlier systems starting from GSM and it is
sustained at that level and higher.[19]
XVI.
Transceiver result
This simulates model of OFDMA and SCFDMA in Matlab. The block diagrams of
OFDMA and SC-FDMA are shown in Figure
16.1 and Figure 16.2 respectively, below. The
block diagrams of OFDMA and SC-FDMA are
similar to OFDM system, except the additional
subcarrier mapping and the position of some
blocks.[19]
Figure 17.1: BER vs SNR of OFDMA with
Adaptive Modulation.
Figure:16.1 Transmitter
Figure: 16.2 Receiver

Figure: 17.2 BER vs SNR of SC-FDMA with
Adaptive Modulation

183
www.iaetsd.in
XVIII.
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
BER VS SNR for OFDMA
Error Probability of OFDMA and SC-FDMA for

Adaptive Modulation The error probability
graphs of OFDMA and SC-FDMA are shown in
Figures 18.1 and 18.2, and the corresponding
values in Tables 18.3 and 18.4 respectively.
Table 18.3: Error probability of OFDMA
Table 18.4: Error probability of SC-FDMA

The 64-QAM has higher SNR values in both
OFDMA and SC-FDMA
XIX.
Figure 18.1: Power Spectral Density of OFDMA
Power Spectral Density of OFDMA

and SC-FDMA:
The power spectral density of OFDMA and SCFDMA are shown in figure 19.1and figure 19.2
respectively.
Table 18.3: Error probability of OFDMA Table

18.4: Error probability of SC-FDMA From
Tables 18.3and 18.4, it can be seen that for a
specific value of Pe (1e-0.5) the BPS modulation
has less value of SNR as compared to other
modulations.
Figure 19.1: Power Spectral Density of OFDMA
Figure 18.2: Power Spectral Density of SCFDMA

184
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
Figure20.2: PAPR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA

for QPSK
Figure 19.2: Power Spectral Density of SCFDMA
b)
Figure 19.1 and 19.2 shows the power spectral

density of the OFDMA and SCFDMA
respectively. We can observe that the average
power of all SC-FDMA symbols (512) is nearly
-375dB, whereas, in case of OFDMA the
average power of all symbols is nearly -400dB.
This shows that the SC-FDMA symbols have
inherently more average power as compared to
OFDMA at all frequencies. This result also
shows the transmit power requirements of
OFDMA and SC-FDMA symbols which is
covered in next section of PAPR.
XX.
a)
16-QAM and 64-QAM: The PAPR of

OFDMA and SC-FDMA for 16-QAM
and 64-QAM are shown in Figures 20.4
and 20.4 respectively.
Figure 20.3: PAPR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA

for 16-QAM
PAPR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA for

Adaptive Modulation
BPSK and QPSK: The PAPR of
OFDMA and SC-FDMA for BPSK and
QPSK modulations are shown in Figure
20.1 and Figure 20.2 respectively.
Figure 20.4: PAPR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA

for 64-QAM.
From Figures 4.11 and 4.12, it can be observed
that by increasing the order of modulation, the
PAPR of SC-FDMA increases from 7.5 dB to 8
dB (in case of 16-QAM) and becomes 9.8 db (in
Figure20.1:PAPR of OFDMA and SC-FDMA

for BPSK.

185
www.iaetsd.in
case of 64-QAM). Thus, for SC-FDMA the

PAPR increases for higher order modulation
XXI.
scheme i.e. BPSK, QPSK and 16-QAM for

uplink in order to have less PAPR at user end. In
nutshell, SC-FDMA is more power efficient.
Here our future work is focused toward the
study of achievable "Enhancement Survey on
Security in 4G".
Conclusion
LTE and BER is a key parameter for indicating

the system performance of any data link. From
the simulated results, it can be observed that for
a fix value of SNR, the BER increases for high
order modulation (16-QAM and 64-QAM) in
both the multiple access techniques (OFDMA
and SC-FDMA) used in LTE system. On the
other hand, the lower order modulation schemes
(BPSK and QPSK) experience less BER at
receiver thus lower order modulations improve
the system performance in terms of BER and
SNR. If the bandwidth efficiency of these
modulation schemes is considered, the higher
order modulation accommodates more data
within a given bandwidth and is more bandwidth
efficient as compared to lower order modulation.
Thus, there exists a tradeoff between BER and
bandwidth efficiency among these modulation
schemes used in LTE. It is also concluded from
the results that, the error probability increases as
order of modulation scheme increases.
Therefore, the selection of modulation schemes
in adaptive modulation is quite crucial based on
these results. The power consumption at the user
end such as portable devices is again a vital
issue for uplink transmission in LTE system.
From the simulation results, it can be concluded
that the higher order modulation schemes have
an impact on the PAPR of both OFDMA and
SC-FDMA. The PAPR increases in SC-FDMA
and slightly decreases in OFDMA for higher
order modulation schemes. The overall value of
PAPR in SC-FDMA is still less than that of
OFDMA in all modulation schemes, and that is
why it has been adopted for uplink transmission
in LTE system. Based on the results obtained, it
can be concluded to adopt low order modulation
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
XXII.
REFERENCES
[1] Broadband
MIMO-OFDM
Wireless
Communications : PROCEEDINGS OF THE
IEEE, VOL. 92, NO. 2, FEBRUARY 2004
[2] Design and BER Performance of MIMOOFDM
for
Wireless
Broadband
Communications, International Journal of
Modern Engineering Research (IJMER) Vol.3,
Issue.3, May-June. 2013 pp-1382-1385.
[3] A Review on OFDM: Concept, Scope & its
Applications, IOSR Journal of Mechanical and
Civil Engineering (IOSRJMCE) ISSN : 22781684 Volume 1, Issue 1 (May-June 2012), PP
07-11
[4] IMPLEMENTING SC-FDMA &OFDMA IN
MATLAB:
International
Journal
of
Computing and Corporate Research ISSN
(Online) : 2249-054X Volume 3 Issue 6
November 2013 International Manuscript ID :
2249054XV3I6112013-05 1
[5] A Modified Fast FFT Algorithm for OFDM
Based Future Wireless Communication
System: International Journal of Soft
Computing and Engineering (IJSCE) ISSN:
2231-2307, Volume-1, Issue-6, January 2012
[6] Fairness
Aware
Group
Proportional
Frequency Domain Resource Allocation in LSC-FDMA Based Uplink*: Int. J.
Communications, Network and System
Sciences,
2011,
4,
487-494
doi:10.4236/ijcns.2011.48060
Published
Online
August
2011
(http://www.SciRP.org/journal/ijcns)
[7] Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing
Based Wireless Communication System for
Digital Broadcast Applications: IP Multimedia
Communications A Special Issue from IJCA www.ijcaonline.org

186
www.iaetsd.in
ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6
[8] white paper: LTE: The Future of Mobile

Broadband Technology
[9] Long Term Evolution (LTE) & Ultra-Mobile
Broadband (UMB) Technologies for Broadband
Wireless Access
[10] LTE: The Future of Mobile Broadband
Technology
[11] Theory of Frequency Division Multiplexing:
http://zone.ni.com/devzone/cda/ph/p/id/269
[12] Noise Power and SNR Estimation for OFDM
Based Wireless Communication Systems Acosta,
Guillermo.
OFDM
Simulation
Using
MATLAB 2000
[13] Litwin, Louis and Pugel, Michael. The
Principles of OFDM 2001
[14] Understanding an OFDM transmission:
http://www.dsplog.com/2008/02/03/understandin
g-an-ofdm-transmission/
[15] Minimum frequency spacing for having
orthogonal
sinusoidal
http://www.dsplog.com/2007/12/31/minimumfrequencyspacing-for-having-orthogonalsinusoidal
[16] G. Fay, "Wireless Data Networking,"
International Journal of Network Management, 8
March 1992, pp. 8-17.
[17] ETSI, "Radio Broadcast Systems: Digital
Audio Broadcasting (DAB) to mobile, portable
and fixed receivers," ETSI final draft ETS 300
401, Nov 1994.
[18] A Modified Fast FFT Algorithm for OFDM
Based Future Wireless Communication System:
International Journal of Soft Computing and
Engineering (IJSCE) ISSN: 2231-2307, Volume1, Issue-6, January 2012.

187
www.iaetsd.in

Iccter Proceedings

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iccter Proceedings

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PROCEEDINGS

Copyright 2014 by IAETSD

ISBN: 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

Proceedings preparation, editing and printing are sponsored by

Conference Advisory Committee:

Dr. P Paramasivam, NUS, Singapore

Conference Chairs and Review committee:

Dr. Shanti Swaroop, Professor IIT Madras

2nd ICCTER - 2014 CONTENTS

DEBLURRING OF NOISY OR BLURRED IMAGE BY USING KERNEL

INVESTIGATION OF THERMAL BARRIER COATING ON I.C ENGINE

VLSI BASED FAULT DETECTION & CORRECTION SCHEME FOR THE

NANO MATERIALS FILLED POLYMERS FOR REDUCING THE

RTOS BASED ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIAL TEMPERATURE AND

UNDER-WATER WELDING USING ROBOTIC TECHNOLOGY

MODELING OF MAGNETICALLY COUPLED EMBEDDED Z SOURCE

RSVP PROTOCOL USED IN REAL TIME APPLICATION NETWORKS

DATABASE INTRUSION DETECTION USING ROLE BASED ACCESS

DETECTION OF ADDICTION OF AN INDIVIDUAL AND AVOIDING

ACTIVE RESOURCE PROVISION IN CLOUD COMPUTING THROUGH

CPLM: CLOUD FACILITATED PRIVACY SHIELDING LEAKAGE

DESIGN AND IMPLEMENTATION OF ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCERS

STUDY AND IMPLEMENTATION OF 3 STAGE QUANTUM

DETECTION, RECOGNITION AND LOCALIZATION OF PARTIAL

EVASIVE SECURITY USING ACLS ON THREADS

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT

ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

DEBLURRING OF NOISY OR BLURRED

PG Student- M.Tech. VLSI Design & Embedded System Engineering

KEYWORDS: Matlab, deconvolution, kernel estimation

2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT

In this paper, a novel approach to produce a

ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

Image deblurring can be categorized into

Recovering a high quality image from a very

Recently, spatially variant kernel estimation

II. PREVIOUS WORKS

2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT

Using two images for image deblurring or

ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

proposed technique can obtain much accurate kernel

2.3 Multiple images deblurring and denoising:

Fig. 1 Block diagram of kernel estimation

2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT

The goal is to reconstruct a high quality image I

ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

4.1 Iterative kernel estimation:

Given {z(j); j=1,.,m}

IV. KERNEL ESTIMATION ALGORITHM

Fig.2 Flowchart of an kernel estimation algorithm

2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ENGINEERING & TECHNOLOGY FOR SKILL DEVELOPMENT

min k ||Akb||2+2||k||2 ; ki 0 and

ISBN : 378 - 26 - 138420 - 6

between two images. It has two options to capture

1. Initialize k0 =, the delta function.

is a scalar that controls the convergence. The

5.2 Image denoising:

This approach to a variety of blurred/noisy

5.1 Image acquisition:

2nd INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON CURRENT TRENDS IN ENGINEERING RESEARCH